JP2019115437A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which enables a player to easily grasp a state advantageous to the player and can increase freedom of ball put-out design by a method different from a conventional one.SOLUTION: There are a "normal advantageous" state and a "GG" (ART) state where a possibility of navigation is higher than the "normal advantageous" state as an advantageous section where navigation of a pressing order bell is possible when an advantageous section shift lottery is won. After the pressing order bell is won and navigation is performed or a result display corresponding to the MB is led, an advantageous section completion lottery can be performed. The "normal advantageous" state includes a bell navigation non-generation state and a bell navigation generation possible state. After the "normal advantageous" state is started until a prescribed game number(100G) passes, the bell navigation non-occurrence state is set.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 160

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In this type of gaming machine, as a device for facilitating so-called payout design, a gaming machine is known in which an internal winning combination is won so that the payout rate falls below 1 in some bonus states. (See, for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, as a prophetic effect of whether or not to win the AT (assist time) which is advantageous for the player, a gaming machine elaborated in a complicated rendition mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player It is known (for example, refer patent document 2).

JP, 2015-202331, A JP, 2015-16085, A

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is premised that the player plays a game mainly in the bonus carryover state, and the enjoyment of winning the bonus balls and losing the balls is lost. Further, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 2, the rendering mode and specifications are complicated, and there is a problem that it is difficult for a non-expert to grasp what kind of state is advantageous.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and makes it easy for a player to grasp a state advantageous to the player, and a gaming machine capable of enhancing the freedom of ball design by a method different from the old one. Intended to be provided.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) which can be operated by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means;
Variation control means (for example, main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display means based on establishment of the start condition;
Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition;
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means Stop control means (for example, main control board 71);
Operation mode notification means (for example, the sub control board 72 and the notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying the user of the operation modes for the plurality of stop operation means advantageous for the player;
State control means (e.g., main control board 71) for controlling an advantageous state (e.g., advantageous section) in which notification by the operation mode notifying means can be performed;
An advantageous state notifying means (for example, a state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state;
A gaming machine (e.g., pachislot machine 1) equipped with
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a “normally advantageous” state) in which notification by the operation mode notifying means is possible when a predetermined condition is established (for example, upon winning of an advantageous section transition lottery); 1) at least having a second advantageous state (for example, the state of "GG" (ART)) in which the possibility of notification by the operation mode notifying means is higher than that of the advantageous state;
As the internal winning combination which can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous for the plurality of variable display means is derived when the stopping operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stopping operating means; A special part (for example, pushing order bell) that can result in a result display different from the advantageous result display on the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Have a predetermined bonus role (for example, MB),
The state control means may be notified by the operation mode notifying means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or a result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an end of advantageous section lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after at least one of the display being derived is satisfied,
In the first advantageous state, a notification suppression state (for example, a bell navigation non-generation state) in which notification by the operation mode notifying means is not performed in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination; A notification permission state (for example, a bell navigation generation possible state) in which notification by the operation mode notification means is permitted in the unit game determined as the internal winning combination,
From the start of the first advantageous state to the establishment of a specific condition (for example, a predetermined number of games (100 G)), the notification suppression state is established.

  According to such a configuration, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in which the possibility of notification is different are provided, and the first advantageous state is basically ended as the notification suppression state until the specific condition is satisfied. Since there is no such condition, the notification of the operation mode can be suppressed by appropriately setting such specific conditions to achieve an advantage balance between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, which is an advantage for the player. While making it easy to grasp, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in ball design.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The specific condition is that a predetermined number of unit games (for example, 100G) are executed, and the predetermined number is more than the average number of unit games taken until the predetermined bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is characterized by many things.

  According to such a gaming machine, there is a high possibility that a predetermined bonus combination is determined and a determination result for ending the advantageous state is obtained before the specific condition is established, so that the advantageous balance between the advantageous state and the bonus is obtained. Can be implemented properly.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of easily grasping an advantageous state for a player and capable of increasing the degree of freedom in ball design by a method different from the conventional one.

It is a figure showing a functional flow of a pachislot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a whole perspective view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a whole front view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a schematic layout figure inside a case of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment state of a mirror mechanism. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a display unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening part for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a rear screen mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate of the screen housing. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing the operation state of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is a figure which shows a part of display screen displayed on the sub display apparatus of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the subcontrol board of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state regarding the presence or absence of alerting | reporting of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | positioning table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the contrast table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the abbreviation of the winning combination in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the normal game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal middle high probability lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure showing a CZ lottery table stored in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ1 inside mode up lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure showing a CZ2 middle point up lottery table stored in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in normal ART in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in ART memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART level determination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal ART inside high probability random determination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure showing a CT lottery table during ART stored in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal ART top additional lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table during CT memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in CT memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT inside addition lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure showing a CT middle set number addition lottery table stored in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the bonus in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure showing a bonus type lottery table stored in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the random number ART game number addition lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT completion lottery table at the time of bonus end memorized by the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure showing the flow of the exceptional game in the general game state in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the non-ART flag conversion lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the alerting | reported performed by the main side in the said pachislot machine, and the alerting | reported performed by a sub side. It is a flow chart which shows the main control processing of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing according to the said state of a pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flag conversion process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of the usual middle of a pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of CZ in the said pachislot machine start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ3 of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of start during normal ART of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of CT during the said Pachislot machine start. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of BB during start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initialization process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flow chart which shows BB check processing of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows RT check processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows RT check processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of CZ * ART of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the sub side navigation control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the player registration process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history management process of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the display screen of the sub display apparatus of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure showing the flow of the game in the CT precursor in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the pachislot machine of another embodiment, and the symbol combination displayed actually. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the pachislot machine of another embodiment, and the symbol combination displayed actually. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in normal ART memorize | stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ART middle addition lottery table memorize | stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in CT memorize | stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a CT during CT meter elevation lottery table stored in a pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CT middle addition lottery table memorize | stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CZ in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CZ2 completion | finish lottery table memorize | stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure showing a lock lottery table stored in a pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT precursor in the Pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of alerting | reporting between MB flags in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the correspondence of the alerting | reported performed by the main side in a pachi-slot machine, and the notification performed by a sub side. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the locked state and alerting | reporting in the pachi-slot machine of a modification. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the alerting | reported performed by the main side and the alerting | reported performed by a sub side in the pachislot machine of a modification. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting | reported performed by the sub side in the pachislot machine of a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control board of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the ratio indicator of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the information display of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a pattern of the lighting timing of the status indicator in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting method of the presence or absence of winning of the transfer lottery to a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure showing the basic game flow of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of each game state which the said pachislot machine has. It is a figure showing an internal lottery table and a transition lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the implementation method of CZ in the case where the transition to ART gaming state lottery is performed with the probability decided uniquely. It is a figure which shows the counting method of the number of limit games in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the method of the limit process of the specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure showing the method of the navigation guarantee processing at the time of the end of the specific section in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a pattern of the signal output timing to the external apparatus in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation which cooperated with the external apparatus performed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation which cooperated with the external apparatus performed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the navi securing method in the specific area in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor realization method which used the specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor realization method which used the specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the saving method of the frequency | count of navigation in, when performing the specific area of the frequency | count management of navigation in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a game in the case of managing a lip navigation and a bell navigation separately in a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a game in the case of managing a lip navigation and a bell navigation separately in a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of managing a lip navigation and a bell navigation individually in a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a game in the case of managing a lip navigation and a bell navigation separately in a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a game in the case of managing a lip navigation and a bell navigation separately in a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a game in the case of managing a lip navigation and a bell navigation separately in a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection method of CZ from which an end period differs in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the content of the control at the time of the setting change in the said pachislot machine. It is a transition flow of the ball out state of the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process in MB operation | movement in a ball-out state. It is a figure which puts together the outline of a state of withdrawal and a game state in a list. It is a transition flow of the gaming state of the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows an internal lottery table. It is a figure which shows a normal_favorable section transfer lottery table. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a normal_favored zone initial normal mode lottery table. FIG. 10 shows a normal advantage GG lottery table. It is a figure showing a usual advantageous_favorable section end lottery table. It is a figure which shows a common_end time advantageous section end lottery table. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the flow of an advantageous section according to specification example 1; FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the flow of an advantageous section according to specification example 1; FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the flow of an advantageous section according to specification example 1; FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the advantageous section according to the first embodiment. It is a figure for comparing the amount of payout in the advantageous section of specification example 1 and Example 1. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow at the time of the end of the advantageous section which concerns on the example 2 of specification. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the flow at the end of the advantageous section according to the second embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining after the power-on when there is no setting change and after the power-on when the setting is changed as Example 3. It is a transition flow of the game state which concerns on the modification of another embodiment. It is a figure which summarizes the state of the advantageous section concerning the modification of another embodiment, and an advantageous section lamp in a list.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine showing an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing a game. In addition to the medals, coins, gaming balls, point data or tokens for gaming may be applied as gaming media. Further, the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out gaming media, but is applied to an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media such as gaming balls and provides benefits as electronic data, such as points obtained when predetermined grant conditions are satisfied. It is also possible. Further, in the present embodiment, a function in which the replay probability is higher than normal between the assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") which is a function of navigating establishment of a specific small combination by a lamp or the like and the specific play number. A pachislot machine equipped with an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as "ART") function at the same time as RT, which is an RT, will be described.

[Function flow of Pachislot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, in the pachislot machine 1, when the player inserts a medal and the start lever 6 is operated, one value is taken from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535) Hereinafter, random number values are extracted.

  The internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 31 described later) performs lottery based on the extracted random number value to determine an internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means determines a predetermined winning probability out of a plurality of winning combinations based on the detection of the start operation of the unit game on the start lever 6 by the start switch 6S (see FIG. 30). To determine the internal winning combination.

  By the determination of the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols permitting display along a pay line to be described later is determined. The types of combinations of symbols include those related to the "winning" in which the player is given a benefit such as the payout of medals, the operation of replay (replay), the activation of a bonus, and so-called "missing" other than that. The ones concerned are provided.

  Subsequently, after the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotated, when the player presses the stop button 7L, 7C, 7R, the reel stop control means (main CPU 31 described later, motor drive circuit described later) 39. The stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R described later stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. Do.

  Here, in the pachislot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R within a specified time (190 msec) after the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. . In this embodiment, the number of symbols moving with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R within the specified time is referred to as "the number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number thereof is equivalent to 4 symbols (maximum number of sliding pieces Determined in).

  The reel stop control means uses the specified time when the internal winning combination which permits the display of the combination of symbols relating to winning is determined, the combination of the symbols is a pay line (hereinafter referred to as “effective line” The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped in the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols so as to be displayed as much as possible.

  On the other hand, for combinations of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, reels are used in the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols so as not to be displayed along the effective line using the above-mentioned prescribed time Stop the rotation of 3L, 3C, 3R.

  Thus, when the rotations of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are all stopped, the prize determination means (main CPU 31 described later) determines whether the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line relates to a prize It judges whether or not.

  That is, the prize determination means determines the winning or non-winning of the winning combination on the basis of the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line based on the fact that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means.

  When it is determined that the game is related to winning, a bonus such as medal payout is given to the player. A series of flows as described above are performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine 1.

  In the present embodiment, the first stop operation of the reel stop operation (the operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) which is initially performed when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first stop operation, the first The stop operation performed subsequent to the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed subsequent to the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, in the above-described series of flows, various effects are produced using the output of light (image) performed by the display unit 100, the output of sound performed by the speakers 9L and 9R, or a combination thereof. To be done.

  When the start lever is operated, a random number for presentation (hereinafter, random number for presentation) is extracted separately from the random number used to determine the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determination means determines by lottery the one to be executed this time out of a plurality of types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination. The effect content determination means is carried by a sub control board described later.

  When the effect contents are determined, the display unit 100 and the speakers 9L and 9R execute corresponding effects in conjunction with respective triggers such as start of reel rotation, stop of rotation of each reel, determination of presence or absence of winning, etc. Do. In this manner, in the pachislot machine 1, the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of the symbols to be aimed at) is played by executing the presentation contents corresponding to the internal winning combination. Provided to the player, and the player's interest can be improved.

[Structure of pachislot machine]
The description of the functional flow of the pachislot machine 1 is as described above. Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

  FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment.

The case 60 forming the whole of the pachi-slot machine 1 has a box-like cabinet 61 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door 62a disposed on the front upper side of the cabinet 61, and a lower front side of the cabinet 61 And a lower door 62b disposed at the The cabinet 61 accommodates a device (for example, a reel) used for playing a game. The upper door 62 a and the lower door 62 b are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 61. The upper door 62 a is provided to be able to close the upper part of the opening in the cabinet 61, and the lower door 62 b is provided to be able to close the lower part of the opening in the cabinet 61.
In addition, since the cabinet 61 is a member which fixes the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b, it may be called a fixed frame, and the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b may be called a front door.

  The upper door 62a has the display unit 100 at the center. The display unit 100 is an effect device that performs effects according to the progress of the game, and displays various images according to the progress of the game under the control of the sub control board 72 described later. The display unit 100 may be, for example, a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, but in the present embodiment, a so-called projection mapping device is used as described later.

  A display window 4 formed as a rectangular opening is provided at a substantially central portion of the upper portion of the lower door 62b. The display window 4 constitutes symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later. The display window 4 displays an upper right diagonal cross-up line, an upper top line, a middle center line, a lower bottom line, and a lower right diagonal cross-down line.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the display window 4 displays three symbols out of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Therefore, the display window 4 displays a 3 × 3 symbol. The five lines of the cross-up line to the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4 are lines connecting the 3 × 3 symbols displayed on the display window 4 linearly.

  In the present embodiment, the center line of the five lines is an effective line, and the winning determination is performed based on the combination of the symbols displayed along the center line. On the other hand, four lines other than the center line are pseudo lines which are not used for the determination of winning.

  The activated line (center line) is activated by operating the below-described MAX bet button 11 or inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22. Here, operating the MAX bet button 11 is equivalent to inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, in the case of "the inserted number of medals", both the bet number by the operation of the above-mentioned MAX bet button 11 and the inserted number actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 22 are included.

  In the cabinet 61, a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatably provided in a horizontal row. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R has on its outer peripheral surface a reel band on which a symbol row as identification information composed of a plurality of types of symbols necessary for the game is drawn. That is, a plurality of symbols are displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  A symbol drawn on each reel band is visible from the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the display window 4. Further, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is rotated at a constant speed rotation (for example, 80 rotations / minute), and the symbol rows are variably displayed.

  Below the display window 4, a pedestal 10 with a substantially horizontal surface is formed. The medal insertion slot 22 is provided on the right side in the horizontal surface of the pedestal portion 10, and the MAX bet button 11 and the 1 bet button (not shown) are provided on the left side. Inside the MAX bet button 11, a bet button LED 103 (see FIG. 30) is provided which lights up when medals can be inserted.

  By pressing the MAX bet button 11, the number of (three) medals to be provided for the unit game (one game) is inserted, and the activated line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1-bet button is pressed once. When the 1-bet button is operated three times, three medals to be provided for a unit game are inserted, and the activated line is activated.

  An operation of the MAX bet button 11, an operation of the 1 bet button, and an operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22 (an operation of inserting a medal to perform a game) are referred to as "insertion operation".

  An information indicator 14 is provided substantially at the center of the pedestal 10 in the horizontal plane. The information display 14 is provided with an LED (not shown) that lights up in accordance with the number of medals inserted in the current game (hereinafter referred to as the number of inserted medals). The information display 14 also includes information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a bonus (hereinafter, the number of payouts) and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits). A digital display (not shown) is provided to digitally display to the player.

  In addition, in the information display 14, an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information on stop operation necessary to display a combination of symbols according to the combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. It is provided. The instruction monitor is formed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and lights or blinks in a mode uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to notify, thereby notifying the player of the information of the necessary stop operation. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, there is provided a "push order" in which combinations of symbols displayed in accordance with the order of the stop operation (pushing order) are different. In the mode uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified, for example, “1” is displayed when the push order “1st (performing the first stop operation to the left reel 3L)” is notified. When notifying the pushing order "2nd (perform the first stop operation to the middle reel 3C)", "2" is displayed, and the pushing order "3rd (first stop operation to the right reel 3R) is displayed. And “3” is displayed when informing the user of The details of notification of information on stop operation in the instruction monitor will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 30 described later, the information display 14 is controlled by the main control board 71 via the door relay board 74. Here, in the pachislot machine 1, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, other means controlled by the sub control board 72 may be used to notify information on the stopping operation, for example, Information on the stop operation may be reported in the display unit 100 described above.

  In this case, the mode of notification in the instruction monitor and the mode of notification in the other means may be different modes. That is, in the instruction monitor, notification may be made in a mode uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified, and it is not necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, "1" in the instruction monitor Even if it is displayed, some players may not be able to specify the notification content, so it can not be said to be a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification by the other means, the information on the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when notifying the pushing order “1st”, the instruction monitor displays “1” uniquely corresponding to the pushing order, while the other means (display unit 100) causes the first stop operation to be left It is also possible to directly report what is to be done for the reel 3L.

  As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, not only the control of the sub control board 72 but also the control of the main control board 71 can notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination. Of course, the notification of the stop operation information may be controlled according to the gaming state. More specifically, in the general gaming state (non-ART) described later, information on the stopping operation may be notified in the ART gaming state (see FIG. 33) described later without notifying information on the stopping operation.

  Further, on the left side of the front surface of the pedestal portion 10, a settlement button 13 is provided, which switches the credit / payout of the medals acquired in the game by the player's button by pressing the button. By switching the settlement button 13, medals are paid out from the medal payout opening 15 at the lower front portion, and the paid-out medals are stored in the medal receiving portion 16.

  On the right side of the settlement button 13, the start lever 6 as a start operation means for starting the variable display of the symbol in the display window 4 by rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by the tilting operation of the player is predetermined. It is attached tiltably in the angle range of.

  A stop button 7L, 7C, 7R as stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R by the depression operation of the player is provided substantially at the center of the front surface of the pedestal 10 ing. In the embodiment, one game (unit game) is basically started by operating the start lever 6, and is ended when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

  The first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202 are provided on the front of the upper portion of the lower door 62b. The first sub display device 201 and the second sub display device 202 are a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and display various information. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202 are lateral sides of the front surface of the lower door 62b that is substantially perpendicular to the horizontal surface of the pedestal portion 10. The first sub-display device 201 is provided on the left side (the MAX bet button 11 and the start lever 6 side), and the second sub-display device 202 is provided on the right side (the medal insertion slot 22 side).

  In the present embodiment, at least one of the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202, a touch sensor 201a is provided on the display surface of the first sub-display device 201, and the touch sensor 201a is used. The display can be switched according to the operation of the accepted player. The touch sensor 201a operates according to a predetermined operation principle such as a capacitance method, and outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information when the operation of the player is received. The first sub-display device 201 is controlled by the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 31) based on touch input information output from the touch sensor 201a.

  At the front of the lower part of the lower door 62b, speakers 9L and 9R are provided on the left and right to produce effects with sounds such as sound effects, and a medal payout opening 15 is provided between the speakers 9L and 9R to which medals are paid out. ing. At the lowermost portion of the lower door 62b, a medal receiver 16 for storing the paid-out medals is provided.

  In the lower front of the lower door 62b, a waist panel 25 with a design corresponding to the motif of the model is placed on the surface vertically sandwiched between the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R and the medal receiver 16. It is attached. The lumbar panel 25 is illuminated by a lumbar panel illuminator (not shown) provided behind.

Display Unit Structure
Subsequently, the structure of the display unit 100 provided in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Display unit 100)
As shown in FIG. 4, a display unit 100 is provided inside the cabinet 61 on the rear side of the upper door 62a. As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit 100 is detachably provided on the intermediate support plate 301 in the cabinet 61. The intermediate support plate 301 functions as a partition wall between the upper space and the lower space in the cabinet 61. The display unit 100 is a so-called projection mapping device including an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image, and a screen device C that causes an image to appear by being irradiated with irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. .

  Here, the projection mapping apparatus is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object, and for example, the position (projection distance or angle) with respect to By projecting an image according to the rendering information generated based on the shape and the like) and the like, it is possible to make a highly sophisticated and powerful rendering.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation light device B has a projector mechanism B2 for emitting irradiation light forward, and a screen disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 and obliquely arranged for irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 in the lower rear It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the device C direction, and a projector cover B1 that houses a projector mechanism B2 and a mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is disposed at the rear in the cabinet 61. The projector mechanism B2 has a flat base member B22 horizontally disposed. A lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The lens mechanism B21 is disposed so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

  Further, heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 are disposed on the right side and the left side of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct for circulating the air and a fan for delivering the air, and by blowing the air backward, the heat generated when generating the irradiation light is forced to the rear. It is made to flow. As shown in FIG. 2, the vent holes 21 a of the cabinet 61 are disposed in the flow direction of the air in the heat removal mechanisms B <b> 23 and B <b> 24. As a result, the heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 with air through the vent holes 21a.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 6, a mirror mechanism B3 is disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 (the emission direction of the irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 has a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 accommodated in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. doing. As also shown in FIG. 8, the mirror holder B <b> 31 has a front surface formed in a rectangular plate shape. At each corner portion of the mirror holder B31, an angle adjustment hole B311 is formed, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface centering on the angle adjustment hole B311. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are formed vertically symmetrical between the angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

  A mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion, and is formed in a size not overlapping the angle adjustment hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are respectively provided on the left side and the right side of the mirror holding portion B313. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjustment holes B331 and B341, and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged to correspond to the angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

  The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed to partially overlap with the mirror holding portion B313. Thus, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 abut on both sides in the left-right direction of the optical mirror B32 fitted in the mirror holding portion B313, and screwed to the mirror holder B31 by the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner side surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1, and is disposed so as to be exposed on the front side when the upper door 62a is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjustment hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

  A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11, and the screw penetrates the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes in which screws can be screwed, and the screws penetrating the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31 are of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341.

  Then, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 increases. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is reduced.

  As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344, whereby the optical mirror is interposed between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is held. Thus, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by the rotation of a screw. Thus, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. And, since the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corner portions of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the arrangement positions of the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, B341. By increasing or decreasing the distance to B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2.

  Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring abuts against the concave portion B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface abuts against the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11, whereby the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 It is held by And the screw penetrated from angle adjustment hole B111 of reflector attaching part B11 has penetrated the spring concerned. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases with the rotation of the screw, the screw head abuts on the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 by the biasing force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from jumping out of the angle adjustment hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 10, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are accommodated in a projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 includes an upper wall B12 horizontally disposed, a reflector holding portion B11 disposed on the front side of the upper wall B12, and side walls B13 and B13 symmetrically disposed in the left-right direction of the upper wall B12. And. The upper wall portion B12 has a front portion projecting more forward than the cabinet 61 of FIG. A reflector holding portion B11 is formed to project forward at the center on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and holds the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 in an adjustable manner in the space formed by the projection. .

  Further, the side wall portions B13 and B13 have a projecting portion B131 which is horizontally projected from the lower end portion. The protrusion B131 has a first protrusion B131a on the front side and a second protrusion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B 131 a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet 61 when the projector cover B 1 is mounted on the cabinet 61, and has a width slightly smaller than the width of the opening of the cabinet 61. It is done. On the other hand, when the projector cover B1 is attached to the cabinet 61, the second protrusion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the space behind the opening of the cabinet 61, and is wider than the width of the space behind It is set to a slightly smaller width. That is, in the side wall portions B13 and B13, the width of the second protrusion B131b is wider than the width of the first protrusion B131a. Thus, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space of the cabinet 61.

  A porous plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The porous plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are opened by punching a plate made of metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum or the like). The plurality of holes B <b> 151 are formed in a substantially uniform manner over the entire surface of the porous plate B <b> 15. The porous plate B15 allows air to flow on the entire surface of the porous plate B15, and enables the flow of air from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and the number of the holes B 151 are set such that the inside of the projector cover B 1 can not be visually observed from the outside. The hole B 151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, a hexagon, etc., and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

  The porous plate B15 is formed to cover the first protrusion B131a and the second protrusion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower position. As shown in FIG. 12, the porous plate B15 has an upper side B15a on the front side, an inclined portion B15b on the middle side, and a lower side B15c on the rear side. Upper part B15a is arranged horizontally. The inclined portion B15b is formed by being bent diagonally downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower side portion B15c is formed by bending in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined portion B15b.

  The upper portion B15a of the porous plate B15 is attached to the side wall portions B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the porous plate B15 is arranged to cover the front of the projector cover B1 from the lower side with the upper part B15a, and cover from the lower side with the inclined part B15b and the lower side B15c from the middle to the rear of the projector cover B1 There is. As shown in FIG. 10, the front screen mechanism E1 in the screen device C is disposed below the perforated plate B15.

  Although the details will be described later, the front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position located on the upper side, which is a standby attitude for inhibiting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light, and a lower side, an exposure attitude for permitting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture is in an inclined posture close to and substantially parallel to the inclined part B15b of the porous plate B15 in the standby posture. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space appears below the porous plate B15, and the air present in this space reaches the porous plate B15 without flow resistance, and a plurality of Passing through the holes B 151 makes it possible to facilitate the flow of air into the screen device C and to enhance the cooling efficiency.

  The perforated plate B15 is provided to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1 so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 13, the line of sight of the player located on the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical and horizontal directions. Even if the irradiation light device B is located on the horizontal line of the part and looking up at the irradiation light device B from the position of the line of sight, the inside of the irradiation light device B is prevented from being visually recognized by the perforated plate B15.

(Display unit 100: screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 14, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screw fastening. Thus, the display unit 100 can handle the irradiation light device B and the screen device C as a unit and handle them integrally.

(Display unit 100: screen device C: screen housing C10)
The screen device C has a box-shaped screen housing C10. As also shown in FIG. 15, the screen housing C10 includes a bottom plate C1 horizontally disposed, a right side plate C2 erected at the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 erected at the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3 and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, so that the front side on which the player is located and the top side on which the irradiation light device B is located. An open box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

  The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3 and the back plate C4 constituting the screen housing C10 are each independently formed in a predetermined shape, and a predetermined functional component such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be attached. It has been As a result, even when the unit of the screen device C can not be made common, it is possible to make the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 common. Moreover, since partial change for each plate member is possible, it is possible to easily change the specification for each model of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit 100: screen device C: screen housing C10: bottom plate C1)
Specifically, the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape having a rectangular top view. The upper surface of the bottom plate C1 has a central placement portion C11 disposed in the central portion, and a right placement portion C12 and a left placement portion C13 disposed in the left and right direction centering on the central placement portion C11. There is. The placement portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape. The central placement portion C11 places the stationary screen mechanism D in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the stationary screen mechanism D. The right mount portion C12 and the left mount portion C13 respectively position the right movable base C5 and the left movable base C6 by fitting the lower ends of the right movable base C5 and the left movable base C6 respectively. It is possible to put it.

  Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward, whereby the tip end portion is positioned below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side C14. As shown in FIG. 5, when the display unit 100 is assembled while being mounted on the intermediate support plate 301 of the cabinet 61, the front side C14 abuts on the front surface of the intermediate support plate 301, whereby It is possible to perform positioning backwards. The display unit 100 is screwed to the front surface of the cabinet 61 through the through hole C141 of the front side C14 to perform the installation and installation of the display unit 100 from the front side of the cabinet 61. It is possible.

(Display unit 100: screen device C: screen housing C10: right side plate C2, left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit 100 can be carried by hooking a hand on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are disposed on the side of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal direction matches in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set to such an extent that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

  Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is moved manually after the display unit 100 is incorporated into the cabinet 61, the display unit 100 is first taken out from the front side of the cabinet 61 with the upper door 62a opened. Specifically, a worker located on the front side of the cabinet 61 releases the screw fastening of the display unit 100 to the cabinet 61 and removes the screw. Then, the hand is extended into the cabinet 61, the operation openings C21 and C31 of the display unit 100 are gripped with both hands, and the display unit 100 is taken out of the cabinet 61. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 17, the hand is extended from the one operation opening C21 of the removed display unit 100 into the screen apparatus C, and the crank gear E21 seen horizontally from the operation opening C21 is rotated. Thus, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. The lock state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by the movement from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly pivoted to a desired position.

  When the upper door 62a is opened, the hand extends from the front of the opening of the cabinet 61 into the space between the side wall 302 of the cabinet 61 and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and from the operation opening C21. The crank gear E21 can be rotated by operating the crank gear E21. In this case, the front screen mechanism E1 can be released from the locked state without removing the display unit 100 out of the cabinet 61.

  Further, a motor accommodating portion C22 is formed in the right side plate C2. The motor housing portion C22 houses a drive motor F21 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2.

(Display unit 100: screen device C: screen housing C10: back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 18, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the relay substrate CK is provided on the back surface. The relay substrate CK enables a plurality of signal lines in the display unit 100 to be gathered to perform wiring with the outside of the display unit 100 at one place. The relay substrate CK is disposed on the front of the back wall 213 of the cabinet 61 by being provided on the back of the back plate C4. That is, the relay substrate CK is disposed in the gap between the back wall 213 of the cabinet 61 and the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10. Below the relay substrate CK, as shown in FIG. 5, the through holes 303 of the intermediate support plate 301 supporting the display unit 100 are disposed, and the signal lines of the relay substrate CK are inserted.

  As a result, the relay board is disposed outside the screen device C, thereby facilitating the wiring operation and making it unnecessary to secure an installation space for the relay board CK in the screen device C, thereby making the screen The design freedom in the device C is expanded.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 18, an operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is disposed on the lower right side, and is opposed to the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in such a size that the intermediate gear E23 can be manually operated. Thus, after the display unit 100 is incorporated into the cabinet 61, the display unit 100 is first removed from the cabinet 61 when the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is moved manually. After that, the hand is extended from the operation opening C41 into the screen device C, and the intermediate gear E23 seen horizontally from the operation opening C41 is rotated, thereby facilitating the locked front screen mechanism E1 from the standby position. It can be moved.

(Display unit 100: screen device C: screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for causing an image to appear by the irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so as to be able to switch the irradiation targets. Specifically, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as the plurality of screen mechanisms. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D, E1, F1 will be described later.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen position relation)
As shown in FIG. 19, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 20, the front screen mechanism E1 is provided rotatably between the front exposure position and the front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set such that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front and hides the image so that the image by the irradiation light appears only in the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed to allow an image of the irradiation light to appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the reel screen mechanism F1 is provided so as to be rotatable between the reel exposure position and the reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set such that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposure position, an image due to the irradiation light appears only in the reel screen mechanism F1 by the reel screen mechanism F1 covering the fixed screen mechanism D from the front and hiding it. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed to allow an image by the irradiation light to appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set such that the front screen mechanism E1 present at the front standby position does not interfere with the reel screen mechanism F1 present at the reel standby position. That is, the front standby position is disposed above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is disposed behind the fixed screen mechanism D. Thereby, the pivoting distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is made shorter than the pivoting distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 are different so that overlapping of the operation area by rotation is minimized. ing. Specifically, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is set above the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the direction of the front standby position. Thereby, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to the minimum.

  Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on condition that at least one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is in the standby position. Thereby, the interference at the time of rotation of screen mechanism E1, F1 is prevented.

(Display unit 100: screen device C: fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screw fastening. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflecting portion D1, a right surface reflecting portion D2, a left surface reflecting portion D3, and a lower surface reflecting portion D4. The reflection surfaces of these reflection portions D1 to D4 are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B.

  The fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflecting portions, as long as it has a reflecting surface at a plurality of different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a curved or arc-shaped reflecting surface reflecting portion whose curvature center point is located on the front side at continuously different angles with respect to the optical axis.

  The front reflecting portion D1 is arranged such that the reflecting surface is opposed to the player on the front side, and most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B disposed on the front upper portion of the fixed screen mechanism D is reflected on the front It is set to The right surface reflection portion D2 and the left surface reflection portion D3 are joined to the right side portion and the left side portion of the front reflection portion D1, and are disposed symmetrically about the front reflection portion D1. The right surface reflecting portion D2 and the left surface reflecting portion D3 are arranged such that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width in the left and right direction in the front surface reflecting portion D1. As a result, the right surface reflection portion D2 and the left surface reflection portion D3 make the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface easy to face in the direction of the front reflection portion D1, so that part of the irradiation light can be fronted The light is reflected in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. Moreover, also about the lower surface reflection part D4, the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to a reflective surface becomes easy to turn to the front reflection part D1 direction, A part of irradiation light is made in the front reflection part D1 direction while making the image by irradiation light appear. It is designed to reflect.

  In the fixed screen mechanism D described above, the lightness of the reflective surface is set lower than the lightness of each of the reflective surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light at which the irradiation light is reflected by the reflection surface is smaller than the amount of light at which the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are reflected. Thereby, the fixed screen mechanism D is prevented from white blurring due to mixing of light due to diffuse reflection of the reflection portions D1 to D4. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the lightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the lightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, since the reflection of the irradiation light to the front reflection part D1 in the other reflection parts D2, D3 and D4 can be reduced, it is possible to reduce white blur while making the image appear strongly in the front reflection part D1.

  As the lightness, Brightness in the L * a * b * color system (L * a * b * color space) or L * u * v * color system (L * u * v * color space) is adopted. It is possible to define any color as long as other colors can be expressed as relative values based on white.

  The lightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the lightness of the reflective surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the same as the lightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D is the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 It is not particularly limited as long as it is lower than the lightness of the surface. For example, the lightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value lower by about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) than the lightness of the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In order to make the lightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the lightness of the reflective surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base of the fixed screen mechanism D is The color of the paint applied to the base of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 may be blackened. For example, as the paint to be applied to the base of the fixed screen mechanism D, a white coating is used as the paint to be applied to the base of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 What a black pigment is added to a paint applied to a substrate may be used.

  In such a paint, it is possible to change the lightness of the reflective surface of the screen mechanism by varying the proportions of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 includes only the white pigment of the white pigment and the black pigment, and the paint applied to the base of the fixed screen mechanism D is Both white and black pigments may be included. In addition, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D is more than that of the paint applied to the base of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 (for example, 5 to 25% (or 10-20%)) may be increased. In addition, as a coating material apply | coated to the base material of these screen mechanisms, the coating material for conventionally well-known screens can be employ | adopted suitably, and it can adjust according to the type | mold (for example, diffusion type and reflection type) of a screen. .

  The black pigment is not dispersed in the coating applied to the base of the fixed screen mechanism D, but before the base of the fixed screen mechanism D is formed, the black pigment is dispersed in the resin serving as the material of the base. The substrate itself may be colored to lower the brightness of the substrate itself.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing irregular reflection of light, the members constituting the screen casing C10 such as the surrounding walls (the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4) and the inside of the screen casing C10 It is desirable to lower the brightness of other members (members other than the screen) placed in the It is desirable that the lightness of those members is lower than the lightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, for the surrounding wall, if it is not necessary to consider that the image is projected as a screen, the lightness is low. The lower the better. That is, the color of the surrounding wall is preferably closer to black.

(Display unit 100: screen device C: front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 22, the front screen mechanism E1 has a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface, and a front screen support E12 having a pattern such as a first design surface E12a on both sides. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 is configured such that the projection surface E11a is formed in a flat shape so that an image having no distortion appears at the time of irradiation of the irradiation light.

  On the other hand, the front screen support E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding recess E121 is set in two stages of the depth portion and the shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral portion of the front screen support E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly along both ends in the short direction passing through the central portion.

  Thus, the front screen member E11 accommodated in the holding recess E121 is abutted and supported by the stepped portion E121a of the peripheral portion and the straight stepped portion E121b passing through the central portion, and is separated from the remaining deep portion It is in the state. As a result, deformation of the front screen support E12 at the deep portion is prevented from deforming the front screen member E11 and causing distortion on the projection surface E11a.

  Further, the front screen support E12 has a first design surface E12a in a partial area around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposure position. Furthermore, the front screen support E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position. In these first pattern surface E12a and the second pattern surface E12b, for example, patterns related to the effects of the game are three-dimensionally formed by unevenness.

  The front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 configured as described above are integrated by being bonded with an adhesive after being separately formed. As a result, in the front screen mechanism E1, even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern etc. on the front screen support base E12, this sink mark is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of distortion due to sink marks on the projection surface E11a in the front screen member E11.

  In addition, as a fixing method of the front screen member E11 and the front screen support stand E12, not only adhesion | attachment with an adhesive agent but arbitrary methods, such as screw fastening, are employable.

  The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As a material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the material of the front screen support E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, an ABS resin etc.) which may cause shrinkage when injection molding is suitably employed it can.

(Display unit 100: screen device C: front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is made rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the front screen drive mechanism E2 is a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1, and a right connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. And a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The upper end portion (one end portion) of the crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. As shown in FIG. 25, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported at the intermediate position E22a by the right movable base C5 of FIG. Thus, the crank member E22 is capable of rotating the upper end and the lower end (the other end) around the intermediate position E22a.

  The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. As shown in FIG. 25, when the crank member E22 is viewed from the side, the center line in the upper region (the straight line passing the middle position E22a and the middle point on the upper end side of the crank member E22) is in the vertical direction in the standby posture It is set to. On the other hand, the center line in the lower region (a straight line passing the middle position E22a and the middle point on the lower end side of the crank member E22) is set such that the lower side is inclined frontward than the upper side in the standby posture.

  A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed such that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two straight portions are formed in parallel, and in the slide groove E22b, the plane corresponding to the straight portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 is set parallel to the center line of the lower region. The slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (the distance between the two straight portions) is substantially the same as the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide at the time of movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. Further, the upper end portion of the slide groove E22b is set such that the slide member E26 abuts on the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the above-mentioned curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position. On the other hand, the lower end portion of the slide groove E22b is in an open state so as to expose a part of the slide member E26.

  The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at an eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 shown in FIG. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is a line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposure position, the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22 and the slide member It is set so as to have an orthogonal relationship with a line segment connecting the center point of E26.

  Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposure position, the rotation center position in the application direction of all the components of the force even if the force acts in the direction of rotating the lower region of the crank member E22. Since E21a exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure with a zero degree of freedom 3-joint link is formed, with the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends and the slide member E26 as a free end. Even when the mechanism E1 is pushed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move by the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 acting as a strong brake.

  An intermediate gear E23 is engaged with the above-mentioned crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 is engaged with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. Thus, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational drive force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

  Here, all components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning trajectory of the slide member E26. Further, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 28, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, a line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b corresponds to the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22. The tangent line direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22 because it is set to have a relation orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of the slide member E26. Thereby, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposure position, there is a groove wall surface acting as a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26 when rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21. As a result, the crank gear E21 easily starts to rotate.

  When the rotational drive force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is made movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b, so the crank member E22 The intermediate position E22a and the rotational center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and a two-joint link of one degree of freedom is formed with the slide member E26 as a free end movable along the groove wall surface. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 having the slide groove E22b engaged with the slide member E26 rotates with the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum to rotate the upper region of the crank member E22. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

  Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is the stop state 0 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby attitude or the exposure attitude, and the acceleration is gradually increased, and the intermediate attitude between the standby attitude and the exposure attitude (FIG. 27) After reaching the maximum speed at, the motor gradually decelerates and enters the stop state 0 when the exposure attitude and the standby attitude are reached. This makes it possible to start and stop the rotation in a state (inertial moment) in which the angular acceleration of the crank gear E21 is small (inertial moment), which makes it possible to reduce the torque required for the crank gear E21. It is possible to reduce damage and wear of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25) due to overload.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are disposed symmetrically in the left-right direction. The crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via the shaft member E3 so that the rotational drive force of the drive motor E25 is evenly applied. There is.

(Display unit 100: screen device C: reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the reel screen mechanism F1 includes a reel screen portion F11 made of a curved flat plate, a left reel screen support portion F12 connected to the left end of the reel screen portion F11, and a reel screen portion F11. And a right reel screen support F13 connected to the right end of

  The reel screen portion F11 is curved in a shape approximate to the rotation direction, and a pattern is formed on the back surface which is the rotation center side. The pattern on the back side is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position. Further, on the surface of the reel screen portion F11, a pattern is formed on the peripheral edge portion, and the inner peripheral region of the peripheral edge portion is a projection surface. The projection surface is capable of appearing an image by irradiation of the irradiation light when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel exposure position.

  One end portions of the left and right reel screen support portions F12 and F13 are connected to the reel screen portion F11. On the other hand, the other end portions of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13 respectively have projecting portions not shown. The protrusions are horizontally projected to the outside of the respective reel screen supports F12 and F13, and are connected to the reel screen drive mechanism F2 to be the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Effect by screen device)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects are performed using the display unit 100 described above. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, by switching a plurality of screen mechanisms for causing an image to appear by the irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, effects using a flat image display, a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect) It is possible to execute an effect using a certain image display and an effect using a curved image display.

  For example, when the screen mechanism for causing an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the front screen mechanism E1, distortion is caused at the time of irradiation of irradiation light by causing the image to appear on the flat projection surface E11a. It is possible to make a video with no motion appear, and it is possible to execute an effect using this flat video.

  In addition, for example, when the screen mechanism for causing an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the fixed screen mechanism D, a plurality of reflecting portions of the fixed screen mechanism D provide a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect) It is possible to make a certain video appear, and it is possible to execute an effect using the video with a sense of depth.

  Further, for example, when the screen mechanism for causing the image to appear by irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the reel screen mechanism F1, the image is made to appear on the reel screen portion F11 made of a flat plate of curved shape. A curved image can be made to appear, and effects using this curved image can be performed.

[Display Example of First Sub Display Device]
Subsequently, the display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201 will be described. FIG. 29 is a view showing a part of the display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, the first sub-display device 201 displays a plurality of display screens including a top screen 211, a menu screen 212, and game information screens 213, 214, and 215. The plurality of display screens are switched according to the operation of the player accepted via the touch sensor 201a.

  The top screen 211 is an initial screen of the display screens displayed on the first sub-display device 201, and displays the menu button 211a and the summary game history 211b. The menu button 211 a is an operation button for calling the menu screen 212 by being operated (taped) by the player. The outline game history 211 b displays a part of the game history (summary game history) of the game histories of the pachislot machine 1. In the present embodiment, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (the number of games) in the pachislot machine 1 are displayed as the summary game history.

  The menu screen 212 is a menu of a display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201, and includes a back button 212a, a registration button 212b, an explanation button 212c, an array payout button 212d, a reach eye button 212e, and WEB A site button 212 f and a volume button 212 g are displayed. The back button 212a is an operation button for calling the top screen 211 by being operated by the player. Further, the registration button 212 b to the volume button 212 g are operation buttons for calling the corresponding display screen by being operated by the player.

  For example, when the registration button 212 b is operated by the player, a registration screen (not shown) for registering the player in the game is called. In recent Pachislot machines, a service has been widely used in which players are registered for each model and various information such as the achievement status of a predetermined mission are managed from the previous game history of the player. . The registration screen called by the registration button 212 b is a display screen for registering a player when receiving the provision of this service.

  Further, when the player operates the explanation button 212c, an explanation screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. The contents to be described in the explanation screen include, for example, introduction of characters appearing in the effects of the pachislot machine 1 as well as the description regarding the specifications of the pachislot machine 1 such as bonus winning probability for each set value and ART winning probability.

  Further, when the arrangement payout button 212 d is operated by the player, an arrangement payout screen (not shown) of the pachislot machine 1 is called. On the array payout screen, for example, the correspondence relationship (payout table) between the combination of symbols determined to be winning in the pachislot machine 1 and the benefits when determined to be winning, the symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R A column (reel arrangement) etc. are displayed.

  Further, when the reach eye button 212 e is operated by the player, the reach eye screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. The reach eyes in the pachislot machine 1 are displayed on the reach eyes screen. In addition, the reach eye is a combination of symbols to which a special benefit is given by being displayed along the effective line, and in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reach eye lip shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 The combination of the symbol corresponds. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the combination of reach eye lip symbols is displayed along the active line, the player is then in an advantageous state (for example, bonus state, normal ART or CT (FIG. 33). It is supposed to be decided to shift to the

  Further, when the WEB site button 212 f is operated by the player, a WEB introduction screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. Two-dimensional code (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) indicating the URL of an arbitrary web site such as a special web site provided for each model of pachislot machine 1 or a web site of a maker of pachislot machine 1 on the WEB introduction screen. Is displayed. The player can access the corresponding web site by reading the two-dimensional code displayed on the web introduction screen with a mobile phone or the like.

  In addition, when the player operates the volume button 212g, a volume adjustment screen (not shown) for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speakers 9L and 9R is called. The player can adjust the volume of the effect sound of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the volume adjustment screen.

  Here, since the first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 that performs the effect, it can be controlled separately from the display unit 100, and during the game (that is, the effect is executed by the display unit 100) Even in the middle), the display of the first sub-display device 201 can be switched. From the player's point of view, for example, there is a need to know the characters appearing in the effects in the display unit 100. In such a case, by operating the explanation button 212c and calling the explanation screen, the relationship between the characters, etc. It can be grasped during the game. Also, from the player's point of view, there are cases where it is desired to grasp a symbol that should be taken as a standard for winning the rare role during reel rotation when the so-called rare role is won. In such a case, the array payout button 212d The reel arrangement can be grasped by operating and calling up the arrangement payout screen.

  The game information screens 213, 214 and 215 are display screens for displaying detailed game histories including an outline game history displayed on the top screen of the game history of the pachislot machine 1. The game information screen 213 displays a back button 213a, a menu button 213b, a forward button 213c, a next button 213d, and a game history 213e. The back button 213a and the menu button 213b are operation buttons for calling the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212 by being operated by the player. In addition, the forward button 213c and the next button 213d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen by being operated by the player, and when the forward button 213c is operated, the game information screen is displayed from the game information screen 213. When the display screen is switched to 215 and the next button 213 d is operated, the display screen is switched from the game information screen 213 to the game information screen 214. In addition, the game history 213 e displays the number of bonus times, number of ARTs, and number of games (number of games) in the pachislot machine 1.

  The game information screen 214 displays a back button 214a, a menu button 214b, a previous button 214c, a next button 214d, and a game history 214e. The back button 214 a and the menu button 214 b are operation buttons for calling the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212 by being operated by the player. Further, the forward button 214 c and the next button 214 d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order by being operated by the player. Further, the game history 214 e displays the number of times of entry and the number of successes of the CZ (chance zone) in the pachislot machine 1. As described later, in the present embodiment, since CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 are provided as CZ, the number of times of entry and the number of successes of CZ1 to CZ3 are displayed on the game history 214e.

  The game information screen 215 displays a back button 215a, a menu button 215b, a forward button 215c, a next button 215d, and a game history 215e. The return button 215 a and the menu button 215 b are operation buttons for calling the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212 by being operated by the player. Further, the forward button 215 c and the next button 215 d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order by being operated by the player. In addition, the game history 215 e displays the number of wins and the win probability (a numerator is a fraction of 1) of the so-called small role in the pachislot machine 1.

  Note that the display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201 may be switched based on a tap operation on the operation button displayed on each display screen, and switching based on a swipe operation on the display screen It may be

[Circuit configuration of pachislot machine]
The description of the structure of the pachislot machine 1 is as described above. Next, with reference to FIG. 30 and FIG. 31, the structure of the circuit with which the pachi-slot machine 1 in this Embodiment is equipped is demonstrated. The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control board 71, a sub control board 72, an external concentrated terminal plate 73 electrically connected to these, and peripheral devices (actuators).

<Main control board>
FIG. 30 shows an electrical configuration mainly based on the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment.

(Microcomputer)
The main control board 71 mainly includes a microcomputer 30 installed on a circuit board. The microcomputer 30 includes a CPU (hereinafter, main CPU) 31, a ROM (hereinafter, main ROM) 32, and a RAM (hereinafter, main RAM) 33.

  The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control board 72, and the like. The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by the execution of the control program.

(Such as a random number generator)
A clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36, and a sampling circuit 37 are connected to the main CPU 31. Clock pulse generation circuit 34 and frequency divider 35 generate clock pulses.

  The main CPU 31 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates random numbers (for example, 0 to 65535) within a predetermined range. The sampling circuit 37 extracts at least one value from the generated random numbers according to the application.

(Peripheral devices and circuits)
As peripheral devices whose operation is controlled by the microcomputer 30, there are stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R and a medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper) 40. In addition, motor drive circuit 39 and hopper drive circuit 41 for controlling the operation of each peripheral device, reel position detection circuit 50, payout completion signal circuit 51, external concentrated terminal plate 73, and input / output ports of microcomputer 30. Various circuits such as the door relay board 74 and various boards are connected.

  The motor drive circuit 39 constitutes symbol variation means, and controls the drive of stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R provided corresponding to the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R. That is, the motor drive circuit 39 changes the symbols displayed on the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R by rotating the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition.

  The reel position detection circuit 50 detects a reel index indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R have made one rotation according to each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion. Here, the reel index is information indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have made one rotation.

  The stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R have a configuration in which the amount of movement is proportional to the number of pulse outputs, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a designated angle. The driving force of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is transmitted to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R through gears having a predetermined reduction ratio. The reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate at a constant angle each time one pulse is outputted to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R.

  The main CPU 31 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R after detecting the reel index. Thereby, the main CPU 31 manages the rotation angles of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many reels have been rotated).

  Next, management of the rotation angles of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 33. Then, each time the pulse counter counts the output of a predetermined number of pulses necessary for the rotation of one symbol, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 33 is incremented by one. A symbol counter is provided according to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel position detection circuit 50 detects a reel index.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 31 manages the symbol counter so as to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected based on the position where the reel index is detected.

  The hopper drive circuit 41 controls the operation of the hopper 40. Further, the payout completion signal circuit 51 manages detection of the medals performed by the medal detection unit 40S provided in the hopper 40, and checks whether the medals paid out from the hopper 40 to the outside have reached the number of payouts or not. .

(External concentrated terminal board)
The external concentration terminal board 73 receives signals from the main control board 71 such as the number of inserted / paid medals, the number of times played, the bonus operation presence / absence information, etc., and displays those signals as the number of games played, the number of bonus operations, etc. Output to an external display unit or the host computer of the game arcade. The external indicator is installed, for example, above the pachislot machine 1 and updates the display in conjunction with the progression of the number of games and the bonus operation, or notifies the bonus operation with a lamp or the like.

  Here, the medal insertion signal is a signal that enables the medal insertion to be recognized, and is output when the start lever 6 is operated. The medal payout signal is a signal that makes it possible to recognize medal payout or replay, and is output at the time of medal payout (including credit storage) or replaying operation.

(Door relay board)
The door relay board 74 is a board that relays the wiring between the main control board 71, various buttons and switches, and the information display 14. Further, the door relay substrate 74 is connected to the sub control substrate 72 via the sub relay substrate 75. The door relay board 74 is connected to be able to transmit information only to the sub relay board 75 so that the information is not transmitted from the sub relay board 75. As a result, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are in one-way communication in which information can be transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72 only.

  The door relay substrate 74 is connected to a start switch 6S, a stop switch 7S, a medal sensor 42S, a MAX bet switch 11S, a 1 bet switch (not shown), and a settlement switch 13S.

  The start switch 6S constitutes start operation detecting means, and detects that the start lever 6 has been operated by the player (start operation). Further, the stop switch 7S constitutes stop operation detecting means, and detects that each of the three stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The medal sensor 42S detects that the medal accepted by the medal insertion slot 22 has passed through the inside of the selector. Also, the MAX bet switch 11S detects that the MAX bet button 11 has been pressed by the player. In addition, the 1-bet switch detects that the 1-bet button has been pressed by the player. The main CPU 31 validates the valid line based on the detection results of the medal sensor 42S or the MAX bet switch 11S and the 1 bet switch. Further, the settlement switch 13S detects that the settlement button 13 has been pressed by the player.

  Further, the door relay board 74 is provided inside the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R, respectively, and the stop button internal LEDs 107L, 107C, 107R for displaying the acceptance status of these, and the number of medals and an advantageous stop operation are unique. And an information display 14 (instruction monitor) to be notified.

<Sub control board>
FIG. 31 shows an electrical configuration mainly based on the sub control board 72 of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment. The sub control board 72 is electrically connected to the main control board 71, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effects based on commands transmitted from the main control board 71.

  The sub control board 72 basically includes a CPU (hereinafter, sub CPU) 81, a ROM cartridge substrate 82, a RAM (hereinafter, sub RAM) 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86.

  The sub CPU 81 performs output control of video, sound, and light according to a control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 82 in accordance with a command transmitted from the main control substrate 71. The ROM cartridge substrate 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

  In the program storage area, various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored. In the control program stored in the program storage area, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control board 71, a random number for effect extraction, and determination of effect contents (effect data) and The effect registration task for performing registration, the drawing control task for controlling the display of the image by the display unit 100 based on the determined effect contents, the lamp control task for controlling the light output by the various LEDs 101, the speaker 9L, A program such as a voice control task for controlling the sound output by 9R is included.

  The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data forming various presentation contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to creation of video, and sound data for BGM and sound effects And various storage areas such as a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern.

  The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the sub control substrate 72 is connected to the display unit 100, the first sub display device 201, and the second sub display device 202 via a predetermined relay substrate. For example, the subsidiary control board 72 is connected to the display unit 100 with an accessory relay board (not shown), and the first sub display device 201 and the second sub display device via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown). It is connected with 202. The display unit 100, the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202 are individually controlled under the control of the sub control substrate 72.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30, a sub relay board 75 is provided between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72, and relays a wire connecting the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Further, the sub relay board 75 connects the sub control board 72 and various peripheral devices by relaying a wire connecting the sub control board 72 and a plurality of boards disposed around the sub control board 72. . For example, the sub relay board 75 connects the sub control board 72 to the various LEDs 101, the reel illuminator 102, and the bet button LED 103 via an LED board (not shown). Further, the sub relay board 75 connects the sub control board 72 and the speakers 9L and 9R via a sound I / O board (not shown), and the sub control board via a touch sensor relay board (not shown). 72 and the touch sensor 201a are connected.

[Transition flow of the gaming state of the pachislot machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, the gaming state controlled by the main control board 71 (main CPU 31) of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment and the transition flow thereof will be described.

<Basic game state transition flow>
In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the gaming state on the basis of the presence / absence of winning / operation of a bonus, the type of internal winning combination related to replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 32, the main control board 71 distinguishes a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state based on the presence / absence of winning / operation of the bonus (F_BB1, 2). Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a bonus non-winning state and the bonus is not activated, the inter-flag state is a bonus winning and a bonus not activated, and the bonus state Is in the state where the bonus is activated.

  The presence or absence of a bonus winning is managed based on data stored in an internal winning combination storing area (not shown) provided in main RAM 33, and the presence or absence of a bonus operation is a gaming state flag provided in main RAM 33. It is managed based on data stored in a storage area (not shown). Here, in the Pachi-Slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the part associated with the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the part associated with the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is activated. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination.

  Further, the main control board 71 provides six types of states, that is, an RT0 gaming state to an RT5 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to replay and their winning probability differ from each other. The RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the role associated with the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the role associated with the replay is the internal winnings associated with the replay. It is a gaming state in which the probability determined as is a medium probability. In addition, the RT3 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the role related to replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high.

  The RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state are managed based on data stored in a gaming state flag storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33. Specifically, the pachislot machine 1 has five flags of RT1 gaming state flag to RT5 gaming state flag, and manages the RT gaming state by managing ON / OFF of these flags by the main RAM 33. More specifically, the main control board 71 specifies the RT gaming state corresponding to the RT gaming state flag which is on as the current RT gaming state. When all RT gaming state flags are off, the main control board 71 specifies that the current RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 32, when the main control board 71 determines (1) the role (F_BB1, 2) relating to the bonus in the bonus non-winning state as an internal winning combination, the bonus non-winning state changes into the inter-flag state Transition the state. Then, the main control board 71 causes the gaming state to shift from the inter-flag state to the bonus state when the part associated with the bonus wins in the (2) inter-flag state.

  Further, (3) when the medal exceeding the prescribed number (216) is paid out in the bonus state, the main control board 71 ends the bonus state, and shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the RT1 gaming state. In this RT1 gaming state, when the (4) 20 games have passed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state, and (5) a bell spill is displayed before the 20 games have elapsed. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. In addition, in the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 causes the gaming state to shift from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when (5) a bell spill is displayed.

  In addition, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state when (6) the RT3 transitional lip is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, and (7) the RT4 transitional lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. In addition, (8) the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when the bell spill eye or the RT2 transitional lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state, and similarly, in the RT4 gaming state When the spilled eye or the RT2 transition message is displayed, the gaming state is shifted from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

  Here, the bell spilled eyes are determined for each type of pushing order bell when the pushing order bells (F_3 alternative bell _1st, F_3 alternative bell _2nd, F_3 alternative bell _3rd) described later are determined as internal winning combinations. It is a combination of symbols displayed at the time of incorrect answer in pushing order. In addition, the RT2 transition ripple is not determined in the order of pressing determined for each type of maintenance ripple if the maintenance ripples (F_ maintenance ripple _1st, F_maintenance ripple _2nd, F_maintenance ripple _3 rd) described later are determined as internal winning combinations. It is a combination of symbols displayed when correct. In addition, when the RT3 transition ripple is determined as an internal winning combination, when the RT3 ripples (F_RT3 ripple _1st, F_RT3 ripple _213, F_RT3 ripple _231, and F_RT3 ripple _3rd) described later are determined, the pressing order determined for each type of RT3 ripple It is a combination of symbols displayed when correct. In addition, when the RT4 transition ripple is determined as an internal winning combination, if the RT4 ripples (F_RT4 ripple_123, F_RT4 ripple_132, F_RT4 ripple_2nd, F_RT4 ripple_3rd) described later are determined as the pressing order determined for each type of RT4 ripple. It is a combination of symbols displayed when correct.

<Transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence or absence of notification>
As described above, while the pachislot machine 1 manages the gaming state on the basis of the presence / absence of bonus winning / action, the type of internal winning combination involved in replay, and the winning probability thereof, it informs the player of a stop operation which is advantageous for the player. Manage the gaming state based on whether or not to. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence or absence of notification.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 distinguishes between the normal gaming state and the ART gaming state based on the presence or absence of notification. The normal gaming state is basically a gaming state (non-ART) in which the content of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified (non-ART), and is a gaming state disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the ART gaming state is a gaming state in which a stop operation that is advantageous for the player is notified, and is a gaming state which is advantageous for the player. In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the player will play a game from the general gaming state (while holding the bonus state depending on the situation) to transition to the ART gaming state advantageous to the player .

  The normal gaming state is a gaming state not winning for ART among RT0 to RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 33, the normal gaming state is constituted by the normal gaming state and CZ (chance zone). The normal gaming state and the CZ are gaming states different from each other in the transition destination, and in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transition from the normal gaming state to the CZ and the transition from the CZ to the ART gaming state are Is done.

  The normal gaming state is the most disadvantageous gaming state in the pachislot machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 33, the normal gaming state may shift to CZ. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, transition lottery to CZ is performed, and when (A) this transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 causes the gaming state to transition from the normal gaming state to CZ.

  The CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) in which the degree of expectation for transitioning to the ART gaming state is high, and as shown in FIG. 33, the CZ may shift to the normal gaming state or the ART gaming state. Specifically, in CZ, transition lottery to ART is performed, and (B) when this transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 causes the gaming state to shift from CZ to the normal gaming state, and (C) this When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the ART gaming state (usually ART or CT) from CZ through ART preparing.

  Here, in the pachislot machine 1, the ART gaming state is basically a gaming state in which the RT4 gaming state is winning to the ART, and starts when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state after winning the ART. As shown in FIG. 32, since the RT4 gaming state is shifted from the RT0 to RT2 gaming state via the RT3 gaming state, the ART gaming state is not started immediately after ART winning. Absent. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, a period of time until transitioning to the RT4 gaming state after winning the ART is considered as ART preparation, and a notification of stop operation necessary for transitioning to the RT4 gaming state is made during this ART preparation.

  Subsequently, the ART gaming state is basically a gaming state in which the RT4 gaming state is winning the ART. As shown in FIG. 33, the ART gaming state is usually composed of ART and CT. Usually, ART and CT are gaming states different in playability from each other, and usually ART is for displaying a combination of stop operations advantageous to the player (for example, a pattern with a large number of medals to be paid out) for a predetermined number of games. Is a game state informing the user of the stop operation and the stop operation necessary to maintain the RT4 gaming state, and the CT notifies the stop operation which is advantageous for the player, and usually adds the duration of ART. It is a gaming state that functions as a chance zone. During CT, a game is usually played without digesting the duration of ART.

  As shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility that the normal ART shifts to CT or a general gaming state. Specifically, in the normal ART, the transition lottery to the CT is performed, and (D) when this transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 causes the gaming state to transition from the normal ART to the CT. Also, in the normal ART, the duration is managed, and (E) when the duration is over, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). In addition, although the management method of the continuation period of ART is arbitrary, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this embodiment, a continuation period is managed by the number of games. Of course, the duration may be managed not by the number of games but by the number of medals and the number of differences usually paid out during ART, and the number of times of notification that affects the payout of medals during normal ART The duration may be managed by the number of times).

  As shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility that CT normally transitions to ART. Specifically, the duration of CT is managed, and (F) when the duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from CT to normal ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, CT is managed by the duration of one set of eight games, which will be described in detail later (see FIG. 63).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of transition to the bonus state from the normal gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ) and ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, (2) when the part related to the bonus in the general gaming state and the ART gaming state wins, the main control board 71 changes the gaming state from the general gaming state or the ART gaming state to the bonus state Migrate

  In the bonus state, transition lottery to ART is performed, and (G) when the transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the normal gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ) (However, if the ART gaming state (usually ART or CT) has been shifted to the bonus state, even if the transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 is switched from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (usually ART or CT Transition the game state to)). Further, (H) when winning the transition lottery in the bonus state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normally ART or CT). As described above, when the bonus state is ended, the main control board 71 is preparing for ART when transitioning the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state in order to shift to the RT1 gaming state. Transition the gaming state to ART gaming state via.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 74. FIG.

<Symbol arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 34 represents by data the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between twenty symbol positions “0” to “19” and symbols corresponding to each of the symbol positions.

  The symbol positions “0” to “19” indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotational direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “19” can be identified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  As types of patterns, "white 7", "blue 7", "chili 1", "chili 2", "chili 2", "replay", "hat", "cactus 1", "cactus 2" And "cactus 3" is included.

  In the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 34, a symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 (a symbol passing through the middle of the display window 4) is assigned to the symbol position "0" when the reel index is detected. , And 3C, 3R, in order of movement, define correspondence relationships in which symbol positions “0” to “19” are assigned to each of the 20 symbols.

  As described above, by using the middle level of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of the symbol located in the middle level of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Symbol code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 34, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and is distinguished by data of 1 byte (8 bits). The symbol code table shown in FIG. 34 represents a code for specifying a symbol disposed on the surface of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  The symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are "white 7", "blue 7", "chili 1", "chili 2", "chili below", "replay", "hat" as described above. There are 10 types of “Cactus 1”, “Cactus 2” and “Cactus 3”.

  In the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the "white 7" symbol (symbol code 1). Data "00000010" is assigned to the "blue 7" symbol (symbol code 2). "00000011" is assigned as data to the "chili 1" symbol (symbol code 3).

  Similarly, for each symbol (symbol code 4 to 10) of "chili 2", "chili 2", "replay", "hat", "cactus 1", "cactus 2" and "cactus 3" As data, “00000100” to “00001010” are assigned.

<Symbol combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38. FIG. The symbol combination table is a combination of symbols determined in advance according to the type of benefit, and a combination of the symbols and data stored in the main RAM 33 when the combination of the symbols is displayed. Define the correspondence with the benefits of (the number of medals paid out).

  In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line matches the combination of the symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is determined to be a winning. Then, when it is determined that the player has won, the player is given a privilege such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), and operation of a bonus game (character continuous operating device). When the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it becomes a so-called "off". That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination of “off” is defined by not defining the combination of symbols corresponding to “off” in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and an item of "displacement" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define "displacement".

  Data fields in the symbol combination table define information for identifying combinations of symbols displayed along the effective line. Specifically, in the data column, there is a "storage area" in which data of a combination of corresponding symbols is stored, and "a bit corresponding to a combination of symbols in data (1 byte data) stored in the storage area. Data for specifying a) is defined. In this embodiment, the combination of the respective symbols is determined by using 22 1-byte storage areas. For example, “C_BB1” shown in FIG. 35 is determined by storing 1 in bit 1 of storage area 0.

  The combination defined in the symbol combination table means a symbol combination of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the effective line when the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped. In each combination, a combination name according to the role of the combination and the type of symbols constituting the combination is defined.

  Further, the payout number specified in the symbol combination table specifies the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 37, when the combination name “C_9 sheets A_01” is displayed, nine medals will be paid out.

  In addition, the content column in the symbol combination table indicates the role of each symbol combination and the feature of each symbol combination. Referring to FIG. 35, for example, combination names “C_BB1” and “C_BB2” are combinations of symbols relating to BB, and when displayed along the activated line, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state (see FIG. 32). ).

  Further, combination names “R_RT transition point A_01” to “R_RT transition point B_02” are bell spill points. When a bell spill is displayed along the activated line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

  Also, combination names “C_Maintenance Lip A_01” to “C_Maintenance Lip G_01” are replays. Replay is a combination of symbols in which "Replay-Replay-Replay" is displayed on any of three lines, the bottom line, the top line, and the cross-down line displayed in the display window 4. When replay is displayed along the activated line, replaying is activated.

  The combination names “C_RT2 rep A_01” and “C_RT2 rep A_02” are RT2 transition reps. The RT2 transition rep is a combination of symbols in which “replay-replay-replay” is displayed on the cross-up line displayed in the display window 4. When the RT2 transition message is displayed along the activated line, the replaying operation is performed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

  The combination name “C_RT3 RIP _ 01” is an RT3 transition RIP. The RT3 transition rep is a combination of symbols in which “replay-replay-replay” is displayed on the center line (effective line) displayed in the display window 4. When the RT3 transition message is displayed along the activated line, the replaying operation is performed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

  The combination names “C_RT4 Lip A_01” to “C_RT4 Lip D_02” are RT4 transition lip. When the RT4 transition message is displayed along the activated line, the replaying operation is performed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

  Further, combination names “C_chiri lip A_01” to “C_1 sure chiri lip D_01” are chiri lip. Chilli lip is a combination of symbols in which a chilled symbol is displayed on the display window 4. Here, as shown in FIG. 34, in the present embodiment, the symbol “Done top 1” and the symbol “Dot bottom” are continuously arranged on each reel. The chili symbol is a name when the symbol "chili 1" and the symbol "chili below" are regarded as one symbol. When the chiri lip is displayed along the activated line, the replay operation is performed.

  Among chiri lip, the combination name "C_chiri lip A_01" is a combination of symbols in which the chili symbol is displayed only on one of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed in the display window 4. Sometimes called "simple chill lip". Further, among chiri lip, the combination names “C_chiri lip B_01” and “C_ chiri lip C_01” are combinations of symbols in which chili symbols are displayed on two of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed on the display window 4 In the following, it may be called “double chiri lip”. Also, among chiri lip, the combination names “C_chiri lip D_01” to “C_1 positive chiri lip D_01” are combinations of symbols whose chili symbols are displayed on all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed in the display window 4 (or This is a combination of symbols displayed when a stop operation for displaying a combination of symbols fails (so-called, at the time of a pressing error), and may be hereinafter referred to as "triple chiri lip".

  In addition, combination names “C_reach eyes Lip A_01” to “C_reach eyes Lip P_02” are reach eyes. The reach eye lip is a so-called reach eye, and is a combination of symbols in which a combination of special symbols is displayed on the display window 4L. For example, the combination name "C_reach eye lip A_01" is a combination of symbols in which "white 7-white 7-white 7" is displayed along the top line. When reach reach is displayed along the activated line, replay is activated.

  In addition, combination names “C_RB role A_01” to “C_RB role G_02” are the ninth out of BB. When nine out of BBs are displayed along the effective line, nine medals are paid out. In addition, the combination of symbols except combination name "C_RB combination C_01" and "C_RB combination C_02" among nine pieces in BB is seven symbols (symbols) in any of five lines displayed in display window 4 It is a combination of symbols (or a combination of symbols displayed when a stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols is failed) in which three "White 7" or three symbols "Blue 7" are displayed side by side, Below, it may be called "7 sets in BB". On the other hand, combination names "C_RB combination C_01" and "C_RB combination C_02" are a combination of two 7 symbols displayed in any of 5 lines, and in the following, "7 rounds in BB" I sometimes call.

  Further, combination names “C_9 sheets A_01” to “C_9 sheets H_04” are bells. The bell is a combination of symbols in which "Hat-Hat-Hat" is displayed on any of the five lines displayed in the display window 4. When the bell is displayed along the effective line, nine medals are paid out.

  In addition, combination names “C_1st_A_01” to “C_2nd_B_04” are the first items. When the first shot is displayed along the effective line, one medal is paid out. In addition, combination names “C_SP1_01” and “C_SP2_01” are finalized items. When the final result is displayed along the effective line, one medal is paid out.

  Moreover, combination names "C_3 sheets A_01" to "C_3 sheets F_01" are cactus. When a cactus is displayed along the effective line, three medals are paid out. Further, combination names “C_weak 2 sheets A_01” to “C_weak 2 sheets B_03” are weak cherries, and combination names “C_strong 2 sheets A_01” to “C_strong 2 sheets C_09” are strong cherries. When weak cherries or strong cherries are displayed along the effective line, two medals are paid out.

<Internal lottery table>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40, an internal lottery table to be referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and defines lottery value information corresponding to each combination. FIG. 39 shows an internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, and FIG. 40 shows an internal lottery table referred to in the RT5 gaming state or the bonus state.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction becomes negative by sequentially subtracting the random value for lottery, which is extracted from the predetermined numerical value range “0 to 65535”, by the lottery value corresponding to each combination ( An internal lottery is performed by making a determination of what is called "whether a digit" has occurred.

  Therefore, the higher the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the role to which this is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be represented by “lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”.

  In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of winning combination and the winning probability are related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination according to the type of the RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state shown in FIG. 39, it is understood that the types and winning probability of the winnings related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination are different in each gaming state. As the most characteristic point, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “F_chiri lip (No. 25)” to “F_ reach eye lip D (No. 31)” are internally won in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. It is determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state without being determined as a winning combination. In the pachislot machine 1, when “F_chiri lip (No. 25)” to “F_ reach eye lip D (No. 31)” are determined as internal winning combinations during the RT4 gaming state, specific control (described later) Flag conversion), but this specific control will be described later.

  In addition, even if it is RT0 game state-RT3 game state, “F_reach eyes rep A to D” may be determined as an internal winning combination with “F_BB1, 2” (No. 3 to 6, No 15-15), "F_reach eyes Lip A to D" are not independently determined as internal winning combinations. Therefore, when “F_reach eye rep A to D” is determined as an internal winning combination during the RT0 gaming state to RT3 gaming state (from the player's point of view, the combination of symbols according to “F_reach eye rep A to D” is When it is displayed, the role (F_BB1, 2) relating to the bonus is simultaneously determined as the internal winning combination.

  Further, in the RT5 gaming state, which is an inter-flag state, as described above, the role associated with the bonus is carried over as an internal winning combination. Therefore, in the internal lottery table in the RT5 gaming state shown in FIG. 40, the role associated with the bonus carried over is always determined as the internal winning combination.

<Comparison chart of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
FIGS. 41 to 46 are comparison tables showing the correspondence with combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in each internal winning combination when the respective winning combinations are determined as internal winning combinations. A circle in each correspondence table indicates a combination (combination) of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line, in the role determined as the internal winning combination.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 changes the stop control according to the internal winning combination and the game state, and when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence shown in FIGS. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped so that a combination of symbols can be displayed. In the correspondence tables shown in FIG. 42 to FIG. 48, combinations of all symbols that may be displayed when the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination are listed. Even if it is the combination of the symbol attached, it may not be displayed.

  That is, in the pachislot machine 1, the stop control (for example, the symbol to be drawn in on a priority basis) is made different according to the combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed, and the current gaming state. Even if it is a combination of marked symbols, it may not be displayed. Accordingly, FIG. 47 and FIG. 48 show the correspondence between the type of combination and the combination of symbols that are actually stopped and displayed.

<Correspondence between the winning combination in the non-flag and the combination of the symbols displayed in the stop>
FIG. 47 is a view showing the correspondence (a part of the parts are omitted) between the winning combination in the gaming state excluding the inter-flag state and the combination of symbols displayed in the stop state. In the pachi-slot machine 1, as a plurality of roles, a “push order role” is provided in which combinations of symbols displayed in accordance with the order of the stop operation (pushing order) are different. The combination of symbols associated with "push order correct" in FIG. 47 is a combination of symbols advantageous to the player among the symbol combinations displayed according to the push order, and corresponds to "push order incorrect answer". The combination of attached symbols is a combination of symbols disadvantageous to the player among the combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. When notifying a stop operation that is advantageous for the player, the pressing order that is the correct answer is notified, and as a result, a combination of symbols associated with the “pushing order correct” is displayed. In addition, even in the ART gaming state, there is also a case in which pushing order that gives an incorrect answer is notified, but the details will be described later.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the end of the name of the key order represents the correct order. Specifically, the end "1st" of the name of the combination means that the pressing order for the correct answer is that the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L, and the end "2nd" of the name of the combination is The correct pressing order means that the first stop operation is for the middle reel 3C, and the end "3rd" of the name of the winning combination is the correct correct pressing order and the first stop operation is the right reel It means that it is for 3R. Also, the end "123" of the part name means that the pressing order to be the correct answer is "left, middle, right", and the end "132" of the part name is the correct order to be the correct The right end of the name of the part, "213" means that the pressing order to be the correct answer is "middle, left, right", the end of the name of the part "231" Means that the pressing order to be the correct answer is "left, right, middle".

  As shown in FIG. 47, the combination “F_Cilirip” is a combination in which the combination of symbols displayed in accordance with the pressing order is different, and when the pressing order is correct, FIG. 41 of the chiririps (see FIG. 35). If any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIG. 46 is displayed along the effective line, and if the pressing order is not correct, in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the replay (see FIG. 35) Any one of the displayable symbol combinations shown is displayed along the effective line. In addition, referring to FIG. 41 to FIG. 46, the combination "F_ chilli lip" can not display triple chilled lip ("C_ chilled lip D 01"-"C_1 positive chilled lip D 01"), and single chill lip or double linked chilli lip ("C_ chilli lip"). It can be seen that only A_01, “C_chiri lip B_01” and “C_chiri lip C_01” can be displayed. That is, the role "F_chiri lip" is a part that can not display triple chiri lip.

  In addition, the combinations “F_positive chirip lip” and “F_1 positive chirip lip” are combinations where the combination of the symbols displayed according to the pushing order is different, and the pushing order is correct, among the chiri lip (see FIG. 35) If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the effective line, and if the pressing order is not correct, FIG. 41 to FIG. Any one of the displayable symbol combinations shown at 46 is displayed along the effective line. In addition, referring to FIG. 41 to FIG. 46, it can be seen that the combination “F_positive chiry lip” and “F_1 positive chiry lip” can display triple chiri lip. That is, the role "F_positive chili lip" and "F_1 positive chili lip" is a part that can display triple chili lip.

  In addition, the combinations “F_reach eyes Lip A” to “F_reach eyes Lip D” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the reach eyes Lip ( If any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIG. 41 to FIG. 46 of FIG. 35 and FIG. 36) are displayed along the effective line, and if the pressing order is not correct, replay (see FIG. Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIG. 41 to FIG. 46 out of 35) are displayed along the effective line.

  In addition, although the pushing order of the correctness in the part "F_ chilli lip" "F_ definite chiri lip" "F 1 definite chiri lip" and the part "F_ reach eye lip A"-"F_ reach eye lip D" may be arbitrary, this practice In the embodiment, the pressing order in which the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L is the pressing order of the correct answer. Therefore, for example, in the game in which the combination "F_reach eyes Lip A" is determined as the internal winning combination, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, the reach eyes may be displayed. It will be done.

  In addition, in the roles “F_Maintenance Lip A” and “F_Maintenance Lip B”, any one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 among the replays (see FIG. 35) is effective regardless of the pressing order. Displayed along the. In addition, in the combinations “F_Maintenance Lip_1st” to “F_Maintenance Lip_3rd”, combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order are different, and when the pressing order is correct, the replay (see FIG. 35) Among the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 are displayed along the effective line, and if the pressing order is not correct, RT2 transition lip (see FIG. 35) One of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the effective line.

  In addition, the combination “F_RT3 Lip_1st” to “F_RT3 Lip_3rd” is a combination where the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different, and when the pressing order is correct, the RT3 transition ripple (see FIG. 35) Is displayed along the effective line, and if the pressing order is not correct, any one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIG. 41 to FIG. 46 among the replays (see FIG. 35) is the effective line. Displayed along.

  In addition, the combination “F_RT4 RIP _123” to “F_RT4 rip _3rd” is a combination in which the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different and the pressing order is correct, the RT4 transition ripple (see FIG. 35) Is displayed along the effective line, and if the pressing order is not correct, any one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIG. 41 to FIG. 46 among the replays (see FIG. 35) is the effective line. Displayed along.

  In addition, the combination “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” is a combination in which the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different and the pressing order is correct, the bell (see FIG. 37). Is displayed along the effective line, and if the pressing order is not the correct one, a bell spill (see FIG. 35) or a first shot (see FIG. 37, FIG. 38) is displayed.

  In addition, in the combination “F_common bell”, any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 among the bells (see FIG. 37) is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Also, in the roles "F_Sabo 1" and "F_Sabo 2", any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the cactus (see FIG. 38), regardless of the pressing order, is along the effective line. Is displayed.

  In addition, in the role "weak chili", any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in Figs. 41 to 46 of the weak cherry (see Fig. 38) is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Also, for the roles “F_strong chili 1” and “F_strong chili 2”, any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIG. 41 to FIG. 46 among the strong cherries (see FIG. 38) is effective regardless of pressing order. Displayed along the line.

<Correspondence between the winning combination between the flags and the combination of the symbols displayed in the stop>
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the correspondence (a part of the roles is omitted) between the winning combination in the inter-flag state and the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state, and in particular, BB (“C_BB1 in the inter-flag state) "C_BB2") can be displayed. In the “whether or not BB is established” in FIG. 48, “o” indicates that BB can be displayed, and “x” indicates that BB can not be displayed.

  In addition, when BB can not be displayed, the combination of the symbol according to the combination other than the combination which concerns on the bonus determined as an internal winning combination will be displayed. A combination of symbols displayed in accordance with roles other than the role related to the bonus is as shown in FIG. For example, in the combination “F_BB1 + F_chiri lip”, BB can not be displayed, but a combination of symbols of the correspondence shown in the combination “F_chiri lip” in FIG. 47 is displayed. In this case, during the inter-flag state, only the combination of symbols displayed at the time of pressing order shown in FIG. 47 may be displayed, or only the combination of symbols displayed at the time of pressing order incorrect may be displayed. You may

  For example, in the combination "F_BB1 + F_3 selection bell_1st", since BB can not be displayed, a combination of symbols of the correspondence shown in the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" in FIG. 47 is displayed, but in this case In addition, it is possible to make it possible to display only the bell that is displayed at the time of correct pressing order, and to make it impossible to display the bell spilled eyes and the first shot that are displayed at the time of incorrect pressing order. Further, in the case of the combination “F_BB1 + F_RT3 rip-1st”, only the replay displayed at the time of pressing order incorrectness may be made displayable, and the RT3 transitioning lip displayed at the time of pressing order correctness may be made impossible to display.

  As shown in FIG. 48, in the inter-flag state, when the combination relating to the bonus and one of “off” “F_special 1” “F_special 2” “F_special 3” is determined as the internal winning combination, BB can be displayed.

<Abbreviation of winning a prize>
In the above, the correspondence between the winning combination and the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed has been described. Then, although the data table used when performing various lottery in a general gaming state, an ART gaming state, etc. is explained, in the following, since the winning combination used when referring to the data table is indicated by an abbreviation, the data table Before explaining the explanation of the winning combination of abbreviations. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an abbreviation of a winning combination.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (A), in the following, the roles “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” are called a role “BB”, and the roles “F_3 alternative bell_1st” to “F_3 alternative bell_3rd” are called a combination “push order bell”, "F_ common bell" is called "common bell", "F_ Sabo 1" and "F_ Sabo 2" are called "cactus", "F _ weak chiri" is called "weak cherry" and "F _ strong". Chile 1 "F_ strong Chile 2" is called the role "strong cherry".

  In addition, the roles "F_ Certain Chiri Lip" and "F_1 Certain Chiri Lip" are called "three consecutive Chiri Lip" when winning the flag conversion lottery, and they are called "Replay" when not winning the flag conversion lottery. Similarly, the roles "F_reach eyes Lip A" to "F_reach eyes Lip D" are called "reach eyes lip" when winning a flag conversion lottery, and they are called "replay" when winning a flag conversion lottery.

(Flag conversion lottery)
Here, with reference to FIG. 49 (B), the flag conversion lottery will be described. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, any one of the roles "F_positive chiri lip", "F_1 positive chiri lip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" is independently performed as an internal winning combination during the RT4 gaming state. If determined, flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, the pachislot machine 1 gives a special benefit (for example, the addition of the number of ART games or the winning of a CT) when winning the flag conversion lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 47, combinations of symbols of “three consecutive chillirip” are displayed at the time of pressing correct in the combinations “F_ firm chilly lip” and “F_1 firmy lip”, and a combination of symbols of “replay” at the wrong order of pressing Is displayed. In pachislot machine 1, when winning a flag conversion and lottery, the information "F_ true chilli lip" and "F 1 true chilli lip" is treated as a role "triple chilli lip", and information for displaying a combination of symbols of "triple chilli lip" (For example, aim for a chili symbol by pressing in order). On the other hand, when not winning the flag conversion lottery, treat the roles "F_ true chillirip" and "F_1 true chillirip" as the role "replay", and notify the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" (for example, Informing the pushing order other than the forward pushing).

  Similarly, combinations of symbols of "reach eye lip" are displayed in the correct order of pushing the roles "F_ reach eye lip A" to "F_ reach eye lip D", and a combination of symbols of "replay" when the pushing order is incorrect Is displayed. In pachislot machine 1, when winning the flag conversion lottery, treat the role "F_ reach eye lip A" ~ "F_ reach eye lip D" as the role "reach eye lip", the combination of "reach eye lip" symbols Informing information to be displayed (for example, aim for the symbol "White 7" by pressing in order). On the other hand, when not winning the flag conversion lottery, the information “F_reach eyes Lip A” to “F_reach eyes Lip D” is treated as a role “Replay”, and information for displaying a combination of “Replay” symbols To inform

  By performing the stop operation in accordance with the notification, when winning the flag conversion lottery, a combination of symbols of "triple chiri lip" or "reach eye lip" is displayed, and a special privilege is given. Although the Pachi-Slot machine 1 gives special benefits in response to winning the flag conversion lottery, the player sees the combination of the symbols of "three consecutive chiri rips" and the special benefits are displayed. You will feel granted.

  In order to enhance the playability of the pachislot machine, it may be preferable to differ depending on the state, rather than the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which a privilege is given being constant. Since the stop control (combination of displayed symbols) differs depending on the type of internal winning combination, the winning probability of the combination is made different as a method of making the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the benefit is given differed depending on the condition. A method is also conceivable (In the case of the pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of the winning combination can be made different depending on the presence or absence of the bonus operation and the RT gaming state, for example, only the RT4 gaming state as a gaming state corresponding to the ART gaming state) It is also conceivable to provide other gaming states such as RT6 gaming state and RT7 gaming state. However, since the opportunity for changing the winning probability of the part (the transition opportunity for the RT gaming state) is limited, this method lacks flexibility.

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the privilege is provided by performing flag conversion lottery and notification based on the lottery result, in addition to internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination without changing the winning probability of the winning combination. The appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to be given can be flexibly changed according to the state. That is, in the state where it is easy to win the flag conversion lottery, the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the benefit is given can be raised, and conversely, in the condition where it is difficult to win the flag conversion lottery, the combination of the symbols to which the bonus is given You can reduce the frequency of appearance of

  In addition, in the following, it is assumed that winning the flag conversion lottery when the roles “F_certain lip” and “F_1 certain lip” are determined as internal winnings, “Trials“ F_certain lip ”“ F_1 certain lip ”“ three consecutive It may be referred to as “convert to chilli lip” (or simply convert to “triple chilli lip”), and when the roles “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” are determined as internal winning combinations Converting a flag into a lottery for a flag is referred to as converting “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” into “reach eye lip” (or simply converting into “reach eye lip”) There is.

[Flow of game in general game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 50, the flow of the game in the normal game state will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, the transition from the normal gaming state of the normal gaming state to the CZ of the normal gaming state, and then the transition from the CZ of the normal gaming state to the ART gaming state causes the general gaming state (non ART) to the ART gaming state Transition to (see FIG. 33). FIG. 50A is a diagram showing a flow of gaming when transitioning from the normal gaming state in the normal gaming state to CZ in the general gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 50A, the normal gaming state has a low probability state and a high probability state as the lottery state of CZ. The low probability state and the high probability state are states in which the expectation for winning the CZ lottery which is performed during the normal gaming state is different from each other, the low probability state is hard to win the CZ lottery, and the high probability state is the CZ lottery. It is easy to do. If the CZ lottery performed during the normal gaming state is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the CZ (see FIG. 33).

  The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of chance zones CZ1, CZ2 and CZ3 as CZ (chance zones). These CZ1 to CZ3 are chance zones having different expectations for winning ART lottery performed during CZ, CZ3 is a chance zone for always winning ART lottery, and CZ1 and CZ2 are ART lottery with a predetermined probability. It is a chance zone to win In the CZ lottery performed during the normal gaming state, the CZ to be shifted from the normal gaming state is extracted from among the CZ1 to CZ3.

  Subsequently, FIG. 50B is a diagram showing a flow of gaming when transitioning from CZ1 and CZ2 in the normal gaming state to the ART gaming state. CZ1 and CZ2 are composed of a first half and a second half. The first half is a period for promoting the ranks with different degrees of expectation for winning the ART lottery performed during the CZ, and the second half is a period for notifying the lottery result of ART lottery based on the rank by the battle effect.

  During CZ1, a six-step mode is used as a rank, and the higher the mode, the higher the expectation for winning the ART lottery. The first half of CZ1 continues the first game number (for example, 12 games at the maximum), and performs the elevation lottery of the mode based on the internal winning combination. Then, ART lottery is performed based on the mode promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ1.

  In CZ2, 10 points are used as ranks, and the higher the point, the higher the expectation for winning ART lottery. The first half of CZ2 continues the second game number (for example, 15 games at maximum), and performs elevation lottery of points based on the internal winning combination. Then, ART lottery is performed based on the points promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ2.

  In the second half of CZ1, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character A fight is performed, and in the second half of CZ2, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character B battle is performed. This battle effect continues for the third game number (for example, 4 games at the maximum), the outcome is managed based on the result of ART lottery, and the ally character wins and does not win when ART lottery is won. If it does, the enemy character wins. Also, in the second half of CZ1 and CZ2, ART lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination for each game, and when winning this ART lottery, the result of the battle effect is rewritten. That is, when a so-called rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination during battle production, ART lottery is performed, and the result of battle production is rewritten based on the result.

  In CZ1 and CZ2, in the case where ART is not won, the battle effect of the second half is lost, and thereafter, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, when CZ1 and CZ2 win the ART, they win the battle rendition in the second half, and then the gaming state shifts to the normal ART via ART preparation. In the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, a freeze may occur, and in this case, the gaming state shifts to CT (superimposed chance zone) instead of the normal ART (via ART preparation).

  Next, FIG. 50C is a diagram showing a flow of gaming when transitioning from CZ 3 in the general gaming state to the ART gaming state. CZ3 continues the fourth game number (for example, 17 games at the maximum), and performs ART lottery based on the internal winning combination for each game. CZ3 is ended when winning ART lottery, from the next game the gaming state is in transition to the CT (additional chance zone) via ART preparation in progress. In addition, in CZ3, a freeze may occur, and also in this case, the gaming state from the next game is transferred to CT (superimposed chance zone) via ART being prepared. On the other hand, when the fourth game number has passed without winning the ART lottery in CZ3, the gaming state shifts to the normal ART via ART preparing. That is, CZ3 is a chance zone in which the transition to the ART gaming state is determined when the transition is made.

[Data table used during the general gaming state]
Subsequently, a data table used during the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Normal middle and high probability lottery table>
FIG. 51 is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used for transition lottery of CZ lottery states (low probability and high probability). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery state of CZ is shifted based on the internal winning combination, and also the lottery state of CZ is shifted at the end of the bonus or at the end of CZ and ART. FIG. 51A shows a normal middle-high probability lottery table used to shift the lottery state of CZ based on the internal winning combination, and is referred to each game during the normal gaming state. FIG. 51B shows a normal middle-high probability lottery table used to shift the lottery state of CZ at the end of a bonus, etc., and is referred to at the time of setting change, at the end of a bonus, or at the end of CZ and ART.

  The normal middle / high probability sorting table shown in FIG. 51 (A) defines lottery value information on the CZ lottery state after transition, in association with the current CZ lottery state and winning combination.

  In the various data tables shown below, information on lottery values is conceptually shown. In the figure, "0" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "0%" is defined, and "very low" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "0% to less than 1%" It means that it is defined, "very low" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "1% to less than 10%" is defined, "low" means the lottery probability "10% Means that a lottery value corresponding to “less than 30%” is defined, “middle” means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability “less than 30% to 60%” is defined, "High" means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability "60% to less than 80%" is defined, and "extremely high" corresponds to a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability "80% to less than 99%" “Extremely high” means a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability of “99% to less than 100%”. Means that are "determined" means that the lottery value corresponding to lottery probability "100%" is defined.

  And, in various data tables shown below, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range ("0 to 255" when the probability denominator is 256, "0 to 65535" when the probability denominator is 65536) An internal lottery is performed by sequentially subtracting a random number value for lottery with a prescribed lottery value and determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called “worried” has occurred). It will be.

  Referring to the normal middle-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (A), it can be understood that when the current CZ lottery state is low probability, it is easy to shift to high probability when weak cherry is the internal winning combination. . In addition, when the current CZ bolting state is high probability, it is understood that the high probability is maintained by determining any one of the common bell, cactus, weak cherries and strong cherries as the internal winning combination. .

  The normal middle-high probability sorting table shown in FIG. 51 (B) defines information of the lottery value regarding the lottery state of CZ after transition, according to the situation at the time of reference. Referring to the normal middle-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (B), it can be seen that the lottery state of CZ necessarily shifts to the high probability at the end of the bonus.

<CZ lottery table>
52 is a CZ lottery table used for CZ lottery, and FIG. 52 (A) is a CZ lottery table used when performing CZ lottery based on an internal winning combination during the normal gaming state. B) is a CZ lottery table used when performing CZ lottery whether or not to pull back CZ at the time of CZ failure or at the end of ART.

  The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (A) defines lottery information on winning / not winning of CZ1, CZ2 and CZ3 in association with the current lottery state and internal winning combination of CZ. Referring to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52A, it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state is in high probability, the probability of winning CZ lottery is higher than in the case of low probability.

  The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (B) defines lottery value information on winning / non winning of CZ1, CZ2 and CZ3. At the time of CZ failure (when CZ1 or CZ2 does not win the ART lottery, or at the end of the ART gaming state), the CZ pulling back lottery is performed using the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (B).

<CZ1 medium mode up lottery table>
FIG. 53 is a CZ1 medium mode up lottery table used for CZ1 mode up lottery in the first half of CZ1. The CZ1 medium mode up lottery table defines lottery value information on the result of mode up lottery in association with the current mode and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 55 (A) described later, in CZ1, the probability of winning the ART lottery increases as the mode goes up, and when the mode 6 goes up, the ART lottery will always win. The “mode 1 UP” of the lottery result means that the mode of CZ 1 is increased by 1 and the “mode 2 UP” of the lottery result means that the mode of CZ 1 is increased by 2. That is, in the situation where the current mode is "2", if "mode 2 UP" is won, the mode of CZ 1 will be raised from "2" to "4". In addition, upon winning the “mode 6 UP_freeze occurrence” of the lottery result, a freeze occurs, winning ART lottery and CT being given.

<CZ2 middle point lottery table>
FIG. 54 is a CZ2 middle-point lottery table used for CZ2 point-up lottery in the first half of CZ2. The CZ2 middle point lottery table defines lottery value information on the result of the point-up lottery, in association with the current point and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 55 (B) described later, in CZ2, the probability of winning the ART lottery increases as the point goes up, and when the point 10 is raised, the ART lottery will always win. In addition, "point 2 UP" of the lottery result means that the point of CZ 2 goes up by 2, for example, when the current point is "2", when winning "point 2 UP", the point of CZ 2 is " It will go up from 2 "to" 4 ". In addition, when winning "point 10 UP_freeze occurrence" of the lottery result, freeze occurs, winning ART lottery and CT being given.

<CZ ART ART lottery table>
55 and 56 show the ART lottery table in CZ used for ART lottery in CZ, and FIG. 55 (A) shows the ART lottery table in CZ used for the first game of the second half of CZ1 (for CZ1) 55 (B) shows a CZ ART lottery table (for CZ2) used in the first game of the second half of CZ2, and FIG. 55 (C) shows a CZ used in the second half of CZ1 and CZ2. It is a medium ART lottery table (for CZ1 and CZ2 common second half battle), and FIG. 55 (D) is a CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ3) used for ART lottery in CZ3.

  The CZ-ART ART lottery table (for CZ1) shown in FIG. 55 (A) defines information of lottery values regarding the presence or absence of winning of ART lottery in association with the current mode. Further, the CZ-ART ART lottery table (for CZ2) shown in FIG. 55 (B) defines the information of the lottery value regarding the presence or absence of winning of ART lottery in association with the current point. Referring to the ART lottery table (for CZ1) in CZ and the ART lottery table (for CZ2) in CZ, it can be seen that in CZ1 and CZ2, it is easier to win ART lottery as the rank (mode or point) of the first half increases.

  The CRT ART lottery table (for CZ1 and CZ2 common and in the second half battle) shown in FIG. 55 (C) defines lottery value information on the presence or absence of winning of ART lottery in association with the internal winning combination. Referring to the ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ1 and CZ2 common and in the second half battle), if the rare part (weak cherry, cactus or strong cherry) is determined as an internal winning combination in the second half of CZ1 and CZ2, a predetermined It turns out that winning an ART lottery by probability.

  The CZ-ART ART lottery table (for CZ3) shown in FIG. 56 (D) defines lottery value information on the presence or absence of ART lottery winnings in association with the number of continuing games in CZ3 and the internal winning combination. Referring to the ART lottery table (for CZ3) in CZ, it can be seen that CZ will always win in CZ3 when winning in ART lottery.

[Flow of games in normal ART]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 57, the flow of the game in the normal ART will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 normally has ART and CT as an ART gaming state (see FIG. 33), and sets CT as an additional chance zone. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, during the normal ART, a game is played aiming to shift to CT. FIG. 57 (A) is a diagram showing a flow of transition lottery to CT in normal ART.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (A), the pachi-slot machine 1 has an ART level and a CT lottery state as states affecting various lottery which are usually performed during ART. The ART level is provided in four stages of level 1 to level 4 and is controlled mainly based on the number of continuing games in the normal ART. The ART level affects the determination of the CT lottery status and the flag conversion lottery in the normal ART described later. In addition, the CT lottery status is provided in four stages of low probability, usually high probability and ultra high probability, and is controlled mainly based on the ART level and the internal winning combination in the normal ART. The CT lottery status affects the CT lottery performed during the normal ART and the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later.

(Usually flag conversion in ART)
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the player plays the role during the RT4 gaming state (that is, in the ART gaming state) “F_positive chili lip” “F_1 positive chili lip” “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye If any of the lip D is independently determined as an internal winning combination, flag conversion lottery is performed, and a special benefit (for example, addition of ART game number or CT winning) is given according to the lottery result. FIG. 57 (B) is a diagram showing a flag lottery method in the normal ART.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (B), the pachislot machine 1 performs flag conversion / lottery, usually referring to the ART level and the CT lottery state during ART. As a result, when a flag conversion lottery is won, a special benefit is given, and a notification for displaying a combination of symbols of "triple chiri lip" and a combination of "reach eye lip" (for example, in order) Perform notification to aim a predetermined symbol by pressing). Conversely, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, a notification (for example, notification of a push order other than forward press) for displaying a combination of symbols of "Replay" is performed. The player performs the stop operation according to the notification to combine the symbols according to the content of the notification, that is, when winning the flag conversion lottery, the symbol combination of "triple chiri lip" and the symbol of "reach eye lip" A combination of symbols of “Replay” is displayed when the combination of symbols is not won and the symbol conversion lottery is not won.

[Data table usually used during ART]
Subsequently, a data table generally used during ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 62.

<ART flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 58 is a ART-in-ART flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery in normal ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the flag conversion lottery in the normal ART is performed in two stages. Specifically, when the roles “F_certain lip” and “F_1certain lip” are determined as internal winning combinations, first, the first stage flag conversion lottery is performed, and when the first stage flag conversion lottery is won, Thereafter, the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, when winning the second stage of flag conversion lottery, the combination "F_ positive chiri lip" and "F_1 positive chiri lip" is converted to "triple chiri lip", and the first stage flag conversion lottery or the second stage flag conversion lottery If you do not win, the role "F_ Certain Chiri Lip" and "F_1 Certain Chiri Lip" will be treated as "Replay" without being converted to "Triple Chiri Lip".

  FIG. 58 (A) is an ART intra-ART flag conversion lottery table used for the first stage flag conversion lottery, and FIG. 58 (B) is an ART intra-ART flag conversion lottery table used for the second stage flag conversion lottery is there. The flag conversion / lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 58 (A) defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the first stage of flag conversion / lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In Pachi-Slot machine 1, the first stage flag conversion lottery is performed only on the roles "F_ sure chillirip" and "F_1 check chillirip", and for the roles "F_ reach eye lip A" to "F_ reach eye lip D" Only the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed.

  The flag conversion / lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 58 (B) defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the second stage of the flag conversion / lottery in association with the internal winning combination, ART level and CT lottery state. In addition, in the ART, until the CT is won once, the “first time (until CT wins)” column of the item “ART level” is referred to.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 58 (A) and (B), in each of the ART flag conversion / lottery table, random numbers (0 to 255) in the range of the probability denominator 256 are used to perform the first and second stages. In order to perform the flag conversion lottery, the two-stage flag conversion lottery can be simulated as a lottery performed using random numbers within the range of the probability denominator 65536. In recent pachislot machines, the main side is required to carry out lottery (art lottery etc.) on the out balls conventionally performed on the sub side, but the capacity of the storage means (ROM) on the main side is limited Therefore, there is a need for a mechanism that enables a lottery that has a reduced capacity and does not impair gameplay.

  In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention, by performing the probability denominator 256 in two steps, since the probability denominator 65536 can be extracted, the capacity can be suppressed. In addition, by referring to the ART level and the CT lottery status with respect to the second stage lottery, flag conversion lottery can be performed according to the current status as well as the internal winning combination, so various game characteristics can be obtained. It is possible to carry out a flag conversion lottery.

<ART level determination table>
FIG. 59 is an ART level determination table used to determine an ART level. The determination of the ART level is performed when the transition to the ART gaming state is a winning ART, and usually during the ART. FIG. 59 (A) is an ART level determination table for determining an ART level upon winning an ART, and FIG. 59 (B) is an ART level determination table for determining an ART level during an ART.

  The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59A defines lottery value information for each ART level. When a freeze occurs at the winning of ART (see FIG. 53 and the like), ART level 2 is determined as the ART level. The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59 (B) defines lottery value information on the ART level of the transition destination in association with the current ART level and the number of continued games in the normal ART. Further, the ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59 (B) defines information on the lottery value for the ART level of the transition destination in association with the current ART level and the number of continued games in the normal ART at the time of CT entry. . That is, during the normal ART, the ART level shifts according to the number of continuing games, and the ART level also shifts at the timing when the normal ART moves into the CT.

<Normal ART Medium-High Probability Lottery Table>
FIG. 60 is a normal ART medium-high probability lottery table for lottery the CT lottery state in the normal ART. The normal ART medium-high probability lottery table defines information of lottery values for the CT lottery state of the transition destination in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. Usually, referring to the ART middle-high probability lottery table, the role "triple chiri lip (the part" F_ positive chiri lip """winning the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the F 1 positive chili lip") or the role "reach eye lip (part" F_ reach eye lip It is understood that the CT lottery state is easy to shift (fall) to “low probability” in “A” to “F_reach eye lip D” (corresponding to flag conversion lottery at winning). In the above description, when it is determined that the flag conversion lottery has won, it seems that contrary to the above description, it is likely that the CT lottery state is likely to fall, since a special benefit is given. As will be described later, the roles "three consecutive chilli lip" and "reach eye lip" always win a CT lottery. Therefore, even if the CT lottery status falls, there is no change in that the special benefit of CT winning is provided.

<Artifact CT lottery table>
FIG. 61 shows an ART-in-ART CT lottery table which is generally used for CT lottery in ART. The during-ART CT lottery table defines the information of the lottery value for the CT lottery result, in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. In the ART during CT lottery table, if “Cactus”, “Weak Cherry”, “Strong Cherry”, “Triple Chiri Lip”, “Leach Eye Lip”, “BB” are determined as internal winning combinations, the range of the probability denominator 256 is A CT lottery is performed using random number values. On the other hand, when the other winning combination (for example, replay, common bell, pushing order bell, etc.) is determined as the internal winning combination, CT lottery is performed using random values within the range of the probability denominator 65536.

  The pachislot machine 1 has “normal CT” and “high probability CT” as CT. Expectations of the number of ART games to be added in CT (superimposed chance zone) are different between “normal CT” and “high probability CT”, and “high probability CT” has a larger number of ART games than “normal CT” Is easily added (see FIG. 66).

<Ordinary ART middle class lottery table>
FIG. 62 shows a normal ART medium addition random number selection table used for an addition random number where the number of ART games is usually added during ART. Usually, the ART extra-lot lottery table is associated with the internal winning combination and defines lottery value information on the extra-lot lottery result.

[Flow of game during CT]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 63, the flow of the game during CT will be described. As shown in FIG. 63 (A), in the pachislot machine 1, CT is performed by one set of eight games. During CT, the ART lottery number addition lottery is performed on the basis of internal winning combination, the number of games is not reduced when winning the additional lottery, the number of games is subtraction only when not winning the additional lottery Be done. Therefore, the CT does not end in the game in which the number of ART games is added, but does not end when the game in which the number of ART games is not added in the same set is performed eight times.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 63 (A) and (B), if you win the part "triple chili lip" during CT (that is, if you win the flag conversion lottery at the part combination "F_ positive chili lip" and "F_1 positive chiri lip"). ), 1 set 8 games are reset. For example, when a game is performed seven times in which the number of ART games is not added in the same set, the CT ends when one more game in which the number of ART games is not added is performed, but the role "three consecutive chill lip" When winning, the CT is re-set, and as a result, the CT will not end until a game in which the number of ART games is not added eight times is played. Therefore, CT becomes easier to continue as the winning combination "triple chiri lip" is won.

(Flag conversion during CT)
FIG. 63C is a diagram showing a flag lottery method in CT. During CT, the roles "F_positive chili lip" and "F_1 positive chili lip" must be converted to the role "triple chili lip". As described above, since CT is reset when winning the role "triple chiri lip" during CT, CT is re-established when the role "F_positive chiri lip" and "F_1 positive chiri lip" is determined as the internal winning combination. It will be set.

  On the other hand, the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the three-stage table (tables 0 to 2) for the roles “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D”. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), Table 0 has the lowest probability of converting to "reach eye lip", and Table 1 has the next lowest probability of converting to "reach eye lip"; Is most likely to convert to "reach eye lip". In addition, when winning the role "reach eye lip" during CT, CT is newly assigned as shown in FIG. 67 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 63C, in normal CT, a table is determined based on the ART level. Further, in the high probability CT, the table 0 is always determined regardless of the ART level.

[Data table used during CT]
Subsequently, a data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67.

<CT during table lottery table>
FIG. 64 is a during-CT table lottery table for determining a table to be used for flag conversion / lottery out of three-stage tables. The during-CT table lottery table defines information of lottery values for a table used for flag conversion lottery, in association with the state such as the ART level and the type of CT to be executed from now. The during-CT table lottery table is referred to at the start of CT or when it is decided to win the CT lottery and to shift to CT, and determines a table to be used for flag conversion lottery during CT.

<CT flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 65 is a CT in-CT flag conversion / lottery table used for flag conversion / lottery in CT. The flag conversion lottery table during CT defines the information of the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery, in association with the table used for the flag conversion lottery and the internal winning combination. Referring to the flag conversion / lottery table during CT, it can be understood that during CT, the roles “F_positive_lip” and “F_1_positive_lip” are always converted to the “triple-drop”.

<CT middle addition lottery table>
FIG. 66 shows a CT additional lottery random number table used for an additional lottery where the number of ART games is added during CT. The CT extra-lot lottery table defines information of lottery values about the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In addition, with regard to the roles other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 66, there is no winning of the additional lottery in CT.

  In addition, in the additional lottery during the normal CT, the number of additional games varies depending on the number of times the player has won the "three consecutive chilli lip". Specifically, when the number of times the player wins the winning combination "three consecutive chillirips" during the same CT is "1 to 8 times", "10 games" is easily determined as the number of additional games, and during the same CT, If the number of times the player has won the role "three consecutive chillirips" is "9 to 16 times", "20 games" is easily determined as the number of added games, and the number of times the combination "three consecutive chillirips" is won during the same CT. When “17-24 times” is “30 games” is easily determined as the number of added games, and when the number of times winning a combination “three consecutive chills” during the same CT is “25 times or more” "50 games" is easily determined as the number of games to be added.

  More specifically, if the number of wins in the same CT during the same CT is “1 to 8 times”, the CT middle added lottery table has the role of “three consecutive chiri rips” in the figure. The number of added games corresponding to the lottery value “extremely high” is “10 games”, and the number of added games corresponding to the lottery value “extremely low” is “20 games”. Then, when the number of times winning the combination "three consecutive chillirip" during the same CT is "9 times or more", the number of added games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" of the combination "three consecutive chillirip" in the figure is " Promote to 20 games. Furthermore, when the number of times of winning the role "triple chili lip" during the same CT is "17 times or more", it corresponds to the lottery value "extremely high" and "very low" of the part "triple chili lip" in the figure. The number of added games is promoted to "30 games". Similarly, when the number of times winning the combination "three consecutive chilli lip" during the same CT is "25 times or more", it corresponds to the lottery value "extremely high" and "very low" of the combination "three consecutive chilli lip" in the figure. The number of added games to be promoted is promoted to "50 games".

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the number of games to be added per one is increased in accordance with the number of times the player plays a "three-piece chilli lip" during CT. As described above, as long as the ART game number is added, CT does not end, and since the CT is re-set when winning the role "triple chiri lip", from the viewpoint of the player, CT As we continue, we can have the expectation of increasing the amount of extra charge per session, and the interest in CT will improve. In addition, since the number of times to increase the additional amount per game is a number (9 or more) more than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT, an excessive profit is given to the player. This can be prevented from being given, and the profits of the player and the game arcade can be balanced.

<Set number during CT addition lottery table>
FIG. 67 is a CT number-added set number-added lottery table used for the number-of-set number-added lottery in which a new CT is given during CT. The CT number-in-set number addition lottery table defines information of the lottery value regarding the number-of-sets-plus-lottery lottery result in association with the type of CT being executed and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 67, a new CT is given when winning the role "reach eye lip" during CT. When a new CT is assigned in accordance with the number-of-sets addition lottery, the new CT is started again at the timing when the CT being executed is finished.

  In addition, although the number of times of winning the above-mentioned part "triple chiri lip" is counted only in the same CT, this "in the same CT" is when winning the set number addition lottery carried out during CT It may or may not include a new CT given to

[Flow of game in bonus state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 68, the flow of the game in the bonus state will be described. FIG. 68 (A) is a view showing the flow of the game when transitioning to the bonus state during the normal gaming state (ART non-winning), and FIG. 68 (B) is the case where transitioning to the bonus state during normal ART FIG. 68 (C) is a diagram showing a flow of gaming when transitioning to a bonus state during CT. As shown in FIGS. 68 (A) to 68 (C), the pachislot machine 1 has the normal BB and the special BB as the types of bonus, and determines the type of bonus at the transition of the bonus state. At this time, when the special BB is determined, after the end of the bonus state, transition to CT is made via ART preparation. On the other hand, when the normal BB is determined, the flow is different depending on the state before the transition to the bonus state.

  Referring to FIG. 68 (A), when transitioning from the normal gaming state to normal BB, ART lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination during normal BB. When winning the ART lottery, after the bonus state is over, it will be transitioning to ART during the ART preparation. In addition, after winning the ART lottery, additional lottery of the number of ART games is performed during the bonus state.

  Referring to FIG. 68 (B), when the normal ART transitions to the normal BB, CT lottery is performed at the end of the normal BB. This CT lottery wins with a probability of 50%, and if won, it transitions to CT via ART preparation after the end of the bonus status, and if not won, it shifts to normal ART via ART preparation after the bonus status ends. Do. In addition, during the bonus state shifted from the normal ART, additional lottery of ART game number is also performed.

  Referring to FIG. 68 (C), when transitioning from CT to normal BB or special BB, transition is made to CT via ART preparation after the end of the bonus state. In addition, during the bonus state shifted from the normal ART, additional lottery of ART game number is also performed.

[Data table used during bonus state]
Subsequently, a data table used during the bonus state will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Bonus type lottery table>
FIG. 69 shows a bonus type random determination table for determining bonus types (normal BB, special BB). The bonus type lottery table is referred to at the start of the bonus state, and defines lottery value information on the bonus type in association with the state before the transition to the bonus state.

<Bonus during ART game number addition lottery table>
FIG. 70 shows a lottery table for number-of-bonus ART games during bonus, which is used for ART lottery and number-of-ART games additional lottery performed during the bonus state. The bonus ART game number addition lottery table defines the information of the lottery result of ART lottery and the lottery value of the number of added games in association with the bonus type and the internal winning combination.

  The bonus ART game number plus lottery table is used for ART lottery in the ART non-winning state (until the ART lottery is won in the normal BB transitioning from the normal gaming state). That is, if one or more (in practice, a minimum of 50 games) is determined as the number of games to be added in the ART non-winning condition, ART lottery is won and a corresponding number of games is given. On the other hand, in the state after winning the ART, the bonus ART game number addition lottery table is used for the ART game number addition lottery.

<At the end of bonus CT lottery table>
FIG. 71 is a bonus end CT lottery table used for CT lottery performed at the end of the bonus state. The bonus lottery time CT lottery table defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the bonus type and the gaming state before shifting to the bonus state. Referring to the bonus end CT lottery table shown in FIG. 71, for example, when normal BB is performed during normal ART, it is understood that CT is won with a 50% probability at the end of the bonus state.

[Flow of exceptional game in general game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 72, the flow of exceptional gaming in the normal gaming state will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, basically, the game state is shifted from the normal game state to the CZ during the normal game state, and the ART game state is aimed at by winning the ART lottery in the CZ. Here, in the pachislot machine 1, the ART gaming state is realized by notifying in the RT4 gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 72, the RT gaming state is controlled according to the combination of the displayed symbols. doing. As shown in FIG. 47, since the combination of symbols for shifting the RT gaming state is displayed according to the order of the player's stop operation (pushing order), even if notification is not performed. , It may shift to RT4 gaming state by chance.

  Also, in the RT4 gaming state, since the roles "F_reach eyes Lip A" to "F_reach eyes Lip D" may be determined as internal winning combinations, even during the general gaming state (non-ART), The reach eye (reach eye lip) to which a special benefit is given can be displayed. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, when the game mode is accidentally shifted to the RT4 gaming state during the normal gaming state (non-ART), the symbol combination of "reach eye lip" can be displayed Once in the normal state, transition to the ART gaming state (usually ART) is possible without passing through the CZ.

  More specifically, when the roles "F_reach eyes Lip A" to "F_reach eyes Lip D" are determined as internal winning combinations during the normal gaming state and the RT4 gaming state, flag conversion lottery is performed, and this When winning the flag conversion lottery, the notification of displaying the combination of the symbols of "reach eyes lip" is given, and the right of ART is granted. On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, notification for displaying the combination of symbols of "replay" is performed, and control is performed so that the combination of symbols of "reach eye lip" is not displayed.

<Non-ART flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 73 is a non-ART flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery performed during the normal gaming state and the RT4 gaming state. The non-ART flag conversion / lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion / lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Notification by main side control]
In the pachislot machine, conventionally, notification of stop operation information (pushing order etc.) was performed under the control of the sub (sub control board 72) side in the ART machine, but the presence or absence of the notification is the profit of the player ( In order to influence so-called balls, in recent years, it is required to perform notification on the main (main control board 71) side that manages the player's profit. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the information display 14 controlled by the main control board 71 is provided with an instruction monitor for notifying the information on the stopping operation, and notifies the information on the stopping operation under the control on the main side. It is supposed to be.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the notification (navi) performed on the main side and the notification (navi) performed on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 74, the main control board 71 notifies the information on the stop operation by displaying numerical values of “1” to “11” on the instruction monitor. The numerical values “1” to “11” uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified, and “1” to “3” indicate the types of reels performing the first stop operation, respectively. “1” means performing the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, “2” means performing the first stop operation on the middle reel 3C, and “3” Means that the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R.

  Also, "4" to "9" indicate the pushing order to be notified respectively, "4" means that the pushing order is "left, middle, right" and "5" indicates the pushing order is " It means that it is "left, right, middle", "6" means that the pushing order is "middle, left, right" and "7" is the pushing order is "middle, right, left" "8" means that the pushing order is "right, left, middle", and "9" means that the pushing order is "right, middle, left".

  In addition, "10" "11" is to notify the role associated with the bonus, "10" means the combination "C_BB1" of the symbol consisting of "white 7-white 7-white 7", "11" Means a combination of symbols "C_BB2" consisting of "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7".

  Here, although the numerical values “1” to “11” notified on the main side uniquely correspond to the content of the stop operation to be notified, it is limited that all players can clearly grasp the notification content. Absent. That is, there is a possibility that some players can not grasp the contents of notification only by displaying "6" on the instruction monitor on the main side.

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, in addition to the notification on the main side, the sub-side also notifies the contents of the stop operation. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with the display unit 100 controlled by the sub control board 72, and reports information on the stop operation under the control of the sub side. For example, when notifying that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, the main side displays "1" on the instruction monitor, and the sub side displays the left reel 3L of the display unit 100. “1” is displayed on the upper side to notify that the left reel 3L is the target of the first stop operation. Similarly, when notifying the pressing order "medium, left, right", the main side displays "6" on the instruction monitor, and the sub side displays "1" above the reel 3C in the display unit 100. "," "2" is displayed above the left reel 3L, and "3" is displayed above the right reel 3R to notify that the pressing order is "middle, left, right". In addition, when “F_BB1” is determined as the internal winning combination, “10” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and “white 7-white 7-white 7” on the display unit 100 on the sub-side. Is displayed to inform the player of a symbol to be aimed.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (A), during ART preparation, “Bell Navi”, “Maintenance Rip Navi”, “RT3 Transition Rip Navi” and “RT4 Transition Rip Navi” are performed under control of the main side. "Bell navi" notifies the pressing order for displaying the combination of symbols of "bell" for the roles "F_3 alternative bell_1st" to "F_3 alternative bell_3rd". In addition, “Maintenance Repinabi” notifies the pressing order for displaying the combination of “Replay” symbols for the roles “F_Maintenance Lip_1st” to “F_Maintenance Lip_3rd”. In addition, “RT3 transition repnavabi” notifies the pressing order for displaying the combination of symbols “RT3 transition lip” for the combination “F_RT3 transition lip_1st” to “F_RT3 transition lip_3rd”. In addition, “RT4 transition repnavabi” notifies the pressing order for displaying the combination of “RT4 transition ripple” symbols for the “F_RT4 transition ripple_123” to “F_RT4 transition ripple_3rd”.

  In addition, the timing which alert | reports by the main side should just be at least during 1 game which alert | reports, and is arbitrary. For example, the notification on the main side may be performed at the timing when the start operation is received, or the notification on the main side may be performed when rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts, and the first stop operation to the third stop operation Notification on the main side may be performed at the timing at which one of the two is received. On the other hand, it is preferable that the timing which alert | reports by the sub side is a timing before at least 1st stop operation. In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, notification is performed on both the main side and the sub side when the start operation is received or when the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start to rotate. As a result, before the player performs the stop operation, the information on the stop operation is notified on both the instruction monitor on the main side and the display unit 100 on the sub side.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), during the ART gaming state, “Bell Navi”, “Maintenance Rip Navi”, “RT 3 Transition Rip Navi” and “RT 4 Transition Rip Navi” are performed under the control of the main side. In the ART gaming state (RT4 gaming state), flag conversion and lottery are performed, and based on the result of the lottery, a push for displaying a combination of symbols of "three consecutive chiri ripu", "reach eye ripu" or "replay" Although the order is notified, this notification is performed not on the main side but only on the sub side.

  As described above, since the combination of symbols of "three consecutive chilli lip" and "reach eye lip" is related to the provision of special benefits, the presence or absence of notification may affect the player's profit (earnings) It is also conceivable. However, in the pachislot machine 1, in practice, special benefits are to be provided based on the lottery result of the flag conversion / lottery, and the combination of displayed symbols does not affect the benefits to be provided. That is, even if a combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed if a flag conversion lottery is won, a special benefit is given, and conversely, a flag conversion lottery is not won. In this case, even if it is possible to display a combination of "triple chiri lip" and "reach eye lip" symbols, no special benefit is given.

  In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed in this manner does not affect the player's profit (disbursed balls), the sub instruction monitor on the main side does not notify the sub Only on the side, notification on the display unit 100 is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 74C and 74D, during the RT5 gaming state (state between flags), notification is given to aim a combination of symbols according to a combination according to a bonus carried over as an internal winning combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), when carrying over the combination "F_BB1", "White 7 Navi" is performed, and as shown in FIG. 74 (D), the combination "F_BB2" is carried over If yes, perform "Blue 7 Navi". "White 7 Navi" informs the combination "F_BB1" of information on stop operation for displaying the combination of symbols of "C_BB1", and "Blue 7 Navi" refers to the combination "F_BB2" The information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols of "C_BB2" is notified.

  Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 48, in the inter-flag state, the combination related to the bonus and one of “off”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2” and “F_special 3” are determined as internal winning combinations When the combination of symbols of BB can be displayed, the combination of symbols of BB can not be displayed when the other combination is determined as the internal winning combination with the combination of the bonus. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 74 (C) and (D), when the control is performed on the main side, the main control board 71 performs the role associated with the bonus carried over and “off” “F_ special role 1” “F_ special role 2) "White 7 Navi" or "Blue 7 Navi" is performed only when either "F_special role 3" is determined as an internal winning combination. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing at which the part associated with the bonus can be won.

  The main control board 71 may perform "White 7 Navi" or "Blue 7 Navi" only after notifying (bonus notification) that the part associated with the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. Here, the bonus notification is performed, for example, by displaying a bonus confirmation screen or turning on a bonus confirmation lamp.

  As an example, when a combination relating to a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination, an effect (so-called continuous effect) to be performed over a number of games is performed, and a bonus confirmation screen may be displayed according to the result of the continuous effect. It is commonly done. If "White 7 Navi" or the like is performed on the main side during this continuous rendering, the result of the continuous rendering may be found along the way, which may impair interest. Therefore, the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 performs "White 7 Navi" or "Blue 7 Navi" only after the bonus notification is made. In addition, the method of enabling the main side to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification has been made is arbitrary.

  As one method, when the role associated with the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 determines the number of games required to announce the bonus, and after this number of games has been consumed, “White 7 Navi” or “Blue 7 It is possible to think of a way to do "Navi". More specifically, when determining the number of games required to announce a bonus, the main control board 71 notifies the number of games to the sub control board 72. The sub control board 72 controls the effect according to the number of games, and displays the bonus confirmation screen at the timing when the number of games is digested, so that the timing at which the bonus notification is performed can be grasped on the main side. That is, the main control board 71 counts the number of unit games after determining the winning combination as the internal winning combination in a state where the bonus combination is not carried over, and after the counting result reaches a predetermined number, "White 7 Navi" or "Blue 7 Navi" when the role pertaining to the bonus and either "Disapproval", "F_Special Role 1", "F_Special Role 2", or "F_Special Role 3" is determined as the internal winning combination. I do.

  As another method, a method may be considered in which the bonus notification is controlled not on the sub side but on the main side. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines that the combination of the bonus is an internal winning combination without carrying over the combination of the bonus, an effect (at least the number of games required for the effect) to be executed by the display unit 100 is It decides and notifies the sub control board 72. By executing the effect notified by the sub control board 72 and displaying the bonus determination screen, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification has been made on the main side.

  Of course, it is also possible to make it possible for the main side to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification has been made by another method. In this case, since the main control board 71 can not receive the signal from the sub control board 72 or the like, it is necessary to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is performed based on the signal that can be received by the main control board 71. . For example, since the main control board 71 can receive a signal accompanying the stop operation, a predetermined stop operation (for example, other than forward pressing) is performed in a state where the combination relating to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. In some cases, it may be possible to make a bonus announcement. Specifically, the sub control board 72 acquires the information on the internal winning combination and the information on the stop operation from the main control board 71, and the combination of the information is a predetermined combination (the internal winning combination "the role on the bonus") , A bonus operation is performed when the stop operation is "other than forward pressing"). Since such a bonus notification can be grasped also by the main control board 71, the timing at which the bonus notification is performed can be grasped on the main side.

[Description of operation of main control board]
Next, the contents of various processing executed by the main CPU 31 of the main control board 71 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Main operation process of pachislot by control of main CPU>
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after power on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed by the control of the main CPU 31 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 75 (hereinafter referred to as main flow).

  First, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is powered on, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process at the time of power on (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been normally performed or whether the setting has been properly changed, and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 33 is cleared. Here, the designated storage area is, for example, a storage area in which it is necessary to erase data for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storing area and a display combination storing area.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 42S and the start switch 6S is checked.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs internal lottery processing (S4). In this process, the main CPU 31 refers to an internal lottery table (FIGS. 39 and 40) corresponding to the current gaming state, and lottery a combination to be determined as an internal winning combination from among a plurality of combinations. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combination "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" have been determined as the internal winning combination in the internal lottery process of S4 (S5). If the combination “F_BB1” “F_BB2” is determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently turns on the RT5 gaming state flag and sets the gaming state to the flag inter-game state (S6).

  Subsequent to the process of S6, or when it is determined that the combination "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" are not determined as the internal winning combination in S5 (NO), the main CPU 31 continues the process described in FIG. A game control process is performed (S7).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs main navigation control processing (S8). In this process, the main CPU 31 sets navigation data according to the current gaming state and the internal winning combination based on the correspondence shown in FIG. The set navigation data is stored in the start command and notified to the sub control board 72. In addition, notification according to the set navigation data is performed at an arbitrary timing.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop initial setting process described later with reference to FIG. 86 (S9). In this process, reel stop control information to be used for stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current game state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 33, and is used in the reel stop control processing of S12.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs start command transmission processing (S10). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates data of the start command and transmits it to the sub control board 72. The start command data includes various types of information necessary for producing effects such as an internal winning combination.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs reel rotation start processing after performing weight processing (S11). In this process, the main CPU 31 requests the start of rotation of all the reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all the reels is requested, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed by an interrupt process executed at a constant period (1.1172 msec), and thereafter, It is controlled to maintain a constant speed.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop control process described later with reference to FIG. 87 (S12). In this process, using the reel stop control information determined in S9, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 7L, the middle stop button 7C and the right stop button 7R are pressed. Ru.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S13). In this award-winning medal payout process, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, and based on the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line, according to the combination of the symbols such as payout of medals and operation of replay Grant benefits. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning operation command transmission process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates data of a winning operation command and transmits the data to the sub control board 72. The prize operation command data includes various types of information such as combinations of symbols displayed along the effective line.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a BB check process described later with reference to FIG. 88 (S15). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls the activation and termination of the bonus state. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an RT check process described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90 (S16). In this process, the main CPU 31 performs control to shift the RT gaming state based on the combination of the displayed symbols.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 executes a CZ · ART end processing described later with reference to FIG. 91 (S17). In this process, the main CPU 31 performs CZ pullback lottery. When the CZ · ART end processing is performed, the main CPU 31 returns the processing to S2 on the assumption that one game (unit game) is ended.

<State-based control processing>
Next, state-based control processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the state-specific control processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether the current gaming state is in the RT4 gaming state (S31). If it is the RT4 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs flag conversion processing described later with reference to FIG. 77 (S32).

  Following the processing of S32, or when it is determined that the RT4 gaming state is not in progress in S31 (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state (S33) ). If it is in the normal gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs normal middle start processing described later with reference to FIG. 78 (S34), and ends the state-specific control processing.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether the current gaming state is CZ (S35). If CZ is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs CZ in-start processing which will be described later with reference to FIG. 79 (S36), and ends the state-dependent control processing.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not CZ (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether the current gaming state is in the normal ART (S37). If the normal ART is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs start processing during normal ART described later with reference to FIG. 83 (S38), and ends the state-specific control processing.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal ART (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether the current gaming state is CT (S39). If CT is being performed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs start processing during CT which will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 (S40), and ends the state-specific control processing.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not CT (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether the current gaming state is in the bonus state (S41). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a start processing during BB which will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 (S42), and ends the state-specific control processing.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the bonus state (NO), the main CPU 31 performs other processing (S43), and ends the state-specific control processing. For example, when the ART CPU is in preparation, the main CPU 31 performs a process according to the preparation.

<Flag conversion process>
Next, flag conversion processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the flag conversion process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is CT start time (S50). If it is at the start of CT (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the flag during CT conversion table lottery table (FIG. 64), and extracts the table number used for flag conversion lottery during CT, and sets it. (S51).

  Subsequent to the process of S51, or when it is not at the start of CT in S50 (NO), the main CPU31 sets a flag conversion / lottery table according to the current state (S52). For example, if the current state is a non-ART RT4 gaming state, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 73) is set, and if the current state is a normal ART RT4 gaming state The ART-in-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 58) is set. If the current state is the RT4 gaming state in CT, the CT-in-CT flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 65) is set.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 conducts flag conversion lottery based on the internal winning combination (S53), and subsequently determines whether or not a winning is made (S54). If the flag conversion lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs flag conversion processing (S55). In this process, for example, when the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is processed so as to be treated as the combination "triple series lip".

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether the current gaming state is in non-ART (S56). That is, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the transition to the RT4 gaming state has been performed accidentally in response to the player's stop operation in the state where the notification of the normal gaming state (non-ART) is not performed. judge. If the current gaming state is non-ART (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of sets of ART (S57), and then sets ART preparation in progress for the next game (S58), flag End the conversion process. On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not in non-ART (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the flag conversion process.

  If the flag conversion lottery has not been won in S54 (NO), the main CPU 31 performs flag maintenance processing (S59), and ends the flag conversion processing. In this flag maintenance process, for example, when the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is processed so as to treat the combination "F_1 certainty lip" as the combination "replay".

<Normal middle start process>
Next, normal middle start processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal middle start process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52A and performs CZ lottery based on the current CZ lottery state and the internal winning combination (S61).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ lottery has been won (S62). If the CZ lottery has won (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the CZ of the type winning the next game (S63), and then sets the value corresponding to the CZ of the winning type to the CZ game number counter To do (S64). The CZ game number counter is a counter that counts the continuation period of CZ, and when CZ1 is won, the first game number (for example, 12) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half), If CZ2 is won, the second game number (for example, 15) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half), and if CZ3 is won, the CZ game number counter is the fourth game number Set (for example, 17).

  Subsequent to the process of S64, or when the CZ lottery is not won in S62 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the normal middle / high probability lottery table of FIG. The transition of the lottery state of CZ is performed based on the combination (S65), the lottery state of CZ is updated based on the result of the transition lottery (S66), and the normal middle start process is ended.

<Process at CZ during start>
Next, referring to FIG. 79, the CZ middle start process will be described. In the start processing during CZ, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is CZ1 (S71). If CZ1 is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs CZ1 (CZ2) in-progress processing described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 (S72), and ends the CZ-in-start processing.

  On the other hand, if CZ1 is not in progress (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether the current gaming state is in CZ2 (S73). If CZ2 is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs CZ1 (CZ2) in-progress processing described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 (S74), and ends the CZ-in-start processing. In the present embodiment, CZ1 and CZ2 are different only in rank (mode or point) different in the expectation for winning ART lottery, and the basic processing is the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the process in CZ1 and CZ2 will be described as one process in CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, if CZ2 is not in progress (NO), the main CPU31 subsequently performs in-CZ3 processing described later with reference to FIG. 82 (S75), and ends the CZ-in-start processing.

<Process during CZ1 (CZ2)>
Next, the process in CZ1 (CZ2) will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. In the CZ1 (CZ2) middle process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first half of CZ1 or CZ2 (S81). If the main CPU 31 is in the first half (YES), the process proceeds to S82, and if it is not the first half (in the second half) (NO), the process proceeds to S91 of FIG.

  If it is in the first half of CZ1, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ1 middle-mode up lottery table (FIG. 53) and performs mode-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Similarly, in the first half of CZ2, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ2 middle point lottery table (FIG. 54) and performs point-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Subsequently, the main CPU31 updates the mode (or point) based on the lottery result of S82 (S83).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not freezing has been won in the lottery in S82 (S84). If the freeze has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 performs freeze processing to temporarily stop the progress of the game, and adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S85). In this process, the main CPU 31 further determines and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59A). When a freeze occurs, “ART level 2” is determined as the ART level. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ and sets ART preparation in progress to the next game (S86), and ends the CZ1 (CZ2) in-process processing.

  On the other hand, when the freeze is not won in S84 (NO), the main CPU 31 subtracts one from the CZ game number counter (first half) (S87). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 or not (S88). If the CZ game number counter (first half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

  On the other hand, if the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the second half of CZ1 or CZ2 as the next game (S89), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2) Do.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 81, in the case of the second half of CZ1 or CZ2, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first game of the second half (S91). If it is the first game of the second half, ART lottery is performed based on the mode or point of the first half with reference to the CZ ART lottery table (FIGS. 55A and 55B) (S92). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S93).

  If the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets, and extracts the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). , Set (S94). Subsequent to the process of S94, or when the ART lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value in the CZ game number counter (second half) (S95). For example, the main CPU 31 sets “4” in the CZ game number counter (second half) when winning ART lottery, and “3” in the CZ game number counter (second half) when not winning ART lottery. Set ".

  Subsequent to the process of S95, or when it is not one game of the second half in S91 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the ART lottery table in CZ (FIG. 55C), and makes an internal winning combination. Based on the ART lottery is carried out (S96), it is determined whether the ART lottery has been won (S97). If the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of sets of ART and, with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59A), extracts the ART level. And set (S98).

  Subsequent to the process of S98, or when the ART lottery has not been won in S97 (NO), the main CPU 31 subtracts one from the CZ game number counter (second half) (S99). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 or not (S100). If the CZ game number counter (second half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing in CZ1 (CZ2).

  On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether the ART set number is 1 or more (S101). If the number of ART sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends CZ and sets ART preparation in progress to the next game (S102), and ends processing during CZ1 (CZ2) . On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the CZ failure time (S103), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

<Process in CZ3>
Next, the CZ3 in-process will be described with reference to FIG. In CZ3 middle processing, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the ART lottery table in CZ (FIG. 56 (D)) and performs ART lottery based on the internal winning combination (S121). It is determined whether or not it is (S122).

  If the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S123). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a freeze has been won in the ART lottery of S121 (S124). If the freeze is won (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process to temporarily stop the progress of the game (S125).

  Subsequent to the process of S125, or when the freeze is not satisfied in S124 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently extracts ART levels with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59A). And set (S126). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in progress to the next game (S127), and ends the CZ3 middle processing.

  On the other hand, if ART lottery has not been won in S122 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (S128). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether the CZ game number counter is 0 (S129). If the CZ game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the middle processing of CZ3.

  On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the ART set number and extracts and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59A). (S130). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in progress to the next game (S131), and ends the CZ3 middle processing.

<Process during start during normal ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, processing during start during normal ART will be described. In the start processing during normal ART, first, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the ART continuing game number counter (S141). The ART continuation game number counter is a counter that counts the number of games in which the ART has normally continued. In the present embodiment, in addition to the ART continuation game number counter, an ART end game number counter is provided which counts the number of games that can normally be ART. Then, the Pachislot machine 1 compares the value of the ART continuation game number counter with the value of the ART end game number counter, and when the value of the ART continuation game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter, the ART gaming state is displayed. finish.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 61) to perform CT lottery based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S142). Whether the CT lottery has won or not Is determined (S143). If the CT lottery has won (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the CT set number and sets 8 to the CT game number counter (S 144), and subsequently, the type of win for the next game The CT is set (S145).

  Subsequent to the process of S145, or when the CT lottery is not won in S143 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (B)), and the ART continued game number counter The ART level is randomly selected and set based on the value of (S146). Subsequently, main CPU 31 refers to the normal ART medium-to-high probability lottery table (FIG. 60) to lottery and set the CT lottery state of the transition destination based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S147) .

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal ART extra-lot lottery table (FIG. 62), performs extra lottery on the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S148), and determines whether or not the extra lottery is won. It determines (S149). If the additional lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S150).

  Subsequent to the process of S150, or when the winning lottery is not won in S149 (NO), the main CPU 31 continues, the value of the ART continuing game number counter reaches the value of the ART ending game number counter It is determined whether or not it has been made (S151). If the value of the ART continuing game number counter has not reached the value of the ART ending game number counter (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the start processing during the normal ART.

  On the other hand, when the value of the ART continuation game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter (YES), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the ART set number (S152), and then, the ART end time It sets (S153) and ends the processing at the start of the normal ART.

<Process during start during CT>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the CT start process will be described. In the start processing during CT, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the CT added lottery table (FIG. 66) and performs added lottery on the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S161). It is determined whether or not a winning is made (S162).

  If the additional lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S163). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the additional amount per time increases as the number of times of winning the combination “triple chili lip” during the same CT increases.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the combination “three consecutive chillirip” (that is, whether or not the combination is converted to the combination “three consecutive chillirip” in the flag conversion processing of FIG. 77) (S164). ). If the internal winning combination is the combination “three consecutive chills” (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently resets 8 to the CT game number counter (S165), and ends the CT start process. Further, if the internal winning combination is not the combination “three consecutive chills” (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the process during start during CT.

  In S162, if the additional lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the CT number-in-set number extra lottery table (FIG. 67) to determine the number of CT sets based on the internal winning combination. The additional lottery is performed (S166), and it is determined whether or not the CT set number additional lottery has been won (S167). If the CT set number addition winning lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the CT set number (S168), and ends the CT start process.

  On the other hand, when the CT set number addition is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT game number counter (S169), and subsequently, as a result of the subtraction, the CT game number counter Is determined to be 0 (S170). If the CT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CT start process.

  If the CT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT set number (S171). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether the number of CT sets is one or more (S172). If the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S173), and ends the CT start process. On the other hand, when the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CT, sets the normal ART for the next game (S174), and ends the CT start process.

<Start process during BB>
Next, the BB start process will be described with reference to FIG. In the start processing during BB, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the ART game number addition bonus drawing lottery table (FIG. 70) and performs an ART lottery number addition lottery based on the internal winning combination (S181). It is determined whether or not the winning lottery has been won (S 182). If the additional lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB start process.

  On the other hand, if the additional lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S183). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether the number of ART sets is 0 (S184). When the number of ART sets is not 0, the main CPU 31 ends the BB start process. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S185), and ends the BB start process.

<Reel stop initialization process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the reel stop initial setting process will be described. In the reel stop initialization process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to a rotation stop initialization table (not shown) and acquires a rotation stop number based on an internal winning combination (S191). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the rotation stop initial setting table, and acquires each information based on the rotation stop number (S192). In this process, the main CPU 31 acquires, for example, various types of information associated with the number for stopping the rotation, such as determination data by pressing order.

  Then, the main CPU 31 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area (not shown) (S193). That is, the main CPU 31 sets the bits of all symbol code storage areas (except the unused area) to "1". Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (S194), and ends the reel stop initial setting process. The stop button non-operation counter is for determining the number of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R for which the player has not performed a stop operation, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 33.

<Reel stop control processing>
Subsequently, the reel stop control process will be described with reference to FIG. In the reel stop control process, the main CPU 31 first determines whether a valid stop button has been pressed (S201). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is output from the stop switch 7S. When the main CPU 31 determines that the effective stop button is not pressed (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S201.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 31 determines that the valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the pressing order storage area (not shown) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. Not shown) and updated (S202). That is, the main CPU 31 updates the operation stop button storage area, thereby managing the type of the stop button pressed, and updating the pressing order storage area based on the type of the stop button pressed and the order thereof. And manage the order (stopping order) of the stop operation.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S203), determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S204), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 33 based on the symbol counter ( S205). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 7S.

  Next, the main CPU 31 executes sliding symbol number determination processing (S206). The number of sliding symbols determination processing determines the number of sliding symbols specified at the stop start position based on reel stop control information (stop table group) selected based on the internal winning combination from the winding stop initial setting table. It is a process.

  Next, the main CPU 31 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 33. The generation process is executed (S167). The reel stop command data indicates the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 31 determines a planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number-of-sliding-pieces determination data, and stores it in the main RAM 33 (S208). The planned stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any one of predetermined numerical values “0” to “4” defined as the number of sliding symbols to the stop start position, and the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. It is.

  Next, the main CPU 31 sets a planned stop position as a search symbol position (S209). Next, the main CPU 31 executes symbol code storage processing (S210). In this symbol code storage process, the symbol code of the check symbol position data for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 31 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired by the symbol code storage processing (S211). Next, the main CPU 31 performs control change processing (S212). In this control change process, the stop information group used to stop the reel is updated when it is at the specific stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether the pressed stop button has been released (S213). This process is a process of determining whether or not the signal is not output from the stop switch 7S.

  When the main CPU 31 determines that the pressed stop button is not released (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S213. On the other hand, when the main CPU 31 determines that the pressed stop button has been released (YES), the main CPU 31 transmits a reel stop command (S214).

  Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S215). Here, if it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 executes a drawing priority storing process (S216), and executes the process of step S201. In this pull-in priority storing process, the pull-in priority of all the symbols on the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the reel stop control processing.

<BB check process>
Subsequently, BB check processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the BB check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the bonus state is in progress (S221). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 then, from the BB middle payout number counter that counts the number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state, the payout determination medal payout process (S13 in FIG. 75). The number of paid-out medals paid out is subtracted from (S222).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether the BB middle payout counter has become less than 0 (S223). If the in-BB payout counter is not less than 0 (NO), the BB check process is ended, while if the in-BB payout counter is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently continues. A bonus end process is performed (S224). In this processing, the main CPU 31 clears various information in the bonus state, and sets the RT1 gaming state flag on.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CT termination table at the bonus end (FIG. 71), performs CT lottery at the bonus end (S225), and determines whether or not the CT lottery has been won (S226). If the CT lottery has been won, the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S227). If CT lottery is performed when the number of ART sets is 0, one is added to the number of CT sets and one is also added to the number of ART sets in S227.

  Subsequent to the processing of S227, or when the CT lottery is not won in S226 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more ( S228). If the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets ART preparation in progress to the next game (S 229), and performs BB check processing. finish.

  On the other hand, if neither the ART set number nor the CT set number is 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets the normal gaming state to the next game (S230). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal middle / high probability lottery table (FIG. 51 (B)), extracts the lottery state of CZ and sets it (S231), and ends the BB check process.

  When the bonus state is not in progress in S221 (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combination of symbols of BB (C_BB1, 2) is displayed (S232). If the symbol combination of BB is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB check process.

  On the other hand, when the combination of symbols of BB is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the bonus type lottery table (FIG. 69), and selects and sets the bonus type (S233). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value (for example, 216) in the BB middle payout counter (S234), performs bonus start processing (S235), and ends the BB check processing. In the bonus start process, the main CPU 31 starts the operation of the bonus and performs various processes such as setting the bonus state to the next game.

<RT check processing>
Subsequently, RT check processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. In the RT check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the RT5 gaming state is in progress (S241). If the RT5 gaming state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check processing, whereas if the RT5 gaming state is not in progress (NO), the main CPU 31 continues the RT0 gaming state. It is determined whether or not (S242).

  When it is in the RT0 gaming state in S242 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (S243). If the “Bell eye” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, whereas if the “Bell eye” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 Subsequently, the RT2 gaming state flag is set to ON, and the RT0 gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state (S244), and the RT check processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the RT0 gaming state is not in progress in S242 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the RT1 gaming state is in progress (S245). If it is in the RT1 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (S246). If “Bell eye” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the RT2 gaming state flag on and turns the RT1 gaming state flag off, and shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state (S247), and the RT check process ends.

  On the other hand, if the "Bell eye" is not displayed in S246 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether 20 games of the RT1 gaming state have passed (S248). If 20 games have not passed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check processing, while if 20 games have passed (YES), the main CPU 31 turns off the RT1 gaming state flag, and RT1 The gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state (S249), and the RT check processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the RT1 gaming state is not in progress in S245 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the RT2 gaming state is in progress (S250). If it is in the RT2 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols of "RT3 transition lip" is displayed (S251). If the “RT3 transition reply” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, whereas if the “RT3 transition reply” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 determines Subsequently, the RT3 gaming state flag is set on and the RT2 gaming state flag is turned off to shift from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state (S252), and the RT check processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the RT2 gaming state is not in progress in S250 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the RT3 gaming state is in progress (S261). If it is in the RT3 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (S262). When “Bell spilled eyes” or “RT2 transition lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 gaming state flag on and turns off the RT3 gaming state flag, and the RT2 gaming state is started from the RT3 gaming state. The state is shifted to (S263), and the RT check process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the case where "Bell spilled eyes" and "RT2 transition lip" are not displayed in S262, the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of symbols of "RT4 transition lip" is displayed. (S264). If the “RT4 transition reply” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, whereas if the “RT4 transition reply” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 determines Subsequently, the RT4 gaming state flag is set on and the RT3 gaming state flag is turned off to shift from the RT3 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state (S265).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether ART preparation in progress is set (S266). If ART preparation in progress is not set (NO), the main CPU 31 ends RT check processing, while if ART preparation in progress is set (YES), the main CPU 31 determines the number of CT sets. Is determined whether or not 1 or more (S267).

  If the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 sets a CT to the next game, sets 8 to the CT game number counter (S268), and ends the RT check process. On the other hand, if the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 sets the normal ART for the next game, sets the ART end game number counter to a predetermined value (S269), and ends the RT check process. Do.

  On the other hand, if the RT3 gaming state is not in progress in S261 (NO), since the RT4 gaming state is in progress, the main CPU 31 subsequently displays a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip". It is determined whether or not it is (S270). If neither "Bell spilled eyes" nor "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while "Bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed. If it is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 gaming state flag on and turns off the RT4 gaming state flag to shift from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state (S271), and performs RT check processing finish.

<CZ · ART end processing>
Subsequently, CZ · ART end processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the CZ · ART end processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether the CZ failure time or the ART end time is reached (S281). If neither CZ failure nor ART termination is performed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CZ · ART termination processing, while if CZ failure or ART termination (YES), Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table (FIG. 52B), performs CZ pull-back lottery (S282), and determines whether or not the pull-back lottery has been won (S283).

  When the player has won the draw-back lottery (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the CZ of the type winning the next game (S284), and sets the value corresponding to the type of CZ won to the CZ game number counter (S285), and the CZ · ART end processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the return lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the normal gaming state to the next game (S 286). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal middle / high probability lottery table (FIG. 51B) to lottery the CZ lottery state and set it (S287), and ends the CZ · ART end processing.

[Description of operation of sub control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94, contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control board 72 using a program will be described.

<Sub side navigation control processing>
First, the sub navigation control process will be described with reference to FIG. In the sub navigation control process, the sub CPU 81 first determines whether navigation data has been acquired (S301). The sub CPU 81 acquires navigation data determined by the main control board 71 from the start command data received from the main control board 71. In the process of S301, the sub CPU 81 determines whether navigation data is included in the received start command data.

  If the navigation data is acquired (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the sub navigation data according to the navigation data (S302). Referring to FIG. 74, when the sub CPU 81 acquires navigation data “4”, for example, the sub CPU 81 sets navigation data for notifying the pushing order “left, middle, right” as the sub navigation data. Do. Thus, the contents of the stop operation can be notified on both the main side and the sub side.

  On the other hand, if the navigation data is not acquired (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not navigation (notification of stop operation) is necessary (S303). In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 needs navigation, for example, when the flag conversion lottery is performed on the main control board 71 or when a predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination on the main control board 71. It is determined that The result of the flag conversion lottery and the type of internal winning combination are included in the start command data, and the sub CPU 81 can determine whether or not navigation is necessary from various information included in the start command data. .

  If it is determined that the navigation is not necessary (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the sub navigation control process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the navigation is necessary (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the sub navigation data according to the various lottery results (S304), and ends the sub navigation control process. For example, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the combination “F_certain lip” is determined as the internal winning combination and wins the flag conversion / lottery, navigation data for displaying a combination of symbols of “triple triple lip”. (For example, navigation data to aim for the Chile pattern by forward press) is set, and the role "F_ Certain Chiri Lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, and the symbol of "Replay" is not won when the flag conversion lottery is not won. Set navigation data (for example, navigation data indicating a push order other than forward press) for displaying a combination. Thus, even when the main side does not notify the content of the stop operation, the sub side alone can notify the content of the stop operation.

<Player Registration Process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the player registration process will be described. In the player registration process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether a registration operation has been received (S311). For example, when a predetermined operation is received on the registration screen displayed when an operation on registration button 212b is received on menu screen 212 (see FIG. 29) of first sub-display device 201, sub CPU 81 determines that the registration operation has been received. Do.

  If the registration operation has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the player registration state (S312). As will be described later, in a situation where the player registration state is set, the sub CPU 81 can display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201. Control the display screen of 201.

  On the other hand, if the registration operation has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the registration deletion operation has been received (S313). For example, when a specific operation is received on the registration screen of the first sub-display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that the registration deletion operation has been received. If the registration deletion operation has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the player registration process.

  On the other hand, when the registration deletion operation is received (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently clears the player registration state. As will be described later, in a situation where the player registration state is cleared, the sub CPU 81 can not display the gaming information screens 213, 214, 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201 and displays the first sub The display screen of the device 201 is controlled.

<History management process>
Next, history management processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the history management process, first, the sub CPU 81 obtains game results from various command data received from the main control board 71 (S 321). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the game history (S322), and ends the history management process. The sub CPU 81 can grasp, for example, the type of the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination from the start command data, and the combination of the symbols displayed from the winning operation command data (that is, determined as the internal winning combination) It is possible to grasp the winning combination of the part). Further, the sub CPU 81 can grasp, for example, the current gaming state and the transition state of the gaming state from start command data and the like. From these game results obtained from various command data, the sub CPU 81 variously, for example, the number of bonus times, number of ARTs, number of games (number of games), number of CZs, number of CZ successes, number of winnings and winning probability of each part Management of the game history.

[Switching of display screen of first sub display device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a method of switching the display screen of the first sub-display device 201 in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 (A) shows a transition example of the display screen of the first sub-display device 201 in the situation where the player registration state is not set, and FIG. 95 (B) shows the player registration state being set. It is an example of transition of the display screen of the 1st sub display 201 in a situation.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (A), in the situation where the player registration state is not set, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 81) displays the display screen to be displayed on the first sub display device 201 on the top screen 211, menu. It controls so that transition is possible only between various display screens which can be transitioned from the screen 212 and the menu screen 212. Specifically, the sub control substrate 72 receives the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212 based on a touch operation (for example, a tap operation on a predetermined button or a swipe operation on the display screen) acquired via the touch sensor 201a. Switch the display screen between. On the other hand, in a situation where the player registration state is not set, the secondary control board 72 controls the display of the game information screens 213, 214, 215 to be impossible. That is, in a situation where the player registration state is not set, the player can not display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 on the first sub display device 201.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), in the situation where the player registration state is set, the sub control board 72 displays the display screen to be displayed on the first sub display device 201 as the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212. And in addition to the various display screens which can be transited from the menu screen 212, it controls so that transition is possible between the game information screens 213, 214, 215. That is, based on the touch operation acquired via the touch sensor 201a, the sub control board 72 controls not only the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212 but also the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 to be displayed. Thus, in the situation where the player registration state is set, the player can display the game information screens 213, 214 and 215 on the first sub display device 201.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (B), the transition order of the display screen among the top screen 211, the menu screen 212 and the game information screens 213, 214 and 215 is arbitrary. For example, transition from the top screen 211 to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 may be possible directly, or transition from the top screen 211 to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 may be possible only via the menu screen 212. Good.

  In this respect, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the top screen 211 can not directly transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, and the game information screens 213, 214, 215 can be made only through the menu screen 212. It is possible to transition to More specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing a swipe operation on the menu screen 212, transition to the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 is enabled.

  Here, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 are not display screens provided with buttons corresponding to the menu screen 212, but are display screens provided completely independently from the menu screen 212. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information indicating the result of the game that the player has a strong interest during the game, ie, the game history, is related information from the related information that is not related to the result of the game such as payout array or volume control. Display independently. Then, in the pachislot machine 1, in the situation where the player registration state is set, transition to the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 is enabled without requiring a menu selection operation on the menu screen 212. As a result, in the pachislot machine 1, it is possible to facilitate access to information (game history) that the player wishes to confirm in a situation where the player registration state is set.

  On the other hand, the game information screen 213, 214, 215 can not be transitioned by the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212, and transition to the game information screen 213, 214, 215 can not be made unless a swipe operation not in the menu display is performed. Since the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment is used, the operation for transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 can be treated as a hidden command in the situation where the player registration state is set. From the player's point of view, the player's own knowledge of the pachislot machine 1 allows him to see more detailed game history which can not be seen by other players with little knowledge. As a result, it can be expected to play a game positively.

(Display of top screen from game information screen)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 are transitioned to the top screen 211 manually or automatically by the player. Specifically, when the back button on the game information screens 213, 214, 215 is operated, the display screen is changed from the game information screens 213, 214, 215 to the top screen 211 (manual transition). If predetermined conditions are satisfied in a state where the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed, the top screen 211 is automatically transitioned (automatic transition) regardless of the operation of the player.

  More specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, with the gaming information screens 213, 214, 215 being displayed, the closing operation (the operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the one bet button, and the medal in the medal insertion slot 22) When the input operation is performed, the screen is automatically transitioned to the top screen 211. In addition, in the state (high rep state) where the probability that the part concerning the replay which performs the operation of replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high like the ART gaming state (high rep state), the medal is automatically done by the actuation of the replay As a result, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 may be displayed only occasionally in a high-rip state. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, when the medal is automatically inserted by the operation of the re-game, if the start operation is performed instead of the insertion of the medal, the top screen is automatically displayed from the game information screen 213, 214, 215 It changes to 211.

  That is, in the pachislot machine 1, when the replay operation is performed, when the start operation is performed, the game information screen 213, 214, 215 automatically changes from the game information screen 213 to the top screen 211, and the replay operation is activated. Is not performed, and when the insertion operation is performed, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 automatically transition from the game information screen 213 to the top screen 211.

(Display of top screen (or menu screen) from display screen according to menu)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the player can view the various display screens (registration screen, explanation screen, array payout screen, reach eye screen, web introduction screen, and volume adjustment screen) that can be transited by menu selection operation on the menu screen 212. The screen is transitioned to the top screen 211 (or menu screen 212) manually or automatically. Specifically, when a predetermined button (for example, top button) is operated on various display screens, the display screen is changed from the various display screens to the top screen 211, and a specific button (for example, for example) is displayed on the various display screens. When the back button is operated, the display screen is transitioned from the various display screens to the menu screen 212 (manual transition). In addition, when a predetermined time passes in a state where various display screens are displayed, the screen is automatically transitioned to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) regardless of the operation of the player.

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the time for transition to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is made different depending on the type of display screen currently displayed. For example, if the volume adjustment screen for adjusting the volume output from the pachislot machine 1 is displayed for a long time, there is a possibility that the volume may be adjusted to an unintended volume by mistake, and the other player may be offended by mistake. Since there is a possibility that the display screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) will be displayed in a shorter time than other display screens. On the other hand, the registration screen transitions to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) in a longer time than other display screens in order to facilitate registration of the player.

  That is, the time to transition to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is set in various display screens, the time shorter than the other display screens is set in the volume adjustment screen, and In the registration screen, a time longer than other display screens is set.

(Selection function of menu operation availability)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, the player transitions from the menu screen 212 to a registration screen, an explanation screen, an array payout screen, a reach eye screen, a WEB introduction screen, and a volume adjustment screen, thereby various types of display screens. It is possible to perform an operation and check various information. Here, the functions that can be selected by the player may be restricted according to the settings on the game arcade side.

  For example, by restricting the gaming machine from being able to transition from the menu screen 212 to the volume adjustment screen (for example, not displaying the volume button 212 g on the menu screen 212), the player can make the volume adjustment impossible. .

Modified Example of First Embodiment
Heretofore, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment has been described. Subsequently, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described.

<CT precursor game and notice lottery in normal ART>
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, when winning an advantageous state (for example, CT), it is decided to immediately shift from the next game to the advantageous state. In a pachislot machine, when performing advantageous control on a player, the advantageous control may be performed after a predetermined number of games have been played, instead of immediately performing the advantageous control. The predetermined number of games are called so-called precursor games or the like. In this modification, for example, when a CT lottery is won during a normal ART, a pachislot machine 1 is described in which a predetermined number of precursor games are held instead of performing CT immediately.

  As shown in FIG. 96A, during normal ART, CT lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination using the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 61). Since winning to this CT lottery results in transition to a state advantageous to the player (CT (additional chance zone)), various lottery operations for CT lottery are performed on the main side (main control board 71) until CT is won. . Specifically, the main control board 71 performs internal lottery to determine the internal winning combination, and also plays the role of internal winning combination "F_accurate lip", "F_1 confirmative lip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip" When one of D "is determined, flag conversion lottery is performed using the flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 58) during ART.

  On the other hand, in the Pachislot machine 1 of the present modification, the CT precursor after winning the CT lottery is a CT based on the role after the flag conversion lottery (ie, the “three consecutive chiri lip” and the “reach eye lip”). It is assumed that the lottery such as the lottery is not performed. Then, during this CT precursor, flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side (sub control board 72), and the notification content performed on the sub side is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on this sub side. For example, when winning the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side, the information for displaying the combination of symbols of "reach eye lip" is displayed on the display unit 100, and the flag conversion lottery is not won. , Information for displaying the combination of symbols of "Replay" is displayed on the display unit 100.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine of recent years, it is required that the main side perform lottery that affects the player's profit (disbursed balls). However, in the pachislot machine 1 of this modification, the lottery of flag conversion lottery A period (CT prodiction) in which the result has no influence on the player's profit is provided, and the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side only during this period. As a result, for example, in a situation where it is determined that the CT antecedent award is given, it is possible to increase the opportunity to display the special symbol combination "reach eye lip", and the variation of how to show the symbol combination increases. Therefore, the improvement of game characteristics can be expected.

  FIG. 96B shows a flag conversion lottery table in CT precursor used for flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 82. The flag conversion / lottery table in the CT precursor defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion / lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination. Referring to the flag conversion lottery table in the CT precursor, in the CT precursor, the functions “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” are converted to the role “reach eye lip” with a very high probability I understand. As a result, when the roles “F_reach eyes Lip A” to “F_reach eyes Lip D” are determined to be internal winning combinations during the CT prognostic, the symbol combination “reach eyes lip” is displayed with high probability. As a result, it can be suggested to the player that it is a omen. Although it is repeated, when winning the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side, although a notification for displaying a combination of symbols of "reach eye lip" is performed, a privilege is not given.

  Of course, the flag conversion lottery in the CT precursor may be performed on the main side, but by performing the lottery on the sub side in a period which does not affect the player's profit as in this modification, the main side Data capacity and processing load can be reduced, which is preferable.

<Another example of push order for triple chiririp display>
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, when the combination “F_positive chiry lip” and “F_1 positive chiry lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct combination in the pressing order displays the combination of “triple chili lip” symbols. If the press order is incorrect, the combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed (FIG. 47). In addition, it is assumed that the pressing order of the correct answer is "forward pressing" for the roles "F_ positive chiri lip" and "F 1 positive chiri lip".

  In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, the combinations of symbols displayed at the time of incorrect answer in the pressing order are increased while the combinations “F_certain rip” and “F_1 certain lip” are determined as internal winning combinations, , The correct pressing order is different for each of "F_certain lip" and "F_1 certain lip".

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, the combination “F_positive_lip” is the correct answer in the push order that is the correct answer. 3L), and the pressing order to be incorrect is “middle press (reel 3C in middle of first stop operation)” and “reverse press (first reel in right stop 3R)”. And, the combination "D_Curity Rip" is displayed when the combination of symbols of "triple Rip Rip" is displayed when it is pressed in the forward order, and the combination of the symbols of "Replay" is displayed when it is "pressed in the middle", When it is done, a combination of symbols of "double chiri lip" is displayed.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, in the combination "F_1 certainty lip", the pressing order to be the correct answer is "reverse pressing" and the pressing order to be the incorrect answer is "forward pressing" and "middle pressing" I assume. And, the combination "D3 continuous chill lip" is displayed when the reverse combination is pressed, the combination of symbols of "triple chill lip" is displayed, and when the "middle press" is displayed, the combination of symbols "replay" is displayed, and "forward pressed" is displayed. When it is done, a combination of symbols of "double chiri lip" is displayed.

  That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modification, when any one of the roles “F_certain lip” and “F_1 certain lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, “preceding” is the type of the medal winning Accordingly, "three consecutive chilli lip" or "two consecutive chilli lip" is displayed, and similarly, when "reverse press" is displayed, "three consecutive chilli lip" or "two consecutive chilli lip" is displayed according to the type of the winning combination. . On the other hand, when any one of the roles "F_ sure chillirip" and "F_1 check chillirip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the symbols of "replay" is made regardless of the type of winning combination when "middle press" is made. Is displayed.

  In this way, for example, when the combination "F_ Certain Chiri Lip" and "F_1 certain Chiri Lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, various navigation (notification) for aiming the chili symbol becomes possible. Specifically, it is possible to carry out both "Navi to aim at Chile symbol by forward press" and "Navi to aim at Chile symbol by reverse push". In addition, when the role "F_ Certain Chiri Lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, "Navi to aim for the Chile pattern by pressing in order" is a navigation for displaying "triple chiri lip", and "Back push" "Navi to aim at the Chile pattern" is a navigation (2 series chiri lip is displayed) to not display "triple chiri lip". On the other hand, when the role "F_1 Sure Chiri Lip" is determined to be the internal winning combination, "Navi to aim for the Chile pattern by pressing in order" is a navigation for not displaying "triple chiri lip", "reverse" "Navi to aim a chili pattern by pushing" is a navi for displaying "triple chiri lip" (two chiri lip is displayed).

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present modification, whether or not to perform these navigations is managed by flag conversion lottery performed on the main side, and navigation is performed under the control of the sub side based on the result of the flag conversion lottery on the main side. Is executed.

  FIG. 97 (B) is a view showing the relationship between the flag conversion lottery on the main side in the normal ART and the navigation on the sub side. During the normal ART, when the combination “F_positive_lip” and “F_1_positive_lip” are determined as internal winning combinations, the main control board 71 performs two-stage flag conversion / lottery (see FIG. 58). On the sub side, the result of the two-stage flag conversion lottery is acquired from the start command data, and the navigation to be performed by the display unit 100 is determined based on the result of the two-stage flag conversion lottery.

  Specifically, when the secondary control board 72 does not win at the time of the first stage of flag conversion lottery among the two stages of flag conversion lottery, the secondary control board 72 performs "Replay Navi". In this "replay navigation", the secondary control board 72 notifies the player to push in the middle. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), the combination of the symbols of "Replay" is displayed when the middle push is performed, regardless of the combination "F_ Certainly Lip" or "F_1 Surely Lip".

  In addition, when the first stage flag conversion lottery among the two stages of flag conversion lottery is won and the second stage flag conversion lottery is not won, the sub control board 72 performs “tili lip navigation”. In this "chiri lip around navigation", the sub-control board 72 reports that if the role "F_ definite chill lip" is an internal winning combination, it aims to aim a chili pattern by reverse pressing, and the role "F_1 definite chill lip" is inside If it is a winning combination, it is informed that the chili symbol should be aimed by pressing in order. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), the symbol combination of “double chiri lip” is displayed at the time of reverse pushing of the part “F_positive chiri lip” and at the time of forward pushing of the part “F_1 definite chiri lip”. It will be

  In addition, when the flag conversion lottery of both the first stage and the second stage among the two-stage flag conversion lottery is won, the sub control board 72 performs “tili lip uniform navigation”. In this "chiririp matching NAVI", the sub-control board 72 notifies that the chili symbol is aimed by pressing in the case where the "F_ sure chiririp" is an internal winning combination, and the "F_1 sure chiririp" is inside. If it is the winning combination, it is informed that the chili symbol is aimed by pushing back. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), the combination of symbols of “triple chiru lip” is displayed at the time of forward pushing of the part “F_positive chiri lip” and at the time of reverse pushing of the part “F_1 sure chili lip”. It will be

  As mentioned above, the notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery does not affect the profit (the flag conversion lottery itself affects the profit, but the combination of the symbols displayed as a result affects the profit) The notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery is not performed on the main side (instruction monitor) but only on the sub side (display unit 100). In this respect, as in the present modification, by performing not only “chiri lip uniform navigation” but also “chili lip around navigation”, navigation that does not affect profits can be performed in various ways on the sub side, Improve.

[Effect of pachislot machine]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachislot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Control of duration during CT)
In the pachislot machine 1, a CT is usually provided as an additional chance zone for extending the duration of the ART, and the number of ART games is increased based on the internal winning combination in this CT. The CT is performed by one set of eight games, but if the number of ART games can be added during the CT, the number of games is not subtracted but only if the number of added games can not be added . From the player's point of view, it is not possible to know how long the CT will last, and since the CT will not end as long as the addition is being performed, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the CT.

  At this time, the pachislot machine 1 resets one set of eight games, if the addition is performed in accordance with the role “three-piece chilli lip” during CT. Thereby, even if CT comes to an end immediately, CT is resumed from the beginning by performing addition according to a part "three consecutive chiri ripu", Therefore strong interest to a game during CT The game can be continued without being bored, and the interest of the game during CT can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the addition according to the combination “three consecutive chilli lip” is performed only when winning the flag conversion lottery when the combination “F_ firm chill lip” and “F_1 firm chill lip” are determined as internal winning combinations, the player It is possible to prevent giving an excessive profit to the player, and to balance the profits of the player and the game arcade. In the pachislot machine 1 described above, during CT, the flag conversion and lottery for the roles “F_positive_lip” and “F_1_positive_lip” must always be won (see FIG. 65), but the winning probability is only an example, It does not prevent the player and the game arcade from making appropriate adjustments according to the balance of the profits.

(The number of added games based on the role of "three consecutive chill lip" in CT)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1, when the number of times of addition based on the combination "three consecutive chills" is performed during CT exceeds a certain number of times, the number of games to be added per one time is increased. As described above, as long as the ART game number is added, CT does not end, and since the CT is re-set when winning the role "triple chiri lip", from the viewpoint of the player, CT As we continue, we can have the expectation of increasing the amount of extra charge per session, and the interest in CT will improve. In addition, since the number of times to increase the additional amount per game is a number (9 or more) more than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT, an excessive profit is given to the player. This can be prevented from being given, and the profits of the player and the game arcade can be balanced.

(Bonus notification performed on the main side)
Moreover, in the pachislot machine 1, the instruction monitor of the information display 14 uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols according to the combination relating to the bonus "10" (or "11"). By performing the display, a bonus notification is given on the main side. Here, in the pachislot machine, the priority of the symbols to be drawn in is usually determined, and when the role relating to the bonus and the other roles overlap and are determined as the internal winning combination, the role relating to the bonus according to the priority Sometimes it is possible to withdraw the combination of the design which responds to, it is not possible to be able to do it.

  In this respect, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the role relating to the bonus and one of “dismiss” “F_special role 1” “F_special role 2” “F_special role 3” is determined as the internal winning combination In the case, it is possible to draw in a combination of symbols according to the combination associated with the bonus, but when other combinations are determined as internal winning combinations, draw in the combination according to the combination associated with the bonus. I can not Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, the instruction is given only when the combination relating to the bonus and one of “discard”, “F_special role 1”, “F_special role 2” and “F_special role 3” are determined as internal winning combinations. Display "10" (or "11") on the monitor. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing at which the part associated with the bonus can be won.

  In addition, in Pachi-Slot machine 1, even if one of the role relating to the bonus and either “Disengagement” “F_special role 1” “F_special role 2” “F_special role 3” is determined as the internal winning combination, the bonus relating to the bonus The instruction monitor does not display "10" (or "11") on the instruction monitor until a predetermined number of games have passed since the winning combination was first won, and the instruction monitor is on condition that the predetermined number of games have passed. Display "10" (or "11").

  For example, although there may be an effect (so-called continuous effect) to be performed over a plurality of games triggered by winning a role relating to a bonus, “10” (or “ If it is displayed as 11 "), the meaning of the continuous production will be diminished, which may impair the interest. In this respect, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, display on the instruction monitor is not performed until the predetermined number of games elapse, and after the predetermined number of games elapse, display is performed on the instruction monitor. The bonus notification can be performed on the main side without loss.

(Notification on the main / sub side and notification on the sub side alone)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1, while providing a plurality of combinations in which combinations of symbols displayed in accordance with the mode (pushing order) of the stop operation are different (see FIG. 47), the symbols displayed in these plurality of types of combinations The present invention includes a combination of providing different benefits depending on the combination and a combination of providing the same benefits even if the combination of the displayed symbols is different.

  For example, the number of medals to be paid out differs between when the combination of symbols of "bell" is displayed and when the combination of symbols of "bell spilled" is displayed, and the combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed Since it is different whether the transition of RT gaming state is performed in addition to the operation of replaying in the case where the combination of the symbol of “RT2 transition lip” is displayed and the case being played, the combination “F_3 choice bell _1st” or The role “F_maintenance lip_1st” is a role that provides different benefits depending on the combination of the displayed symbols. On the other hand, in both the case where the symbol combination of "triple chillirip" is displayed and the case where the symbol combination of "replay" is displayed, only the replaying operation is performed in both cases, so the combination "F_ Even if the combination of the displayed symbols is different, it is a role to give the same privilege (in addition, the combination "F_positive lip" has different benefits depending on the result of the flag conversion lottery. The combination of symbols displayed does not affect the benefits given).

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as to the role of giving different benefits depending on the combination of the displayed symbols, the notification is given on both the main and sub sides, but the same is true even if the combination of the displayed symbols is different With regard to the role of giving the special benefit, the main instruction monitor does not notify, but only the sub-side display unit 100 notifies. In this way, the notification affecting the benefit can be appropriately performed by the instruction monitor on the main side that manages the benefit, and for the notification not affecting the benefit, the display unit 100 on the sub-side can perform navigation with diversity. .

(Information lottery on the sub side)
In addition, since the notification on the sub side at the time of winning the combination “F_ sure chiri lip” is performed based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the main side, the lottery on whether to perform notification (notice lottery) is performed on the main side Managed by That is, at the time of winning the combination “F_certain lip”, since the benefits to be given differ according to the result of the flag conversion lottery, the flag conversion lottery is a lottery that affects the benefits and is strictly managed on the main side.

  On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1, there is also a case where the notification as the effect is completely given without giving any influence to the benefit to be given, and in such a case, the notification lottery of itself whether or not to give notification On the sub side. For example, CT premonition is in a state where grant of the privilege of CT has already been decided, and it is possible to increase the opportunity to display a combination of special symbols of "reach eye lip" (conversely, in spite of not giving the privilege) If it has been displayed, it can not be displayed because it gives the player a sense of dissatisfaction.

  Therefore, in Pachislot machine 1, when winning the role "F_reach eyes Lip A to D" during CT prognostics, the sub side performs flag conversion lottery, and based on the lottery result, the symbol combination of "reach eyes lip" Give a notice to display. As a result, since variations of how to show the combination of the symbols are increased in a situation where it is decided to give the benefit of CT precursor, improvement of the game property can be expected. In addition, by performing notification lottery (flag conversion lottery) in a period in which the privilege is not affected at all, the data capacity and processing load on the main side can be reduced, which is preferable.

(How to display the game history)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a first sub display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100, and various information useful for the player is displayed on the first sub display device 201. For example, the pachislot machine 1 has a top screen 211 for displaying an outline gaming history on the first sub-display device 201, a menu screen 212 capable of various operations on the pachislot machine 1, and game information screens 213 and 214 for displaying detailed game histories. , 215 are displayed. Further, the pachislot machine 1 registers a player who plays a game and provides a unique service to the player. For example, when the registration of the player is not accepted, the registration of the player is accepted although the display of the gaming information screens 213, 214, 215 representing the detailed gaming history is not possible on the first sub display device 201 In this case, control is made to be able to display game information screens 213, 214 and 215 representing detailed game history on the first sub display device 201. Being able to confirm a more detailed game history leads to an improvement in the convenience of the player, the convenience of the pachislot machine 1 can be improved when the registration of the player is accepted.

  Here, the first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 for producing effects, and the sub control substrate 72 is connected to the first sub-display device 201 (and the like via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown)). The first sub-display device 201 can be controlled separately from the display unit 100 in order to control the second sub-display device 202) and control the display unit 100 via the character article relay board (not shown). . Specifically, the display of the first sub display device 201 can be switched even during the game (that is, the effect is being executed by the display unit 100). From the viewpoint of the player, by switching the display of the first sub-display device 201 during the game, various information can be obtained without disturbing the effect being executed by the display unit 100, which is preferable.

  In particular, as in the display unit 100 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, effects are displayed using planar image display by switching a plurality of screen mechanisms for causing an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. When performing an effect using an image display with a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect) and an effect using a curved image display, although the effect can be significantly enhanced, effects such as a game history can be obtained during the effect Is not suitable for displaying irrelevant information. In this respect, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, information not related to these effects is displayed on the first sub-display device 201 provided separately from the display unit 100, so that the effects of the effects are not impaired. In addition, various information such as a game history can be appropriately displayed.

  By the way, in general, in the case of a pachislot machine, an insertion slot for medals is provided on the right side as viewed from the player of the pedestal portion, and a bet button or start lever is provided on the left side as viewed from the player. In this case, the player operates the right or left side of the pedestal.

  In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the first sub-display device 201 is provided on the side (right or left) of the surface erected substantially vertically from the pedestal portion 10, and the first sub-display device 201 is A touch sensor 201a for switching the display of the sub display device 201 is provided. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, the first sub-display device 201 and the input device (touch sensor 201a) for controlling the display thereof are provided at the place where the player's hand is located during the game, and the operability of the player Improve. In particular, since the first sub-display device 201 with the touch sensor 201a is provided on the surface of the pedestal 10 standing from the horizontal surface, the player places his or her hand on the pedestal 10 and displays the first sub-display Since the apparatus 201 can be operated, which not only improves operability but also reduces fatigue associated with the operation, improvement in the operation rate can also be expected.

Second Embodiment
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted about the structure similar to the pachi-slot machine 1 of 1st Embodiment, and control.

[Game flow of the pachislot machine of the second embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 98, the gaming flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence or absence of notification of the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment. Comparing the transition flow of the gaming state of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 98 with the transition flow of the gaming state of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 33, the first embodiment and the second embodiment basically The game is played in the same flow, but in the ART game state, the game is played in a different flow. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the control of CT in the ART gaming state is largely different.

  Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, CT lottery is usually performed based on an internal winning combination during ART, and when this CT lottery is won, the gaming state is shifted to CT. On the other hand, the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment is different from the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment in that the interval between MB flags in the ART gaming state is CT. In addition, MB (role "F_MB") is a continuous operation device according to a so-called second type special role, and in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, MB is determined as an internal winning combination for the main control board 71. Then, the game is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the corresponding symbol combination (combination "C_MB") is displayed along the activated line.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, the interval between MB non-flags in the ART gaming state is normally ART, and CT is performed between MB flags in the ART gaming state. That is, in the second embodiment, when the MB is determined as the internal winning combination during (H) normal ART, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state between the MB flags. The game is played so that the combination of symbols related to MB is not displayed between MB flags in the ART gaming state, and the main control board 71 performs CT during this period. In addition, the method to play a game so that the combination of the symbol according to MB is not displayed in between MB flags is already well-known, for example, aims at the symbol in which the combination of symbols according to MB is not displayed. This can be realized by performing notification, or notification of pressing order without a combination of symbols according to MB being displayed.

  On the other hand, when the CT is finished, MB winning is prompted (notified), and (I) when a combination of symbols according to the MB is displayed, the gaming state shifts from the MB flag to the MB gaming state. Thereafter, when the termination condition of (J) MB gaming state is satisfied, the gaming state shifts from the MB gaming state to the MB non-flag, and normal ART is performed.

<Features of CT performed during MB flag>
Since the MB is carried over as an internal winning combination during the MB flag, it is possible to perform stop control different from that during the MB non-flag. For example, when the predetermined small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination between the MB flag and the MB non-flag, since the MB is carried over during the MB flag, the internal winning combination is “MB + predetermined small However, since the MB is not carried over between the MB non-flags, the internal winning combination is only "predetermined minor". In the pachislot machine, since the stop control is performed based on the internal winning combination, different stop control is performed between the MB flag and the MB non-flag even if the same predetermined small combination is determined as the internal winning combination. The stop control can be performed based on the information, and as a result, the combinations of symbols that can be displayed can be made different for a predetermined small combination between MB flags and MB non-flags.

  In the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is difficult to display (or display impossible) in the normal ART (during the MB non-flag) by making the stop control different between the MB flag and the MB non-flag. By displaying the combination of symbols during CT (between MB flags), various game characteristics are realized. Hereinafter, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be specifically described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

[Correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, the relationship between the internal winning combination and the combination of the displayed symbols in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. In addition, since the type of combination used and the type of combination of symbols differ in the pachi-slot machine 1 of 1st Embodiment, and the pachi-slot machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment, this point is demonstrated first.

(Type of role used in the second embodiment)
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the roles “F_chiri lip”, “F_positive chiri lip”, “F_1 positive chiri lip”, “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” are used. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the roles “R_single chill lip 1” to “F_3 continuous chill lip 4” are used instead of these roles.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the combination "F_3 selection bell _1 st" to "F_3 selection bell _3 rd" is used. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the roles "F_push order bell 1" to "F_push order bell 6" are used instead of these roles. In the following, the roles “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” may be simply referred to as “push order bell”. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the role (role “F_MB”) relating to the MB that the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment does not have is used. In addition, about another part, since it may be common in 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment and may differ, description is abbreviate | omitted.

(Type of combination of symbols used in the second embodiment)
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, a combination of symbols of "bell", "bell spilled eye" and "1st piece" is used as a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination "F_3 alternative bell_1st" to "F_3 alternative bell_3rd". I used it. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, in addition to the combination of these symbols, “MB” as a combination of symbols corresponding to the combinations “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” Use a combination of "Cactus" symbols. In addition, the combination of the symbol of "MB" may be arbitrary. The symbol combination of "cactus" may be the same as the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the number of medals paid out when displayed is the same as the symbol combination of "bell" (9 Sheet).

<Correspondence between winning combination and stop design among MB non-flags>
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a relation between an internal winning combination in MB non-flags and a combination of displayed symbols. As shown in FIG. 99, among the MB non-flags, the roles “F_single chill lip 1” to “F_3 continuous chill lip 4” are roles that the combination of the symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different, and the pressing order is “ In the case of "forward press", a combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed along the effective line. On the other hand, when the pushing order is other than "forward pushing", the combination of the symbols of "chiririp" is displayed along the effective line in the pushing order of the correct answer, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is in the pushing order of incorrect answer. Is displayed.

  More specifically, in the roles "F_single chill lip 1" to "F_ single chill lip 4", combinations of symbols of "simple chill lip" are displayed in the case of the pressing order of the correct answer for each role. In the case of the pressing order of the wrong answer for each role, a combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed. In addition, in the combination “F_2 series chili lip 1” to “F 2 series chiri lip 4”, in the case of the pressing order of the correct answer for each part, a combination of symbols of “two series chiri lip” is displayed, and for each combination In the case of pressing order of incorrect answers, a combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed. In addition, in the combination “F_3 series chilli lip 1” to “F_3 series chilli lip 4”, a combination of symbols of “triple chilli lip” is displayed in the pressing order of the correct answer for each combination, and for each combination In the case of pressing order of incorrect answers, a combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed.

  In addition, among the MB non-flags, the combinations “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” are combinations where the combination of symbols displayed according to the push order is different, and the correct answer is obtained for each combination. In the case of pushing order, a combination of symbols of "bell" is displayed, and in the case of pushing order of incorrect answer for each role, the combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "1st piece" is Is displayed.

<Correspondence between winning combination in MB flag and stop symbol>
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the relationship between the internal winning combination in the MB flags and the combination of symbols displayed. As shown in FIG. 100, in the middle of the MB flag, the symbol combinations of "chiri lip" are displayed along the effective line regardless of the pushing order for the combinations "F_single chiri lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chiri lip 4". That is, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the "chili lip" is always required when the combination "F_MB" and any one of the roles "F_single chiri lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chiri lip 4" are determined as the internal winning combination. The combination of symbols is displayed along the effective line.

  More specifically, in the roles "F_single chill lip 1" to "F_ single chill lip 4", a combination of symbols of "single chill lip" is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order, and the role "F_2 continuous chill lip 1" ~ In "F_2 Residuous Lip 4", the symbol combinations of "Dicense Residated Lip" are displayed along the active line regardless of the pushing order, and in "F_3 Reciprocated Teri Lip 1"-"F_3 Reed Chili Lip 4", the pressed order is concerned A combination of "triple chiri lip" symbols is displayed along the effective line.

  Comparing FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the roles “F_single chill lip 1” to “F_3 continuous chill lip 4” are displayed according to the pressing order during the MB non-flag during the non-MB flags. While the combination is different, there is no influence on the combination of symbols for which the pushing order is displayed during the MB flags.

  In addition, among the MB flags, the combinations “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” are combinations that the combinations of symbols displayed according to the push order are different, and are determined for each combination According to the pushing order, a combination of "BELL", "BELL LEFT OR 1ST CARD", "Cactus" and "MB" is displayed. Comparing FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, during the MB flag, a combination of more kinds of symbols is displayed than during the MB non-flag at the time of winning the "push order bell". be able to. Specifically, among the MB non-flags, while a combination of symbols of "bell" and "bell spill or first shot" is displayed according to the pressing order, while between MB flags, according to the pressing order A combination of "Bell", "Cactus", "MB" and "Bell spilled eyes or 1st shot" symbol is displayed.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the combination "F_ single chiri lip 1" to "F_3 continuous chiri lip 4" and the combination "F_ push order bell 1" to "F_ push order bell 6" between the MB flags. The stop control is different from the stop control with respect to the MB non-flag between the roles “F_single chill lip 1” to “F_3 continuous chill lip 4” and the roles “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6”.

[Flow of games in normal ART]
Then, the flow of the game in the normal ART of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the combinations “F_single chill lip 1” to “F_3 continuous chill lip 4” differ in the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. In the pachislot machine 1, when the roles “F_single chill lip 1” to “F_3 continuous chill lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations during the normal ART, flag conversion lottery is performed, and if this flag conversion lottery is won, “chill lip” The notification for displaying the combination of the symbols is given, and the number of ART games is increased. On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" is performed without adding the number of ART games.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the additional amount of the number of ART games in the case of winning the flag conversion lottery is determined based on the type of the role determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in Pachi-Slot machine 1, the internal winning combination when winning a flag conversion lottery is determined to be the smallest additional amount when the role "F_ single chill lip 1" ~ "F_ single chill lip 4" Determine the next smallest amount of additional amount in the case of “F_2 continuous chilli lip 1” to “F 2 continuous chilli lip 4”, and determine the largest amount of additional load in the case of “F_3 continuous chilli lip 1” to “F_3 continuous chilli lip 4” Do. As described above, when a flag conversion lottery is won, the player is notified to display a combination of symbols of "chiri lip". Become.

[Data table in normal ART]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102, a data table generally used during ART will be described. The data tables shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<ART flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 101 shows an ART intra-ART flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery performed during the normal ART of the second embodiment. The during-ART flag conversion lottery table defines information of lottery values for the lottery results of the flag conversion lottery, in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the lottery state. The ART level is information controlled in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the lottery state is information controlled in the same manner as the CT lottery state in the first embodiment.

  In the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, does the main control board 71 convert the roles “F_single chilli lip 1” to “F_3 continuous chilli lip 4” into the role “tili lip” using the flag conversion / lottery table during ART? Whether or not to lottery (flag conversion lottery). When the flag conversion lottery is won, the sub control board 72 notifies the pressing order of the correct answer for each winning combination via the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, The sub control board 72 notifies the pushing order of the incorrect answer for each winning combination through the display unit 100.

<Ordinary ART middle class lottery table>
Subsequently, FIG. 102 is a normal ART-over-lottery lottery table used for the additional-lotterial lottery in which the number of ART games performed during the normal ART in the second embodiment is added. Usually, the ART extra-lot lottery table is associated with the internal winning combination and defines lottery value information on the extra-lot lottery result.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the main control board 71 wins the flag conversion lottery, the main lottery is performed using the extra ART lottery table in the normal ART, and corresponds when the extra lottery is won. The additional game number is added to the ART end game number counter. In the information on the lottery value associated with the winning combination "single chill lip" in the figure, the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is the combination "F_ single chill lip 1" to "F_ single chill lip 4" If the internal winning combination is won when the flag conversion lottery is won, the information on the lottery value associated with the winning combination “two consecutive chilli lip” is referred to by “F_2 consecutive chilly lip 1” to “F_2 consecutive chilly lip 4”. The internal winning combination at the time of winning the flag conversion lottery is referred to when there is a reference to the lottery value associated with the winning combination "three consecutive chilli lip" in some cases, "F_3 repeated chilli lip 1" to "F_3 repeated chilli lip 4" It is referenced when it is

[Flow of game during CT]
Then, with reference to FIG. 103, the flow of the game in CT of the pachislot machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. The pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment differs from the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment in the method of managing the duration of CT. As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the duration of the CT by playing one set of eight times, but in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 mainly The control board 71 continues the CT duration based on the number of medals paid out during CT (more specifically, "the number of medals used for gaming" subtracted from "the number of medals paid out"). Manage

  Specifically, the main control board 71 terminates the CT when the difference sheet number in the CT reaches the end sheet number (50 sheets) (for example, the notification for winning the MB at the winning combination "Push order bell" is issued) ). Here, when a combination of symbols of "bell" and "cactus" is displayed, nine medals are paid out, and therefore, when a combination of symbols of "bell" is displayed during CT (more specifically, CT During the flag conversion and lottery (not winning)), the duration of CT is digested for the difference number (6 sheets) increased. On the other hand, when the combination of symbols of "cactus" is displayed during CT (more specifically, when the flag conversion lottery is performed during CT), the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment Maintain the duration of CT.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the main control board 71 performs flag conversion / lottery when the combination "push order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination during CT. When the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have a pressing order in which a combination of symbols of "cactus" is displayed for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and display unit 100. If notification is given and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of "bell" symbols for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and display unit 100. Report the order of pressing.

  Then, the main control board 71 increases the number of differences by six when the combination of symbols of "bell" or "cactus" is displayed, and the duration of CT is digested, but winning the flag conversion lottery. In this case, the main control board 71 adds six sheets not only to the difference number but also to the termination number of CT. As a result, although the number of differences in CT increases by six with the display of the combination of the symbols of "cactus", the number of CT endings also increases by six, so when winning the flag conversion lottery, CT The duration of the will be maintained.

  This flag conversion lottery is performed based on the value of the CT meter. That is, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, a plurality of stages of CT meters from “1” to “MAX” are provided, and the lower the CT meter is, the more equivalent to flag conversion lottery. The lower the probability, the higher the CT meter, the higher the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery.

  This CT meter is promoted or demoted based on the result of the game during CT. That is, the main control board 71 promotes the CT meter with a predetermined probability, when the combination “F_single chill lip 1” to “F_3 continuous chill lip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination during CT. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the main control board 71 is the lowest when the roles "F_single chill lip 1" to "F_ single chill lip 4" are determined as internal winning combinations during CT. Promote CT meter with probability, and if “F_2 series chiri lip 1” to “F 2 series chiri lip 4” are determined as internal winning combination during CT, promote CT meter with the next lowest probability and play a role during CT When “F_3 series chiri lip 1” to “F 3 series chiri lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations, the CT meter is promoted with the highest probability.

  Further, when the main control board 71 does not win the flag conversion / lottery at the time of winning the combination “pushing order bell” in CT, the main control board 71 demoses the CT meter. If the main control board 71 does not win the flag conversion / lottery, the main control board 71 may demote the CT meter with a predetermined probability, or may demote it without fail.

  In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the roles “F_single chill lip 1” to “F_3 continuous chill lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations during CT, the number of ART games is added. The additional amount of the number of ART games varies depending on the number of displayed Chile symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the main control board 71 plays a role during CT “F_Single Chile 1 "-F_single chill lip 4" is decided as the internal winning combination, the smallest additional amount is determined, and during CT the roles "F_2 continuous chill lip 1" to "F_2 continuous chill lip 4" are decided as the internal winning combination Then, the next smaller amount of addition is determined, and the most increased amount of addition is determined when the combination “F_3 series chili lip 1” to “F_3 series chiri lip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination during CT.

[Data table in CT]
Subsequently, a data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. The data tables shown in FIGS. 104 to 106 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<CT flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 104 shows a flag conversion lottery table during CT used for flag conversion lottery performed during CT of the second embodiment. The during-CT flag conversion lottery table is associated with the internal winning combination and the CT meter, and defines information of lottery values for the lottery results of the flag conversion lottery.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the main control board 71 converts the roles "F_push order bell 1" to "F_push order bell 6" into "cactus" using the flag conversion / lottery table during ART. It is lottery whether or not it is (flag conversion lottery). When the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display the combination of "cactus" symbols for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and display unit 100. When the pushing order is notified and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 combine the symbols of "bell" for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Inform the order of pressing to display.

  Here, referring to FIG. 104, it can be understood that the flag conversion lottery in CT is more easily won as the value of the CT meter is higher, and the flag conversion lottery is always won when the CT meter is “MAX”. I understand that. When the flag conversion lottery is won, the duration of CT is maintained, so when the CT meter is “MAX”, CT continues without ending. It should be noted that if the CT meter does not end, the profit given to the player will be excessive. Therefore, the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing when the CT meter reaches "MAX". It is also possible to apply both the demotion of the CT meter and the upper limit of the number of sheets to be finished.

  When demoting a CT meter, if you demote it immediately after being promoted to "MAX", it will detract from the player's interest. Therefore, the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing after the CT meter becomes “MAX”. Here, since the CT meter is provided in eight stages of “1” to “MAX”, for example, to demote the CT meter after 8 games are performed after the CT meter becomes “MAX”. Alternatively, the CT meter may be demoted after the flag conversion / lottery is performed eight times after the CT meter becomes “MAX”. In addition, the value of the CT meter after the demotion is arbitrary, for example, it may be demoted to the CT meter “1”, or may be demoted to the CT meter “7”, and the CT meter “1” The value of the demotion destination may be determined by lottery from “7” to “7”.

<CT during CT meter elevation lottery table>
FIG. 105 is a CT in-CT CT-promoted lottery table used in CT-promoted lottery of CT in the second embodiment. The CT in-CT CT-promoter lottery table defines the information of the lottery value of the CT-meter elevation lottery result in association with the current CT meter value and the internal winning combination.

  Referring to FIG. 105, the probability of winning the elevated lottery of the CT meter is the lowest among the roles "F_single chill lip 1" to "F_ single chill lip 4" and the roles "F_2 continuous chill lip 1" to "F_2 continuous chill lip 4" Next, it is low, and it is understood that the roles “F_3 series chiri lip 1” to “F_3 series chiri lip 4” are the highest. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the CT meter is promoted one step at a time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of steps may be promoted at one time.

<CT middle addition lottery table>
Subsequently, FIG. 106 is a CT middle added lottery table used for an additional lottery where the number of ART games to be performed during CT in the second embodiment is added. The CT extra-lot lottery table defines information of lottery values about the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the main control board 71 performs the addition lottery using the CT middle addition lottery table, and when the addition lottery is won, the corresponding additional game number is added (ART end) Add to the game number counter).

  Referring to FIG. 106, the additional amount of ART game number in CT is the smallest for the roles "F_single chill lip 1" to "F_ single chill lip 4", and the roles "F_2 continuous chill lip 1" to "F_2 continuous chill lip 4" Next, it can be seen that the roles “F_3-series chilli lip 1” to “F_3-series chilli lip 4” are the largest. More specifically, in the roles "F_single chill lip 1" to "F_ single chill lip 4" in which one chilli symbol is displayed, the number of ART games of 10 games or more is added and the double chill symbol is displayed. In “F_2 series chilli lip 1” to “F 2 series chilli lip 4”, the number of ART games of 20 games or more is added, and three chili symbols are displayed. In “F_3 series chilli lip 1” to “F_3 series chilli lip 4”, More than 30 ART games will be added. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the number of ART games is added according to the number of dust patterns displayed during CT.

[Flow of game in CZ]
Then, with reference to FIG. 107, the flow of the game in CZ of the pachi-slot machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment has CZ1, 2, 3 as the CZ, similarly to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the flow of the CZ3 game is the same as the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the flow of the CZ1, 2 games is the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment It is different.

  Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the CZs 1 and 2 are divided into a first half and a second half, and ranks (modes and points) having different expectations for winning ART lottery in the first half are promoted. In the second half, the lottery result of ART lottery based on the rank is notified by the battle effect (see FIG. 50). As shown in FIG. 107, the basic flow in such CZ 1 and 2 is the same as in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

  On the other hand, the end condition of the front half of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment is largely different from that of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first half of the CZs 1 and 2 is ended based on the number of continued games, but in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CZ 1 is the first half based on the number of continued games Although the section is ended, CZ 2 ends the first half based on the result of the end lottery. Further, lock lottery is performed in the first half of both CZ1 and CZ2, and the first half of CZ1 and 2 is ended also when winning this lock lottery.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 107A, in the first half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs rank-up lottery for each game. Since this rank-up lottery is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 53), detailed description will be omitted.

  In the first half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs lock lottery for each game. This lock lottery is a process of lottery whether or not to perform the game lock based on the internal winning combination. Then, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, the main control board 71 terminates the first half of CZ 1 and performs game lock (for example, delaying the start of rotation at the time of start of reel rotation). On the other hand, when the lock lottery is not won, the main control board 71 continues the first half of CZ1 until the first half of CZ1 reaches 15 games without ending the first half of CZ1.

  Then, when the first half of CZ1 has won 15 games or lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half of CZ1 and shifts to the second half. In the second half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. Since this ART lottery is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 55A and 55C), the detailed description is omitted. However, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, Make sure to win the ART lottery. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state when the ART lottery is not won, and transitions the gaming state to the ART gaming state via ART preparation during the ART lottery. .

  On the other hand, in the first half of CZ2, as shown in FIG. 107B, the main control board 71 performs rank-up lottery for each game. Since this rank-up lottery is the same as the first embodiment (see FIG. 54), the detailed description is omitted. In addition, the main control board 71 performs an end lottery in every game in the first half of CZ1, and when the end lottery is won, the first half of CZ1 ends and shifts to the second half, while the end lottery is not performed. If winning, continue the first half of CZ1.

  In the first half of CZ2, the main control board 71 performs lock lottery for each game. Then, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, the main control board 71 terminates the first half of the CZ 2 and performs the game lock. On the other hand, when the lock lottery is not won, the main control board 71 continues the first half of CZ2 until the end lottery is won without ending the first half of CZ2.

  Then, when the main control board 71 wins the end lottery or the lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half of CZ 2 and shifts to the second half. In the second half of CZ2, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. Since this ART lottery is also the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 55 (B) and (C)), the detailed description is omitted, but when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, Make sure to win the ART lottery. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state when the ART lottery is not won, and transitions the gaming state to the ART gaming state via ART preparation during the ART lottery. .

  As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment differs from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that lock lottery is performed every game in the first half of CZ 1 and CZ 2. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the end condition of the first half of CZ2 is not the number of continued games but the winning lottery.

[Data table in CZ]
Subsequently, a data table used during CZ will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. The data tables shown in FIGS. 108 and 109 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<CZ2 end lottery table>
FIG. 108 is a CZ2 end lottery table used for the end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 according to the second embodiment. The CZ2 end lottery table defines the information of the lottery value for the lottery result of the end lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

  Referring to FIG. 108, in the first half of CZ2 of the second embodiment, the end lottery is performed when the combination "Replay" is determined as the internal winning combination, and the end lottery may be won with a high probability. I understand. In addition, since CZ2 is basically performed during the RT0 to RT3 gaming state, the role "Replay" is any of the roles "F_Maintenance Lip A" to "F_RT4 Lip_3rd". Since in the pachislot machine Replay is determined as an internal winning combination with at least a predetermined probability (about 1 / 7.3) or more, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, there is a situation where the first half of CZ2 ends. It can be seen that it occurs relatively often.

<Lock lottery table>
Subsequently, FIG. 109 shows a lock lottery table used for lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1 and C2 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 109 (A) shows a lock lottery table used for lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1. FIG. 109 (B) shows a lock lottery table used for lock lottery performed in the front half of CZ2. The lock lottery table is associated with the internal winning combination and defines information of lottery values for the lottery result of the lock lottery.

  Comparing FIGS. 109A and 109B, it can be seen that lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 is won with a higher probability than lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the first half of CZ1 ends when the predetermined number of games (15 games) elapses, while the first half of CZ2 ends when the end lottery is won. In the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, rank-up lottery is performed, and when the first half of CZ1 and CZ2 ends, ART lottery is performed based on the result of the rank-up lottery. Therefore, it can be said that CZ1 is a chance zone where the timing of ART lottery is fixed, and CZ2 is a chance zone where the timing of ART lottery is indefinite.

  In addition, since the end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 is performed when the role “Replay” winning with a relatively high probability is determined as the internal winning combination, the rank up lottery is performed during CZ2 compared to during CZ1. It is easy to receive less chance. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, lock lottery is performed in the front half of CZ1 and CZ2, and the probability of winning this lock lottery is higher for CZ2 than for CZ1. As a result, even with CZ2 that is likely to receive fewer rank-up lottery, it can be expected to move to ART.

Modified Example of Second Embodiment
The pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described.

<CT precursor game and notification lottery>
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, usually, when transitioning between MB flags during ART, transitioning from next game to CT is immediately made, but transitioning between MB flags After that, a predetermined number of precursor games may be inserted.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (A), when MB is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal ART, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from between MB non-flags to between MB flags. In normal ART (during MB non-flag), since winning the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the roles “F_single chill lip 1” to “F_3 double chill lip 4” will add the number of ART games (see FIG. 102), The flag conversion lottery until the transition to the MB flag is performed on the main side (main control board 71) in order to affect the benefits given to the player.

  Here, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, a combination of symbols of "chiririp" is always displayed regardless of the pushing order when the MB flag is reached, so when performing a precursor game during the MB flag, From the stop control (combination of the displayed symbols), the player may find out that the precursor game is being played. For example, as shown in FIG. 99, during the MB non-flag, the combination of “chiri lip” is not displayed in the order push at the time of winning the roles “F_single chiri lip 1” to “F_3 continuous chiri lip 4”. When the combination of the symbols of "chiri lip" is displayed by the forward press, the player will know that it is during the MB flag (during the precursor game).

  Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, when the roles “F_single chiri lip 1” to “F_3 continuous chiri lip 4” are determined as the internal winning combination between MB flags, the pushing order is notified on purpose. As described above, when the combination "F_single chill lip 1" to "F_3 continuous chill lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during the MB flag, the symbol combination of "til chill lip" is displayed regardless of the pressing order. However, when the player is informed of the pushing order, the player recognizes that the combination of symbols of "chiri lip" is displayed by the informed pushing order, and the player is in the middle of the MB flags. It can be difficult to grasp.

  Since such notification of push order does not affect the player's profit at all, in the Pachislot machine 1 of this modification, it is determined whether or not the push order is notified between MB flags (notification (notification) The lottery is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side. Of course, although the notification lottery within the MB flag may be performed on the main side, the data capacity of the main side may be performed by performing the lottery on the sub side which does not have any influence on the player's profit as in this modification. And the processing load can be reduced, which is preferable.

  FIG. 110 (B) shows a notification lottery table of CT precursors used for notification lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 82. The notification lottery table in the CT precursor defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the notification lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination.

  When the notification lottery using the notification lottery table in the CT precursor is won, the sub control board 72 notifies of any pressing order other than the forward pressing via the display unit 100.

<Navi when pushing order bell between MB flags>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment described above, when the role "push order bell" is won during the MB flag, combinations of symbols of more types than those during the MB non-flag are displayed. Specifically, during the MB non-flag, while displaying the combination of the symbols of "bell" and "bell spill or first shot" according to the pressing order, during the MB flags, according to the pressing order " Display the combination of bell, "cactus", "MB" and "Bell spill or first shot" symbols. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the pressing order necessary for displaying the combination of symbols of "cactus" which can be displayed only between MB flags is notified in the CT between MB flags .

  In this regard, in the Pachi-Slot machine 1 of the present modification, when the role "push order bell" is won during the MB flag, the notification content is made different according to the state up to the MB start.

  Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when MB is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal ART, the gaming state shifts between MB flags, and thereafter, CT is performed. In this case, in the pachislot machine 1 which holds a predetermined number of precursor games after transitioning between the MB flags, the state during the MB flags is divided into the "predictive game" state, the "CT" state, and the "MB waiting" state. be able to.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, when MB is won during the normal ART, when the MB flag is in the "predictive game" state, then after a predetermined number of prognostic games are performed and CT starts, It will be in the "CT" state between MB flags, and then it will be in the "MB waiting" state until the MB wins when the CT ends.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modified example, the notification content at the time of winning the combination "push order bell" is made different according to the state between these MB flags. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, in the "predictive game" state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of "bell" symbols via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Report the order of pressing. Further, in the “CT” state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pressing order in which the combination of “bell” or “cactus” symbol is displayed through the instruction monitor and display unit 100. That is, in the "CT" state, the pushing order according to either "bell" or "cactus" is informed based on the result of the flag conversion lottery based on the CT meter as described above.

  In the “MB waiting” state after completion of the CT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 may report an arbitrary combination of symbols via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. For example, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 may notify the pressing order in which the combination of the symbols of “bell” is displayed, or the pressing order in which the combination of the symbols of “cactus” is displayed It is good also as alerting | reporting and it is good also as alert | reporting the pushing order in which the combination of the symbol of "MB" is displayed.

  On the other hand, during the normal ART, since the combination of symbols of "cactus" can not be displayed, the main control board 71 and the sub control substrate 72 notify the pressing order in which the combination of symbols of "bell" is displayed.

[Effect of the pachislot machine of the second embodiment]
Hereinabove, the second embodiment of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described. According to such a pachislot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Combination of symbols that can be displayed during MB flag)
In the Pachi-Slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, during the MB flag, combinations of more types of symbols can be displayed at the time of winning the "push order bell" than during the MB non-flag. Specifically, among the MB non-flags, while a combination of symbols of "bell" and "bell spill or first shot" is displayed according to the pressing order, while between MB flags, according to the pressing order A combination of "Bell", "Cactus", "MB" and "Bell spilled eyes or 1st shot" symbol is displayed.

  This makes it possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed between the MB flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and to provide diversity in the game between the MB flags. Specifically, it becomes possible to display a combination of symbols of "cactus" corresponding to so-called rares between MB flags, and the appearance frequency of rares without changing the type of winning combination and the winning probability. Can be enhanced. In particular, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the combination of the symbols displayed at the time of winning the winning combination "Push order bell" is changed, it is possible to increase the appearance frequency of the rare combination with the payout of medals.

  In the case where the symbol combination of "cactus" is continuously displayed between the MB flags, it is understood that the MB flags are in the middle. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the symbol combination of "cactus" is notified only when the flag conversion lottery is won, and the symbol combination of "bell" is notified in the case of non-winning. This makes it possible to obscure the current state of the player, which is preferable. In addition, by controlling notification contents by flag conversion lottery, it is possible to adjust the frequency of symbol combination (rare role) of "cactus" among MB flags, and to diversify the game characteristics among MB flags. Can.

(Playability during CT)
Further, in the Pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, CT which is an additional chance zone in which the number of ART games is added between the MB flags is performed. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, CT is performed until the difference sheet number reaches the end sheet number (50 sheets) between the MB flags. During this CT, if the flag conversion lottery is not won at the time of winning the winning order “Push order bell”, the difference sheet number increases and the duration of the CT is reduced, while if the flag conversion lottery is won, the end sheet number increases with the increase of the difference sheet number And the duration of CT is maintained. Thereby, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, while changing the stop control between MB flags, the CT continues (according to the result of the flag conversion / lottery) according to the combination of displayed symbols. Since the period can be controlled, it is possible to diversify the playability between MB flags.

  At this time, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, since the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the value of the CT meter, the duration of CT is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter Can. In addition, this CT meter is promoted when the roles “F_single chill lip 1” to “F_3 continuous chill lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations during CT, and is demoted when it is not won during inter-flag lottery during CT. The player has a strong interest in the outcome of the game during CT, and can diversify the playability among the MB flags.

  In particular, when the CT meter can be promoted to "MAX", the flag conversion lottery must be won for a predetermined period, so that it is possible to have anticipation for the subsequent game, which makes the game interesting Improve.

(Combination of symbols that can be displayed between MB flags and MB non-flags)
In addition, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, not only the combination of the symbols displayed at the time of the winning order “pushing bell” is different between the MB flag and the MB non-flag, but also the role “F_single chill lip The combination of the symbols displayed at the time of winning from 1 "to" F_3 continuous chiri lip "is also different. That is, while a combination of symbols of "replay" or "chiririp" is displayed depending on the pressing order during MB non-flag, a combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed between MB flags. Only the combination of the symbols of "chiririp" is displayed.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, flag conversion lottery is performed both during the MB flag and during the MB non-flag. The flag conversion lottery within the MB flag is for extracting the target to be notified at the time of winning the "push order bell" from the combination of the symbols of "bell" or "cactus", and between the MB non-flags. The flag conversion lottery is for lottery an object to be notified at the winning of the combination "F_single chill lip 1" to "F_3 continuous chill lip" from among combinations of symbols of "replay" or "til chill". Thus, by performing the flag conversion lottery both in the middle of MB flag and in the middle of MB non-flag, it is possible to control the combination of displayed symbols in both MB flag and between MB non-flag, Playability of both between flags and between non-flags can be enhanced.

  At this time, flag conversion lottery among MB flags has its winning probability adjusted based on the value of CT meter, and flag conversion lottery among MB non-flags has its winning probability adjusted based on ART level and lottery status. Ru. Thus, each lottery can be managed in its own mode, and the game conversion based on the flag conversion lottery can be improved.

(Information lottery on the sub side)
Since stop control differs between MB flags and MB non-flags, the combination of the displayed symbols may indicate that the MB flags are in the middle. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, notification of an originally unnecessary push order is intentionally performed during the MB flag to make it difficult to grasp that the MB flag is in the middle. Then, by managing the notification of the pressing order on the sub side, it is possible to reduce the data capacity and processing load on the main side.

[Modification]
As mentioned above, although the pachi-slot machine 1 which concerns on 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment was demonstrated, this invention is not limited to this.

(Bell navigation between flags and bell navigation between non flags)
For example, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, notification on the main side is performed by displaying a numerical value uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation on the instruction monitor. In addition, since the aspect of the alerting | reporting by the side of a main is fundamentally the same in 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment, the example is shown in FIG. 74 of 1st Embodiment. Here, in FIG. 74, while “white 7 navi” and “blue 7 navi” are performed in the inter-flag state, “bell navi” and the like are not performed, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It is good also as performing "bell navi" etc. in a state.

  In this case, the numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor may be different between the inter-flag state and the non-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 74 (A) and 74 (B), when performing "bell navigation" in the non-flag state, numerical values of "1" to "3" (push order combination second instruction information are displayed on the instruction monitor 112) while displaying “Navi navi” in the inter-flag state as shown in FIG. 112, displaying numerical values “12” to “14” (push order first instruction information) on the instruction monitor It may be The navigation on the sub side performed via the display unit 100 may be common to both the inter-flag state and the non-flag state. The same applies to the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, and the numerical value in the case of performing "Bell navi" between MB non-flags and the numerical value in the case of performing "Bell navi" between MB flags are different. It may be

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, whether or not to give a benefit is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion / lottery, but it is not limited to this. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the notification content is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, and as a result, the combination of symbols displayed when the notification-following stop operation is performed It will be different. Therefore, the main control board 71 may give a privilege based on the combination of the symbols actually displayed.

  In this case, the main control board 71 grants a privilege based on the combination of the symbols displayed based on the notification performed according to the result of the flag conversion lottery, and based on the combination of the symbols displayed without following the notification. It is also possible not to grant a reward. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, since the combination of the symbols displayed in the order of pressing is different, the player ignores the notification and performs the stop operation, There is a possibility that a combination of special symbols such as "triple chiri lip" may be displayed. However, even if a special symbol combination is displayed as a result of ignoring the notification, the privilege is given only when the combination of the special symbol is displayed as a result according to the notification without giving a benefit. You may do it.

(Control of notification that does not affect the benefits (benefits))
Moreover, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the notification affecting the profit is notified by lottery on the main side (flag conversion / lottery), and it is controlled whether to notify on the main side In the notification that does not affect the profit, the sub-side performs notification lottery and the sub-side controls whether to perform notification. And, as an example of the notification which does not affect this profit, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the notification of "reach eye lip" during the precursor game is shown, and in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, It shows the notification of "chiri lip" in the middle of the MB flag. In this regard, the notification that does not affect the profit is not limited to these.

  In recent pachislot machines, the game lock may be transitioned to an easy (hard) state according to the order of the stop operation. For example, transition to a state where it is easy to lock the game when the order is "left, middle, right", and transition to a state where it is difficult to perform the game lock when the order is "right, middle, left" There is. In such a pachislot machine, by notifying the order of pushing, it will be made to transition to a state where it is easy to perform the game lock (it is difficult), but when it is affected whether or not to perform the game lock on the profit While it is necessary to control the notification on the main side, the notification may be controlled on the sub side if there is no influence on the profit whether or not the game lock is performed.

  In addition, in the case where it wins ART lottery by performing game lock like the pachislot machine 1 of a 2nd embodiment, for example, when the presence or absence of the game lock affects the profit. (See FIG. 107). On the other hand, the case where the game lock is not performed does not affect the profit is the case where the game lock is performed as an effect, for example, during the precursor game in which it is decided to give the profit (reward) By performing the game lock frequently, the effect is to show that a benefit will be given in the subsequent game.

  FIG. 113A is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence relationship between the push order and the lock state. In the example shown in FIG. 113 (A), when the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing “left, middle, right” at the time of winning the combination “F_ maintenance rep A”, the lock state changes from “0” to “1”. When the stop operation is performed in the order of "left, right, middle", "middle, left, right", "middle, right, left", the current lock state is maintained, and "right, left, middle" "right When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing “middle, left,” the lock state transitions from “1” to “0”. Similarly, the same holds true for the winning combination "F_Maintenance Lip B", and when the stop operation is performed in the first push order, the lock state changes from "0" to "1", and in the second push order. When the stop operation is performed, the lock state is maintained, and when the stop operation is performed in the third pressing order, the lock state transitions from “1” to “0”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 113 (A), in order to simplify the description, the lock state “0” is made difficult to lock the game, and the lock state “1” is made easy to lock the game. Of course, the lock state is not limited to two stages, and the number of stages may be three or more, and in the case of three or more stages, multiple stages may be transitioned at once instead of transitioning one by one.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), when the game lock affects the profit, the main (main control board 71) performs notification lottery whether or not to perform notification, and the lottery result is Based on the notification, a predetermined pushing order is notified on both the main side and the sub side. On the other hand, when the game lock does not affect the profit, the sub (sub control board 72) performs notification lottery whether or not to perform notification, and based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined pushing order in the sub To inform

  In addition, depending on the pachislot machine, there is also a pachislot machine where the game lock affects the profit over the entire game period, and some pachislot machines whose game lock does not affect the profit over the entire game period. There are also pachislot machines in which the game lock does not affect the profit during a specific period of the game while the game lock affects the profit during the predetermined period. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, during the period when the game lock affects the profit, the main side performs a notification lottery on whether to perform notification and based on the result of the selection, a predetermined push is made on both the main side and the sub side. While notifying the order, during the period in which the game lock affects the profit, the sub-side performs a notification lottery whether or not to perform the notification, and the sub-side announces a predetermined pushing order based on the lottery result. It may be

  In addition, since the game control is normally performed by the main control board 71, the main control board 71 has a function of changing the lock state according to the pressing order shown in FIG. 113 (A). That is, the main control board 71 randomly selects whether or not to lock the game with a probability according to the lock state set by the lock state setting means that sets the lock state based on the detected stop operation order, and the lock state setting means. When the game lock determination unit determines that the game lock is to be performed, the game lock determination unit functions as a lock execution unit that temporarily stops the progress of the game. Then, the main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 is a notification lottery means for performing notification lottery whether or not the lock state setting means will set a lock state where the game lock is easy to be performed (it is difficult) to be set. , And the notification lottery means functions as a notification means for notifying a predetermined pressing order based on the lottery result.

(Normal condition for termination of ART or CT)
Normally, the termination condition of ART or CT is not limited to the one described above, and any termination condition can be adopted. For example, the number of medals awarded during normal ART or CT, the number of unit games during normal ART or CT, the number of times for notifying information advantageous to the player during normal ART or CT, a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) Arbitrary termination conditions, such as the number of sets in the case of making one set into one set, and the continuation rate at the end of one set, can be adopted.

  In addition, as the number of medals awarded during normal ART or CT, for example, use the difference number (net increase number) obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out in the same game. It may be In addition, the number of medals normally awarded during ART or CT may be calculated based on the actually increased medals (calculation based on the actual value), and the notification may be made regardless of whether the number actually increased. It is also possible to calculate based on the number of medals scheduled to be increased in accordance with the above (calculation based on the ideal value). Further, the number of medals provided may not be increased depending on the type of the internal winning combination. For example, with regard to a part combination having a low probability of being determined as an internal winning combination, or a combination in which display / non-display of a combination of symbols is switched according to the timing of stop operation, the combination is determined as an internal combination winning combination Also, the number of medals may not be increased or decreased.

(Type of notification (pushing order, timing))
In addition, the contents of the notification normally performed during ART or CT are also optional, and it is also possible to notify the order (pushing order) of the stop operation in which the combination of symbols advantageous to the player is displayed. It is also possible to notify the timing of the stop operation (the symbol to be aimed) required to be displayed.

(Others)
Further, as an advantageous state, a notification is given of the mode of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player without changing the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the replay (or changing within a range that does not affect the playability). To use the so-called "AT", and to activate the replay high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the replay is increased, and the stop operation which is advantageous for the player It is also possible to use a so-called "ART" that reports an aspect.

  Further, in the above-described pachi-slot machine 1, various display screens are displayed on the first sub-display device 201 provided on the left side (the MAX bet button 11 and the start lever 6 side) of the pedestal portion 10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various display screens may be displayed on the second sub display device 202 provided on the right side (the medal insertion slot 22 side) of the pedestal portion 10. Similarly, a touch sensor may be provided on the display surface of the second sub-display device 202, and the display screen of the second sub-display device 202 may be switched based on touch input information output from the touch sensor.

(White 7 (blue 7) navigation and bell navigation in the flag)
In the above embodiment, during the inter-flag state, the combination (“F_BB1” and “F_BB2”) relating to the bonus and either “off”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2” or “F_special 3” are used as internal winning combinations When it is determined, BB ("C_BB1""C_BB2") is controlled so as to be displayable, and when the role relating to the bonus and the other roles such as the jackpot are determined as the internal winning combination, The BB is controlled so as not to be displayed (see FIG. 48). Such control is performed based on the attraction priority of a plurality of winning combinations, and in the above embodiment, the above-mentioned priority is given to a higher priority of attraction than a pressing order, etc. than a bonus associated with a bonus. Such stop control is performed.

  By the way, depending on the pachislot machine, it is also possible to perform stop control in which priority is given to the combination related to the bonus combination with the priority given to the combination related to the bonus higher than the combination related to the payout of medals such as the fixed order. is there. Therefore, with reference to FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, white 7 or blue 7 navi and bell navi in a pachislot machine that draws in the player according to the bonus with priority over the player (for example, a pushing order) for paying out medals. Explain the relationship with

  In the following, white 7 navigation will be described as an example, and the description of blue 7 navigation will be omitted, but blue 7 navigation will have the same relationship as white 7. Further, in the above embodiment, the three choice push order ("F_3 choice bell _ 1st", etc.) is used as the press order, but in the example shown below, in order to make the explanation clearer, six choices. It is assumed that a pushing order ("F_6 selection bell _123") is used. In this case, as described above, the end of the name of the winning combination in the 6-choice winning combination means the pressing order as the correct answer.

  FIG. 114 (A) is a view showing the correspondence (a part of the roles is omitted) between the winning combination in the inter-flag state and the combination of the symbols displayed in the stop state, corresponding to FIG. 48 of the above embodiment. It is a figure to do. FIG. 114A particularly shows whether or not BB (“C_BB1”) can be displayed during the inter-flag state. In the example shown in FIG. 114 (A), during the inter-flag state, not only when the combination relating to the bonus and the “off” are determined as the internal winning combination, the combination relating to the bonus and the pushing order (“F_6 The BB can also be displayed when the selected bell _ 123 "to" F 6 selected bell _ 321 ") is determined as the internal winning combination.

  Subsequently, FIG. 114 (B) is a view showing the correspondence (a part of the roles is omitted) between the winning combination in the inter-flag state and the combination of the symbols displayed in the stop state. In the pachi-slot machine 1, since the stop control differs depending on the timing of the stop operation (so-called "watching") and the order of the stop operation (so-called "pushing order") In the case where priority is given to the role of drawing in, the combination of the symbols shown in FIG. 114 (B) is displayed.

  Specifically, when the combination relating to the bonus (“F_BB1”) and the push change (“F_6 selection bell _123” to “F_6 selection bell _321”) are determined as internal winning combinations, the touch is accurate In some cases, BB can be displayed regardless of the pushing order, since priority is given to pulling in the winnings related to the bonus over the pressing order. On the other hand, when the pressing is not accurate, the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different, and when the pressing order is correct, the symbols of bells (“C_9 sheets A_01” to “C_9 sheets H_04”) Is displayed, and if the pressing order is incorrect, a combination of symbols of bell spilled eyes ("R_RT transition A_01" to "R_RT transition B_02") or a first sheet ("C_1st_A_01" to The combination of symbols of "C_2nd_B_04" is displayed.

  By the way, when drawing in the role which concerns on a bonus preferentially over a pushing order, depending on the result of stop operation, it may be unable to display the combination of any symbol of BB, a bell, a bell spill, and the 1st piece. For example, in the case where the pressing is accurate in the first and second stop operations, although the combination of symbols displayed in the stop state along with the first and second stop operations can display BB, it is possible to display a bell or a bell The combination of the eye and the first shot symbol may not be displayable. In such a case, if the impression of the third stop operation is imprecise, then both the part associated with the bonus and the pushing part will be missed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), when the pressing is not accurate, the combination of the symbols of the outset may be displayed regardless of the pressing order being correct / incorrect.

  Here, in the game in which the role associated with the bonus and the pushing bonus are determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the symbols of the outs is displayed, and if either role is dropped, the player feels a loss Would be frustrated. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, the following notification (navigation) is performed during the inter-flag state. FIG. 114 (C) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the notification (navi) performed on the main side and the notification (navi) performed on the sub side.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (C), in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modification, in addition to the above-mentioned "White 7 Navi", "White 7 Navi _123", "White 7 Navi _132", "White 7 Navi _213", and "White 7" The navigation _ 231 "white 7 navigation _ 312" "white 7 navigation _ 321" is performed. "White 7 Navi _123" is performed when the combination "F_BB1" and the combination "F_6 selection Bell _123" are determined as the internal winning combination, and "White 7 Navi _132" is the combination "F_BB1" and the combination "F_6 "Selection Bell _ 132" is performed as an internal winning combination, and "White 7 Navi _ 213" is a row when the combination "F_BB1" and the combination "F_6 selection bell _ 213" are determined as an internal winning combination. “White 7 Navi _ 231” is performed when the combination “F_BB1” and the combination “F_6 selection Bell _ 231” are determined as the internal winning combination, and “White 7 Navi _ 312” is a combination of the combination “F_BB1” and It is performed when "F_6 choice bell_312" is determined as an internal winning combination, and "white 7 navi _321" is when an combination "F_BB1" and a combination "F_6 choice bell _321" are determined as an internal winning combination To the line It is.

  When performing "White 7 Navi _ 123", the main control board 71 displays the numerical value of "12" on the instruction monitor, and when performing "White 7 Navi _ 132", the main control board 71 "13" on the instruction monitor The main control board 71 displays the numerical value of "14" on the instruction monitor when displaying the numerical value of "White 7 Navi _213", and the main control board 71 displays the numerical value of "14. When displaying the numerical value of "15" on the instruction monitor and performing "White 7 Navi-312", the main control board 71 displays the numerical value of "16" on the instruction monitor and performs "White 7 Navi-321". The main control board 71 displays the numerical value "17" on the instruction monitor.

  On the other hand, in the case of performing "White 7 Navi-123" to "White 7 Navi-321", the secondary control board 72 performs the special navigation illustrated in FIG. Although FIG. 115 shows an example of special navigation according to “White 7 Navi _ 123”, “White 7 Navi _ 213” to “White 7 Navi _ 321” only differ in the push order to be notified. Basically, it is the same as "white 7 navi-123" shown in FIG.

  When performing "White 7 Navi _ 123", as shown in FIG. 115 (A), the sub control board 72 is determined to be an internal winning combination during the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The display unit 100 displays the pressing order of the correct answer with respect to "F_6 selection bell _ 123". In the example shown in FIG. 115 (A), the display unit 100 displays the pressing order of “left, middle, right” which is the pressing order of the correct answer with respect to the pressing regular combination “F_6 selection bell _ 123”.

  As in the case of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present modification, in the case where priority is given to the combination relating to the bonus over the pressing order, even if the stop operation is performed according to the notified pressing order, the combination according to the combination relating to the bonus Stop control is performed so as to draw in the design as much as possible. As a result, at the timing when the first reel is stopped due to the first stop operation, (1) a symbol corresponding to the combination relating to the bonus is displayed and a symbol corresponding to the pressing order is not displayed (2) related to the bonus The symbol according to the role is not displayed, the symbol according to the bonus is displayed, (3) Both the symbol according to the bonus according to the role and the symbol according to the bonus are displayed Three patterns of stopping modes are conceivable.

  In addition, when performing "white 7 navi _ 123", the symbol according to the combination related to the bonus (specific combination configuration symbol) is the symbol "white 7" which constitutes the combination of the symbol of the combination name "C_BB1", The symbols corresponding to the pressing order (pushing order configuration symbols) are the symbols (for example, the symbol "hat") constituting the combination names "C_9 sheet combination A_01" to "C_9 sheet combination H_04".

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, the sub control board 72 switches the contents to be notified according to the stop mode of the symbol displayed along with the stop operation, “white 7 navi _123” to “white 7 navi _321. "I do.

  Specifically, (1) when the symbol "White 7" corresponding to the role related to the bonus is displayed at the timing when the first reel is stopped and the symbol corresponding to the pressing order is not displayed, as shown in FIG. As shown, the sub control board 72 stops notifying the pressing order of the correct answer which was being performed during the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, so as to aim the symbol "White 7" to the reel which is still rotating. Do navigation. Since the player can not obtain a profit according to the pressing order since the symbol corresponding to the pressing order is not displayed on the stopped first reel, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present modification To encourage the player to win the BB. Thereby, it is possible to avoid that the combination of the symbols of the outset is displayed in the current game.

  In addition, (2) when the symbol corresponding to the combination related to the bonus is not displayed at the timing when the first reel is stopped, and the symbol corresponding to the pressing order is displayed, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), The control board 72 continues to notify the pressing order of the correct answer which has been performed during the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. As long as no symbols corresponding to the combination relating to the bonus are displayed on the stopped first reel, symbols corresponding to the pressing order will be drawn in when the remaining reels stop, so the pachislot machine according to this modification In 1, the notification of the pressing order of the correct answer to the pressing order is continued. As a result, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), the combination of the symbols of the bell is displayed in this game, and the player pays out the benefit (the payout of nine medals according to the combination of the symbols). ) Can be received.

  In addition, when both the symbol according to the part related to the bonus and the symbol according to the pushing order are displayed at the timing when the first reel is stopped, as shown in FIG. 115 (E), the sub control The substrate 72 informs that the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of the correct answer which has been performed during the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R while avoiding the symbol "White 7" for the reel which is still rotating. If both the symbol corresponding to the bonus and the symbol corresponding to the pushing order are displayed on the stopped first reel, there is a possibility that any combination of symbols BB and Bell may be displayed. . The part associated with the bonus is carried over as an internal winning combination until the prize is achieved, while the pushing order (in particular, the part by which the number of medals exceeding the insertion number is paid out at the prize) is won only in the game without being carried over. Therefore, in the game, it is more advantageous for the player to realize the winning adjunct winning combination.

  Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present modification, when both the symbol according to the combination related to the bonus and the symbol according to the pushing order are displayed when the reel is stopped, the notification of the pushing order is continued while continuing , Urge to avoid the symbol "White 7". As a result, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), the combination of the symbols of the bell is displayed in this game, and the player pays out the benefit (the payout of nine medals according to the combination of the symbols). ) Can be received.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present modification, by switching the content to be notified in accordance with the progress of the game, the player can be notified that the player does not lose money, and as a result, the player plays the game with peace of mind be able to.

Although the example shown in FIG. 115 is described only at the time of the first stop, the contents to be notified can be switched similarly also at the time of the second stop.
Also, such "White 7 Navi _ 123" to "White 7 Navi _ 321" is performed only during the gaming state (ART gaming state) informing the player of the mode of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player, and during the general gaming state. It is also possible to simply perform "White 7 Navi". That is, when the combination “F_BB1” and the combination “F_6 selection bell_123” are determined as internal winning combinations during the ART gaming state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 execute “white 7 navi _123”. When the combination “F_BB1” and the combination “F_6 selection bell_123” are determined as the internal winning combination during the ordinary gaming state, the “white 7 navigation” may be executed.

  Further, the management of the duration of the ART gaming state in the case of executing "White 7 Navi_123" or the like during the ART gaming state can be performed arbitrarily. That is, since the mode (pushing order) of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is notified even during the flag state, for example, when the duration of the ART gaming state is managed by the number of games, the flag The number of games in the pause state may also be counted (added to the ART continuation game number counter) as the number of games in the ART gaming state, or, for example, when the duration of the ART gaming state is managed by the number of navigations The number of times “White 7 Navi _ 123” or the like performed during the flag state may be counted as the number of times of navigation during the ART gaming state, or, for example, the duration of the ART gaming state is ART gaming state When managed by the number of medals paid out and the number of differences, the number of medals paid out with "White 7 Navi _123" is also in the ART gaming state It may be counted as the number of paid out medals.

  Of course, on the contrary, the flag state may be managed as it does not affect the duration of the ART gaming state. In addition, the duration of the ART gaming state may be managed based on the result of the game in which “White 7 Navi — 123” and the like are performed. For example, when a profit (payout of nine medals) according to the pressing order is awarded according to "White 7 Navi _ 123" etc., the game in which "White 7 Navi _ 123" etc. is performed is ART Assuming that the game is in the gaming state, manage the continuation period in the ART gaming state, and if the profit according to the pressing role is not provided according to the "white 7 navi _ 123" etc., the game is the ART gaming state The duration in the ART gaming state may be managed as not being a middle game.

  In addition, it becomes possible to extend the alerting | reporting area in the state between flags by not displaying the combination of the symbol according to the part which concerns on a bonus. Therefore, once, a notification based on the main navigation "10" (for example, "White 7 Navi" in the internal winning combination "off" game) is executed, and a combination of symbols according to the combination related to the bonus is displayed in the game. If it can not be done, the sub control board 72 then makes "White 7 Navi" not "White 7 Navi _123"-"White 7 Navi _321" for the main navigation "12"-"17". It is good also as execution. This makes it possible to prevent capture by extension. In addition, in the game which performed the information based on main side navigation "12"-"17", when it is not possible to display the combination of the symbol according to the combination which concerns on a bonus, it does not correspond to the capture by extension. Performs “White 7 Navi _ 123” to “White 7 Navi _ 321” also for the subsequent main navigations “12” to “17”.

  In addition, during the flag interval state, a part of the push order bell may be used as the same reel control as the push order unquestioned bell to reduce the frequency with which the player's eyes are pressed. Then, when neither push order navigation nor white 7 navigation is displayed, and it is informed that the small winning combination can be obtained by the push order being unquestioned, the player does not have to make an unnecessary push.

Third Embodiment
Subsequently, a pachi-slot machine 1 according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 146. In addition, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted about the structure similar to the pachi-slot machine 1 of 1st Embodiment or 2nd Embodiment, and control. Also, the features of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment described below can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment in the same manner.

<Control system of pachislot machine>
A control system provided in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a circuit block diagram showing a configuration of a control system of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided inside the housing 60, and a sub control board 72 provided on the upper door 62a. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a reel relay terminal board 410, a ratio display device 420, a setting key type switch 430, a cabinet side relay substrate 440 and a power supply device 450 connected to the main control substrate 71. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an external concentrated terminal plate 73 connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 440, a hopper device 40, a medal auxiliary storage switch 441 and a reset switch 442.
The configurations of the outer concentrated terminal plate 73 and the hopper device 40 have been described above, so the description thereof will be omitted here.

  The reel relay terminal board 410 is disposed inside the reel bodies of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal board 410 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The ratio display device 420 has a ratio display substrate 421 connected to the main control substrate 71, and a ratio indicator 422 and a changeover switch 423 connected to the ratio display substrate 421. The ratio display board 421 controls the display of the ratio display 422 based on the signal output from the main control board 71. The ratio display 422 displays various ratios such as a specific section ratio and a character ratio. The changeover switch 423 switches the display of the ratio indicator 422.
The configuration of the ratio indicator 422 and details of the various ratios displayed on the ratio indicator 422 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The setting key type switch 430 is set to the pachi-slot machine 1 when setting any setting value out of a plurality of setting values provided to set the size of the profit given to the player It is used when checking the set value. When the main control board 71 receives an operation using the setting key switch 430, the main control board 71 sets a setting value corresponding to the content of the operation from among a plurality of setting values.

  The cabinet-side relay board 440 is a relay board for electrically connecting the main control board 71, the external concentrated terminal plate 73, the hopper device 40, the medal auxiliary storage switch 441, and the reset switch 442. The medal auxiliary storage switch 441 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage (not shown) is full of medals. The reset switch 442 is used to reset (initialize) various data of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  The power supply device 450 includes a power supply substrate 451 connected to the main control substrate 71 and a power switch 452 connected to the power supply substrate 451. The power switch 452 is pressed to supply the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 460 and the door relay terminal plate 460, the selector 461, the door open / close monitoring switch 462, the BET switch 11S, the settlement switch 13S. , A start switch 6S, a stop switch substrate 463, a gaming operation display substrate 470, and a sub relay substrate 75. The BET switch 11S, the settlement switch 13S, the start switch 6S, and the sub relay board 75 have been described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  The selector 461 is a device that selects whether or not the material, shape, and the like of the medals are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 22 to the hopper device 40. Although not shown, a medal sensor (input operation detection means) for detecting that a proper medal has passed is provided on a path through which the medal passes in the selector 461.

  The door open / close monitoring switch 462 outputs a security signal for notifying the open / close of the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. The stop switch substrate 463 (stop operation detection means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating reel and a circuit for displaying the stopable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch substrate 463 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 7L, 7C, 7R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 470 is connected to the information display 14 and inserted when receiving the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable, and when playing a game again, etc. It is a substrate for displaying the number of medals and the like on the information display 14. In addition, the game operation display substrate 470 is connected to the LED group 471, and the LED group 471 is, for example, a mark for displaying a game start based on a signal input from the game operation display substrate 470, a mark for performing replay, etc. Lights up.

  Sub control board 72 is connected to main control board 71 via door relay terminal plate 460 and sub relay board 75. The pachi-slot machine 1 also has speakers 9L and 9R, various LEDs 101, a touch sensor 201a, and a display unit 110 connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 75.

  The pachi-slot machine 1 further includes a ROM cartridge substrate 82 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 480 connected to the sub control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 82 and the liquid crystal relay substrate 480 are accommodated in the sub control substrate case together with the sub control substrate 72.

  The ROM cartridge substrate 82 is a substrate for managing data for effect image (video), sound, light, and communication. The liquid crystal relay substrate 480 is a substrate that relays connection wiring between the sub control substrate 72 and the display unit 100.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration of the sub control circuit mounted on the sub control substrate 72 is the same as that shown in FIG. FIG. 117 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a main control circuit of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (A), the main control circuit is mainly configured by the microcomputer 30 mounted on the main control board 71. The microcomputer 30 includes a main CPU 31, a main ROM 32 and a main RAM 33.

  The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table, data for transmitting various control instructions (commands) to the sub control circuit mounted on the sub control board 72, and the like. In addition, a plurality of minimum game time relating to the unit game is stored in the main ROM 32.

  The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by the execution of the control program.

  A clock pulse generating circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36 and a sampling circuit 37 are connected to the main CPU 31. Clock pulse generation circuit 34 and frequency divider 35 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 31 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates random numbers (for example, 0 to 65535) within a predetermined range. The sampling circuit 37 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

<Percentage indicator>
Next, the configuration of the ratio indicator 422 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above in FIG. 116, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has the ratio indicator 422 for displaying various ratios. FIG. 118 (A) shows an example of attachment of the ratio indicator 422, and FIG. 118 (B) shows the contents displayed on the ratio indicator 422.

(Configuration of percentage display)
As shown in FIG. 118, the ratio display 422 is constituted by a four-digit seven-segment LED, and the upper two digits indicate the type of ratio to be displayed, as described later with FIG. 118 (B). Indicates the value of the ratio. The ratio indicator 422 is provided inside the case 60 of the pachislot machine 1, for example, when an administrator (such as a store clerk at a game arcade) checks whether the pachislot machine 1 has not been tampered with. At this time, it is preferable that the ratio indicator 422 be provided inside the main control board case covering the main control board 71 in order to prevent the ratio indicator 422 from being tampered with.

  As a specific attachment example, as shown in FIG. 118 (A-1), the ratio indicator 422 may be mounted on the main control board 71, and is shown in FIG. 118 (A-2). As shown in FIG. 118 (A-3), a seven-segment display as a ratio indicator 422 may be used as mounted on another substrate (ratio display substrate) connected to the main control substrate 71. The LED unit may be attached by connecting it to the main control board. In any case, as shown in FIG. 118 (A), it is preferable to be provided inside the main control board case together with the main control board 71.

Although a sealing seal is usually attached to the main control board case, when the proportion display 422 is provided in the main control board case, the visibility of the proportion display 422 is impaired by the sealing seal. In order not to do so, it is preferable to stick a sealing seal. Furthermore, a caulking recording sticker is also affixed to the main control board case. The caulking record seal is a seal in which a person in charge of opening the caulking record and a date entry field, the serial number of the main control board, and a two-dimensional code for identification used at the time of manufacture are described. Depending on the model, the seal of the two-dimensional code used at the time of manufacture may be additionally attached to the main control board case. It is preferable to set it as arrangement | positioning which the visibility of a ratio indicator does not lose also by sticking members, such as such a seal | sticker.
In addition, the front door (upper door 62a or the lower side) may be formed by a caulking member or a harness assembled to the main control board, or another board in the case of a board configuration in which a plurality of boards are arranged in a superimposed manner. When opening the door 62b), it is preferable to design it so that the visibility of the ratio indicator will not be impaired, which improves the efficiency of the confirmation operation of the ratio indicator of the administrator.

(Displayed content of percentage indicator)
Subsequently, a display example of the ratio indicator 422 will be described. As shown in FIG. 118 (B), the ratio indicator 422 includes a cumulative interval ratio, a continuous symbol ratio and a symbol ratio between the latest 6000 games, and a cumulative continuous symbol ratio and a symbol ratio. , Will be displayed. When displaying the specific section ratio of the total on the ratio display 422, “AU” is displayed in the upper two digits of the four-digit seven-segment LED, and the consecutive role ratio between the last 6000 games is displayed The upper two digits are displayed as "= r", and when displaying the percentage of characters between the last 6000 games, the upper two digits are displayed as "b" and the cumulative percentage of consecutive roles is displayed In the case of performing, the upper two digits are displayed as “Ar”, and when displaying the cumulative character ratio, the upper two digits are displayed as “Ab”. In the lower two digits of the four-digit seven-segment LED, the corresponding percentage is displayed in percentage.

  Here, the “specific section ratio” refers to the ratio of the number of games in the gaming state advantageous to the player to the number of games in all the gaming states (ie, the total number of games). In this case, the gaming state advantageous to the player may include, for example, a CZ having a high expectation of transition to the ART gaming state, in addition to the bonus state and the ART gaming state in the bonus operation (see FIG. 33). ).

The main control board 71 counts a total number of games indicating the number of games in all the gaming states and a specific number of games indicating the number of games in the gaming state advantageous to the player in a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33 The specific section ratio is calculated according to the equation shown below.
Specific section ratio = specific game frequency / total game frequency × 100

  In addition, the "continuous role ratio" refers to the first kind special role or the first kind special role with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states (that is, the total payout number). The ratio of the total number of medals paid out during operation of the bonus continuous actuation device.

The main control board 71 is a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33. The main control board 71 has a total payout number indicating the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states, and a first-class special role or a first-class special role The first specific game in-use payout number indicating the total number of medals paid out during operation of the bonus character continuous actuation device according to is counted, and the continuous bonus ratio is calculated by the following equation.
Continuous role ratio = number of first specified game payouts / total payouts × 100

  Also, the “character ratio” means that the total number of medals paid out during operation of any one of the medals with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states (ie, the total payout number) It means the ratio occupied. In addition, with any kind of goods, it is a kind of special kind of thing, a kind of thing continuous operating device pertaining to the first kind of special kind of thing, a kind second kind of special kind of thing, a kind continuous action related to the second kind of special kind of thing A device, or a regular item. In addition, since the player is in a state advantageous to the player during the ART gaming state or CZ, it may be included in the state in which any one of the features is in operation.

The main control board 71 is a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33. The main control board 71 has a total payout number indicating the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states, and a medal paid out while one of the prizes is in operation. The second specified game payout number indicating the total number of is counted, and the bonus ratio is calculated by the following equation.
Role ratio = second specified number of in-game payouts / total payouts × 100

  Also, "total" refers to the entire period from the installation of the pachislot machine 1 to the present, and "between the last 6000 games" refers to the period from the previous 6000 games to the present. When calculating the percentage of “total”, the main control board 71 may calculate the percentage using the counting result counted in the whole period, and when calculating the percentage of “the most recent 6000 games”, The main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting result counted in the period from the game before 6000 games to the present.

  The pachi-slot machine 1 is configured such that none of the counting items in the counter provided in the main RAM 33 is erased by power interruption. Specifically, the data is saved in the backup area provided in the main RAM 33 at the time of power interruption, and the data is read from the backup area and reset at the time of recovery. Thus, even in the general operation where the power is turned off after the store is closed and the power is turned on before the store is opened, data can be accumulated continuously from the time of installation.

  In addition, the right to replay may be considered to be the payout of the same number of medals as the medal used for the game, or may be considered to be the payout of 0 medals. In the calculation of the ratio described above, the calculation results may differ between calculation method A which regards the right of replay as payout of medals and calculation method B which does not consider the right of replay as payout of medals. For example, in the calculation of the ratio to the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states (total payout number), such as the continuous character ratio or character ratio, a calculation method A which regards the right to replay as a medal payout Then, the total number of payouts also increases by the number of times the replay is won, and as a result, the ratio decreases. On the contrary, in the calculation method B in which the right to replay is not considered to be the payout of medals, since the replay winning does not affect the total payout number, the ratio becomes high as a result. The difference between the calculation method A and the calculation method B becomes larger as the number of times the replay is won increases, and therefore, the larger the number of games increases.

Therefore, the ratio display 422 may switchably display the calculation result by the calculation method A and the calculation result by the calculation method B. In this case, the upper two-digit identifier when displaying the calculation result by the calculation method A and the upper two-digit identifier when displaying the calculation result by the calculation method B should be different. In addition, when there is a margin in the size of the substrate on which the ratio indicator 422 is provided, a 7-segment unit of the ratio indicator 422 may be added to display both at the same time.
Also, even in the case of displaying the ratio of consecutive roles and the ratio of roles on the setting screen (so-called hall menu) that can be displayed by the store manager, the results calculated by a plurality of calculation methods can be displayed similarly. Good.

(Displayed content of the percentage display (switched display))
The ratio display 422 switches and displays various ratios calculated by the main control board 71. The method of switching the content displayed on the ratio indicator 422 is arbitrary. For example, various ratios may be switched automatically at predetermined intervals, or according to the operation of the changeover switch 423 (see FIG. 116). The various ratios may be switched manually, or the automatic switching and the manual switching may be combined to switch the various ratios.

(Displayed content of percentage display (during error))
In the case of pachislot machines, rules have been made in the industry so as not to increase pacificity by hand, for example, the ratio of gaming state which is advantageous for the player to the entire game is not too high, and In order to be able to play in peace in the normal gaming state, medals are paid out in a predetermined amount or more not only in the advantageous gaming state but also in the normal gaming state, thereby lowering the base (so-called coin possession) at the normal time. There is a regulation that it should not be too much. The above-mentioned various ratios displayed on the ratio indicator 422 make it possible to confirm whether these regulations are satisfied. Although it may temporarily exceed the specified value of the regulation due to the continuous establishment of accidental bonus etc., from the statistical point of view, the value of the ratio shown on the display increases in line with the regulation as the number of games increases. It converges in the form close to the created design value. Therefore, when the number of trials is large, such as 100,000 times, if a value that deviates from the design value is still displayed, it can be inferred that the wrongdoing has occurred. In addition, when a large difference between the design value and the design value is frequently displayed only on a specific platform, the administrator can deduce that the specific platform has been tampered with, such as hanging an illegal substrate. Thus, whether the value displayed on the percentage indicator 422 exceeds the specified value functions as a clue for the administrator to detect fraud.

  Therefore, when various ratios displayed on the ratio indicator 422 exceed the specified value, it is preferable that the manager can appropriately grasp that. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned various proportions (specific section proportion, continuous combination proportion, combination part proportion) calculated by the main control board 71 are equal to or more than the specified value set with respect to the proportion. The display mode of the ratio in the ratio indicator 422 is made different between the case where it is present and the case where it is less than the specified value set for the ratio. For example, the ratio indicator 422 blinks and displays the ratio when it is equal to or more than the specified value, and lights and displays the ratio when it is less than the specified value. Thereby, the manager can grasp at a glance whether or not various proportions satisfy the specified value.

  In addition, when there is a ratio equal to or more than the specified value, that effect is notified to the external device (for example, the hall computer) (for example, notification that the specific section ratio exceeds the specified value) Good. Specifically, when there is a ratio equal to or greater than the specified value in the calculated ratio, the main control board 71 notifies the external device of the fact via the external concentrated terminal plate 73. When the output pin from the external concentrated terminal board 73 is limited, notification (that is, error output) is given to the external device using the output pin currently used as an error output. It is also good.

  It should be noted that just because there is a proportion that exceeds the specified value, it can not be immediately said that the act is fraudulent. Therefore, in the case of a model equipped with a first error output that is output when a suspected anomaly is detected as a strong anomaly and a second error output that is output when an anomaly that occurs in a normal game is detected, An error based on exceeding the value is preferably taken as a second error output. Here, the abnormality suspected to be a fraudulent act is, for example, RAM clear detection, RAM read / write impossibility, RAM software abnormality, magnetic detection, radio wave detection, communication abnormality, internal voltage abnormality, internal unaccompanied role When a prize abnormality that the symbol according to is displayed on the activated line is detected, or a payout at a timing when payment can not be originally detected, a setting value indicates a value other than six. In addition, with the abnormality which occurs with normal game, for example, the hopper empty which the medal of hopper device 40 reaches the bottom, the medal clogging detection of the discharge exit of hopper device 40, the medal overflow which the medal auxiliary storage becomes full, medal When a medal jam or medal backflow detection at the time of insertion is detected or the number of inserted medals is detected as an abnormal number such as four, the hall clerk opens the front door (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) by medal supply etc. For example, when it is detected that the wiring of the hopper is disconnected at the time of opening error or medal supply, etc.

  As described above, when the ratio equal to or more than the specified value exists, the administrator can perform various types of notification without looking at the ratio indicator 422 provided inside the housing 60 by performing predetermined notification to the external device. Since it is possible to determine whether the ratio satisfies the specified value, the burden on the administrator can be reduced.

(Displayed content of the percentage indicator (immediately after installation))
As immediately after the installation of the pachi-slot machine 1 until the total number of games reaches the predetermined number, the various ratios have a large blur width and move up and down greatly. Therefore, display modes of various proportions may be made different until the total number of games reaches the predetermined number. At this time, the predetermined number of times may be varied depending on the type of ratio to be calculated. For example, the percentage of the cumulative total is displayed in a different mode (for example, displayed in yellow) until the total number of games reaches "17,500", and after the total number of games reaches "17,500", While displaying in the normal mode (for example, displaying in red), the ratio between the latest 6000 games is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode until the total number of games reaches "6000 times", and the total number of games is After reaching "6000 times", it may be displayed in a normal manner.

  In addition, with regard to the output to the external device, it may not be performed until the total number of games reaches the predetermined number, even if various ratios are equal to or more than the specified value. Also in this case, the predetermined number of times may be varied depending on the type of ratio to be calculated.

(Modification of percentage indicator)
By the way, since the existing pachislot machine does not have the ratio indicator, in the attachment example of the ratio indicator shown in FIG. 118 (A), it is necessary to make a large modification to the existing pachislot machine. Therefore, a display provided in an existing pachislot machine may be used as a ratio display for displaying various ratios. Specifically, in the existing pachislot machine, a display (information display 14) that displays the number of stored medals (credits) and the number of medals paid out in the current game (disbursed number) Is provided. Therefore, when a special operation is performed on the pachislot machine, the type of the ratio to be displayed is displayed on the display unit (credit lamp 145 described later) for displaying the number of credits, and the display unit (described later The display on the display may be switchable so that the ratio of the type is displayed on the payout number lamp 146).

  Although the special operation is optional, the operation using a switch provided inside the housing 60 is preferable. This can prevent the player from accidentally performing a special operation.

<Information indicator>
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the configuration of the information display 14 including the instruction monitor for notifying the information of the stop operation by the main control board 71 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 119, the information display 14 includes an insert lamp 141, a start lamp 142, a replay lamp 143, a bet number lamp 144, a credit lamp 145, a payout number lamp 146, and an instruction monitor 147. And a limit lamp 148.

  The insert lamp 141 informs the player that the medal can be inserted by lighting up (or blinking (abbreviated below)), and the start lamp 142 lights up to play a game with the operation of the start lever 6 The player is notified that it is possible to start the game, and the replay lamp 143, when turned on, informs the player that the medals have been automatically inserted by activation of replay. In addition, the bet number lamp 144 informs the player of the number of medals betted by lighting up, and the credit lamp 145 makes the number of medals stored inside the pachislot machine 1 by lighting up (number of credits). To the player, and the payout number lamp 146 lights up to inform the player of the number of medals paid out as a result of the game (the number of payouts).

The instruction monitor 147 is configured to include a notification lamp 147a and a status indicator 147b (AT lamp). The notification lamp 147a is formed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and lights up in a mode uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to notify, thereby notifying the player of the information of the necessary stop operation. In addition, the status indicator 147b lights up to notify the player that the current gaming state is a gaming state (for example, ART gaming state) informing the player of an aspect of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player. .
In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the notification lamp 147a is provided separately from the credit lamp 145 and the payout number lamp 146, but without providing the notification lamp 147a, either the credit lamp 145 or the payout number lamp 146 The information on the stop operation may be notified using

In addition, the limit lamp 148 lights up when the gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time. If the gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time, there is a risk that the euphoria may be overwhelmed. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a long period, the ART gaming state is forcibly ended even before the duration of the ART gaming state expires. (Limit processing). The limit lamp 148 lights up when the ART gaming state is ended by the limit process, and informs the player that the limit process has been performed. In addition, the limit lamp 148 may blink when the limit processing is activated, and may light up when the limit processing is actually performed.
The details of the limit process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127.

  The insert lamp 141 to the limit lamp 148 are lit, blinked, and extinguished by an LED (not shown) provided on the back surface. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 controls the lighting, blinking and extinguishing of the LED to notify the player of various information regarding the game.

<Status indicator>
Next, referring to FIG. 120, the state indicator 147b provided in the information indicator 14 will be described. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example of a lighting timing pattern of the status indicator 147b.
In FIG. 120, timing T1 is the game start time, timing T2 is the reel rotation start time of the game, timing T3 is the first stop operation of the game, and timing T4 is the second stop of the game. The operation is performed, timing T5 is the third stop operation of the game, timing T6 is the stop of all reels of the game, timing T7 is the end of the game, and timing T8 is the start of the next game It's time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 120, at timing T1 (that is, at the start of the game), the transition lottery to a specific section (for example, ART gaming state) is won. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when winning the transition lottery to the specific section, the state indicator 147b is turned on during the winning game. For example, in the lighting pattern example 1, the state indicator 147b is lit at the start of the game (timing T1) in which the transition lottery to the specific section is won. Further, in the lighting pattern example 2, the status indicator 147b is turned on at the reel rotation start (timing T2) of the game won in the transition lottery to the specific section, and in the lighting pattern example 3, the transition lottery to the specific section is won. At the first stop operation of the played game (timing T3), the status indicator 147b is lighted, and in the lighting pattern example 4, the status indicator is displayed when all reels of the game stopped for winning the transition lottery to the specific section (timing T6) In the lighting pattern example 5, the state indicator 147b is turned on at the end of the game which is won by the transition lottery to the specific section (timing T7).

  In addition, the lighting pattern example shown in FIG. 120 is only an example, and in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the state indicator 147b may be turned on during the game winning the transition lottery to the specific section, and the timing thereof Is optional.

  By turning on the status indicator 147b during the game winning the transition lottery to the specific section in this way, the player can grasp that the transition lottery to the specific section has been won, so it is possible to play the subsequent game. It is preferable because it can have expectations.

(Improvement of notice by status indicator)
By the way, if the presence or absence of winning is notified only by turning on / off only one lamp, although the presence or absence of winning is immediately known, it is felt that the player only needs to turn on the lamp. As a result, the user may lose interest in other effects on a liquid crystal display device or the like. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give notice during the game without becoming monotonous that winning of the shift lottery to the specific section is achieved by the method described below.

(Development 1 for status indicator)
FIGS. 119 (B) and 119 (C) show another configuration example of the status indicator 147b. The status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 119 (B) has a plurality of lamps "a" to "i" which are respectively lit, blinked and extinguished, and based on the patterns of lighting, blinking and extinguishment of the plurality of lamps. , To inform that it has won the transition lottery to a specific section.

  As an example, when winning a transition lottery to a specific section, a plurality of lamps light up in a specific pattern (for example, "a" "c" "d" "h" "i" lights up), When not winning, a plurality of lamps light up with a pattern other than this specific pattern. The specific pattern is not limited to one, and may have a plurality of patterns. This makes it possible to make a deep notification, for example, as playing a game repeatedly and remembering the lighting pattern at the time of winning, as compared to the case in which the winning is notified when one lamp is simply turned on. The game characteristics such as can be realized.

  The presence or absence of the transition lottery may not be notified based on the lighting pattern, but may be based on the number of lit lamps. For example, when winning a transition lottery, a specific number of lamps of the plurality of lamps are turned on, and when not winning a transition lottery, a number other than the specific number of the plurality of lamps The lamp may be turned on. In addition, for example, when winning a transition lottery, a number of lamps of a specified number or more (or less than a specified number) of the plurality of lamps are turned on, and a plurality of lamps are not shot when a winning lottery is performed. The number of lamps less than (or more than) a specific number of the lamps may be turned on.

  Further, by controlling the lighting patterns of the plurality of lamps in accordance with the progress of the game, it is possible to use the plurality of lamps to perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of winning of the transition lottery. For example, when it is assumed that the lighting pattern notifying that the transition lottery has been won is "all lamps are on", the progress of the game (start operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation) By increasing or decreasing the number of lighted lamps according to the time when all the reels are stopped, etc., it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning of the transition lottery according to the progress of the game.

(Development 2 for status indicator)
The status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 119 (C) is the same as the status indicator 147b in FIG. 119 (B) in that it has a plurality of lamps that light, blink, and extinguish, but in FIG. 119 (B) While a plurality of lamps in the status indicator 147b have no meaning as a whole, the status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 119 (C) is different in that the meaning is given as a whole. That is, in the status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 119 (C), for example, the maker name of the pachislot machine 1, the model name of the pachislot machine 1, the character name that became the motif of the pachislot machine 1 or the maker, the shape of the character, etc. Also used as a decoration is a character or shape that you want to impress the player. By using such a decoration for a plurality of lamps, it is possible to strongly memorize the characters and the shape that the decoration represents for the player, leading to an improvement in brand power.

  Even in this case, by controlling the lighting pattern and the number of lamps to be lit, it is possible to obscure the presence or absence of the transition lottery and to control the lighting patterns of the plurality of lamps according to the progress of the game. Then, it is possible to perform an effect that indicates the degree of expectation of the transition lottery.

  Note that, depending on the pachislot machine, there may be a plurality of types of specific sections different in degree of advantage for the player as the specific section, and there may be transition to any specific section based on the result of the transition lottery. For example, in a pachislot machine having an ART gaming state and a CZ, a pachislot machine in which the gaming state is shifted to the ART gaming state or CZ based on the result of transition lottery, or an ART gaming state and an initial game A pachislot machine or the like may be considered which has an ART gaming state of which the number is 100 games, and which shifts the gaming state to the ART gaming state of the initial game number determined with the transition lottery.

  Here, when using a plurality of lamps as in the above-described devices 1 and 2, the plurality of lamps (state indicators 147b) are lit or extinguished in different combinations of patterns according to the type of the specific section won by the transition lottery. It is also possible to let As an example, when the initial game number wins the ART gaming state of 50 games, the state indicator 147b lights up with the first lighting pattern, and the initial game number wins the ART gaming state of 100 games. The state indicator 147b may be turned on in a second lighting pattern different from the first lighting pattern.

  As a result, since the lighting pattern differs according to the type of the specific section, it is possible to increase the variation of the lighting pattern of the state indicator 147b. From the viewpoint of the player, it is difficult to accurately grasp the content of each lighting pattern by increasing the variation of the lighting pattern, so that the interest in other effects on the liquid crystal display device etc. is not lost.

  Conversely, the plurality of lamps (status indicators 147b) may be turned on or off in the same combination pattern regardless of the type of the specific section won by the transition lottery. In such control, since the lighting pattern is the same regardless of the type of the winning particular section, the type of the winning specific section can not be grasped from the lighting pattern. Some skilled players may have memorized the lighting patterns of a plurality of lamps. Therefore, there are a specific section (for example, a long ART gaming state such as 50 games) which is truly advantageous for the player, and a specific section (for example, the ART gaming state which ends in one game) which is not very advantageous for the player. By providing the lighting pattern of the state indicator 147b the same in any of these specific sections, it is possible to make it impossible to grasp the type of the specific section that has been won.

  Also, as a consideration for beginners, the contents of each lighting pattern may be displayed on the waist panel 25 or the like. For example, the waist panel 25 of a pachislot machine that is shipped to a store with a large number of beginners, such as low-rental ball stores, without displaying the content of the lighting pattern on the waist panel 25 of a design introduced generally. The display of the lighting pattern may be displayed. In addition, the purchasing store side may be able to order a desired waist panel 25 from the manufacturer based on the customer base. This makes it possible to notify or not give notice of the contents of the lighting pattern according to the customer base of the game arcade.

  Since the design change of the lumbar panel 25 does not require testing by a testing organization, and the cost of manufacturing and development is not large, a pachislot machine with appropriate specifications can be provided by simple panel replacement only in accordance with the market environment. Can be preferred. It should be noted that not a change in design of the lumbar panel 25 itself but a sheet member that can be attached or replaced with a predetermined seal member may switch the notification of the content of the lighting pattern or not. Further, the place where the content of the lighting pattern is displayed may be a place other than the waist panel 25 as long as it is a place that can be recognized by the player during the game. However, it is desirable that the location be easy for the player to see.

(Device 3 for status indicator)
Further, in order to prevent the presence or absence of a win from being recognized by whether or not one lamp is lit, the status indicator 147b may be disposed at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize. The position where it is difficult to visually recognize may be, for example, any place such as the medal receiver 16, the lumbar panel 25, the side surface of the housing 60, the back of the medal insertion slot 22 or the like. In addition, by covering the status indicator 147b with an opaque cover and making the status indicator 147b visible only from the hole (the observation hole) made in the cover, the status indicator 147b is made less visible. be able to. Alternatively, for example, a bill clip or a clip for a parking lot service ticket may be provided in the pachi-slot machine 1, and a status indicator 147b may be provided behind the clip.

(Driving device 4 for status indicator)
In addition, when the status indicator 147b that reports the success or failure of the transition lottery to the specific section is at the same position, it will be immediately understood if only the location is seen, so even if the position of the status indicator 147b is switched Good. As a specific method, it is considered that at least a plurality of lamps (LEDs) of the pachi-slot machine 1 have a function of the status indicator 147b, and the lamps notifying the success or failure of the transition lottery be different for each time Be Thereby, for example, the lamp in the upper right portion fulfills the function of the status indicator 147b at a certain timing, but the lamp in the lower left portion can fulfill the function of the status indicator 147b at another timing. As a result, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the transition lottery is successful or not only from the lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b, and it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in other effects on the liquid crystal display device or the like.

(Ingenuity from gameplay)
Then, with reference to FIG. 121, the device from the game nature regarding the method of making it hard to understand that winning the transition lottery to the specific section will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, "F_3 alternative bell _1st", "F_3 alternative bell _2nd", and "F_3 alternative bell _3rd" are provided as a press order, and nine medals are paid out when the press order is correct (bell A combination of symbols is displayed), and at the time of incorrect answer in the pressing order, 0 or 1 medal is paid out (a combination of symbols of a bell spill or a first shot is displayed). And, in the ART gaming state, when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is notified that the pressing order of the correct answer according to the pressing combination. Therefore, during the ART gaming state, by playing the game according to the notification, medals exceeding the medals (for example, three sheets) used for the game are paid out (for example, nine sheets).

As a measure from the game nature, first, a push order is also provided in which medals equal to or less than the medals used in the game are paid out even if the push order is correct. In the example shown in FIG. 121, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), a push order such as “F_3 option 1 sheet combination_1st”, “F_3 option 1 sheet combination_2nd”, and “F_3 option 1 sheet combination_3rd” is provided. When “F_3 option 1 sheet combination _1st” to “F_3 option 1 sheet combination 3rd” are correct in pressing order, a combination of symbols of the first appearance is displayed, one medal is paid out, and the pressing order is not correct. When the correct answer, the combination of the symbol of the out is displayed and 0 medals are paid out.
In addition, even if it is a pressing order correct answer, the medal should not be increased if the pushing order is newly provided, and the medals of the number (third quantity) equal to or less than the number of medals used for the game at the pressing order correct are paid out. It is only necessary that a smaller number (fourth number) of medals be paid out than the number (third number) at the time of incorrect pushing order, or no medals be paid out (ie, 0 pieces).

  In addition, in the device from the game property, at least two types of ART gaming states are provided as an ART gaming state. Specifically, all of the key orderers ("F_3 choice 1 sheet hand _1st" to "F_3 choice 1 sheet hand _3rd" and "F_3 alternative bell _1st" to "F_3 alternative bell_3rd") are determined as internal winning combinations When the ART game state which announces the pressing order of the correct answer when being played, and "F_3 choice 1 sheet hand _1st" to "F_3 choice 1 sheet hand _3rd" of the pressing order is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct answer is given A push order is notified, and when one of “F_3 alternative bell_1st” to “F_3 alternative bell_3rd” is determined as an internal winning combination, a single winning combination ART game state in which the correct push order is not notified is provided.

  Then, in the device from the game property, the state indicator 147b is turned on regardless of whether the gaming state is the ART gaming state or the 1-piece ART gaming state. The lighting pattern of the state indicator 147b may be different between the ART gaming state and the one-piece ART gaming state, or the same lighting pattern may be used.

  Although it is possible to notify that the current gaming state is the gaming state in which the present gaming state is notified of the pressing role by such a device, it is truly advantageous for the player only from the state indicator 147b. It is possible to make it impossible to grasp whether it is the ART gaming state or the 1-piece winning ART gaming state.

  Although the transition to the ART gaming state that is truly advantageous to the player is performed by winning the transition lottery to a specific section, the transition to the one-card ART gaming state that is not necessarily advantageous to the player Can be done arbitrarily.

  In the example shown in FIG. 121 (B), all the games other than the ART gaming state are in the one-piece ART gaming state. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (B), in the eleventh game, since the transition lottery to a specific section (that is, the transition lottery to the ART gaming state) is won, the eleventh and subsequent games are played Is in the ART gaming state. During this ART gaming state, there are 3 options 1 sheet combination ("F3 option 1 sheet combination _1st" to "F_3 option 1 sheet combination _3rd") and 3 options bell ("F3 option bell _1st" to "F3 option bell _3rd") Even if any of them is determined as the internal winning combination, notification of the pressing order of the correct answer is performed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (B), all the games before winning the transition lottery to the ART gaming state are set as the one-card ART gaming state. During the one-in-one ART game mode, in the game (first game) in which the third choice one-in-one combination is determined to be the internal winning combination, notification of pushing order of the correct answer is performed, while the third choice bell is internally won In the game determined as the role (second game), notification of the pressing order of the correct answer is not performed.

  As described above, when all the games other than the ART gaming state are set to the one-piece ART gaming state, the state indicator 147b is always lit regardless of whether or not the transition lottery to the ART gaming state is won. As a result, the player can not know that the transition lottery has been won only by turning on / off the status indicator 147b.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (C), among the games other than the ART gaming state, only the game in which the 3-option 1-piece winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination is made into a 1-piece winning ART gaming state, , ART gaming state and one piece ART game state is not in any state (normal). Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (C), in the eleventh game, since the transition lottery to a specific section (that is, the transition lottery to the ART gaming state) is won, the eleventh and subsequent games are played Is in the ART gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (C), among the games before winning the transition lottery to the ART gaming state, only the game in which the 3-option 1- character combination is determined as the internal winning combination is 1-film combination ART The game state is set, and the other games are set as the normal game state. Specifically, since the 3-option 1-piece combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the first game, the gaming state of the first game is set to the 1-piece combination ART gaming state, and the notification of the pressing order of the correct answer is made. Is going. On the other hand, in the second game, since the 3-option 1-piece winning combination is not determined as the internal winning combination, the normal gaming state is set, and notification of the pressing order of the correct answer is not performed.

  As described above, even if only one game in which one of the three game choices among the games other than the ART game state is determined as the internal winning combination is made into one game role ART game state, the state display 147 b has three choices. In the game in which one winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the player lights up regardless of whether or not the transition lottery to the ART gaming state is won, so the player can turn on / off the status display 147b. You just can't figure out that you have won the transition lottery. In addition, even if it is said that one piece ART game state, it will be informed of the mode of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player, so as shown in FIG. 121 (B), if always one piece ART ART game state, The notification game state in which the notification of the pushing order is performed continues for a long time, and there is a possibility that the irritability of the game may be heightened. In this respect, as shown in FIG. 121 (C), a notification game is realized by setting only one game in which the 3-option one-piece combination of games other than the ART gaming state is determined as the internal winning combination to a one-piece combination ART gaming state. The period of the state can be limited, and it is possible to prevent the prosperity from being increased unnecessarily.

<Basic game flow>
Subsequently, a basic game flow of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence or absence of notification in the pachislot machine 1. In FIG. 122, only the gaming state regarding the presence or absence of notification is shown, and the transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence or absence of the operation of the bonus is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 122, the pachislot machine 1 has a normal section which does not notify the player of the mode of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player, and a specific section which reports the mode of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player. Note that the normal section corresponds to, for example, the normal gaming state in the normal gaming state in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, and the specific section corresponds to, for example, the normal game in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. The CZ and ART gaming states in the state correspond (see FIG. 33).

(Transition from normal section to specific section)
The transition from the normal section to the specific section is made by winning the transition lottery to the specific section. Here, the transition lottery to the specific section includes both the transition lottery to the CZ and the transition lottery to the ART gaming state. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transition lottery to the specific section is performed based on the information having no difference in the setting value. “Information with no difference in setting values” means a combination (setting non-questioning role) determined as an internal winning combination with the same probability in all setting values in internal lottery processing, or in all setting values when all reels are stopped. It includes at least a combination of symbols (combination of symbols without setting difference) to be displayed with the same probability.

  That is, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the set non-questioning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the transition lottery to the specific section is performed, and the combination with the set difference (setting combination) is determined as the internal combination. In this case, the transition lottery to a specific section is not performed. Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when combinations of symbols having no setting difference are displayed when all reels are stopped, transition lottery to a specific section is performed, and combinations of symbols having setting differences are displayed. In the case, the transition lottery to the specific section is not performed.

  In addition, transition lottery to a specific section is performed based on a perfect probability that is predetermined and does not change at all. The “predetermined and completely unchanged perfect probability” means a probability that does not fluctuate at least based on the set value (that is, a probability that the probability of winning regardless of the set value).

  Thus, the pachislot machine 1 according to this embodiment performs the transfer lottery performed based on the “information having no difference in the setting value” with the same probability regardless of the setting value. The degree of expectation regarding the transition can be made the same for each set value, and the difference in the out-of-the-box performance can be suppressed to the winning probability of the set difference with the set difference.

(Example of lottery table used for migration lottery)
Here, an example of a lottery table used for transition lottery to a specific section is shown in FIG. FIG. 124 (A) is an internal lottery table for determining an internal winning combination, and FIG. 124 (B) is a transition lottery table for performing transition lottery to a specific section based on the internal winning combination. In the following, the internal lottery table sets the probability denominator to 32768, and the transition lottery table sets the probability denominator to 256.

  As in the example shown in FIG. 124 (A), the internal lottery table defines information on lottery values corresponding to each combination. Here, the combination determined by the lottery using the internal lottery table includes a set combination in which the lottery value is different depending on the set value, and a set non-matcher having the same lottery value regardless of the set value. In the example shown in FIG. 124 (A), the combinations “F_BB1” and “F_Maintenance A” etc. are set difference players whose lottery values are different depending on the set value, and the combinations “F_Sabo 1” “F_Cilirip” “F_BB1 + F_reach eyes” ", Etc." is an unfixed part in the same lottery value regardless of the set value. In the pachislot machine 1, when the set bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the shift lottery to the specific section is not performed, and when the set non-question is determined as the internal winning combination, the shift lottery to the specific section is performed. be able to. Note that not performing transition lottery to a specific section includes not only performing transition lottery itself but also performing transition lottery but not necessarily winning. In addition, the transition lottery to a specific section is not necessarily performed when one of the set non-questions is decided as the internal winning combination, and the setting non-question to perform transition lottery and the setting non-question to not perform the transition lottery. A role may be provided.

  Subsequently, as in the example shown in FIG. 124 (B), the transition lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the transition lottery for each setting non-questioning role determined as the internal winning combination. As described above, since the transition lottery to a specific section is performed based on the complete probability which is predetermined and does not change at all, the information on the lottery value defined in the transition lottery table is the same regardless of the setting value. It is a value.

  It should be noted that the “previously determined complete probability that does not change at all” may further include that the probability is uniquely defined for “information having no difference in setting value”. In recent pachislot machines, there are cases where it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to win the transition lottery and a state in which it is hard to win. In such a case, in the case of performing the shift lottery with "a probability uniquely determined for the information having no difference in the set value", for example, at the time of winning of the setting non-question regardless of any gaming state It will carry out the transition lottery that wins with the same probability. On the contrary, in the case of performing transition lottery with “probability that is not uniquely determined probability with respect to information having no difference in setting value (that is, fluctuation probability)”, for example, at the time of winning of setting no question Transition lottery winning at a probability according to the current gaming state, that is, when the current gaming state is a high probability state, performing a transition lottery winning at a high probability, the current gaming state is a low probability state In the case, it will be a transition lottery that wins with low probability.

(Method of realizing CZ in case of carrying out migration lottery with unambiguously defined probability)
By the way, in the case of performing the transition lottery in such a uniquely determined probability, the transition lottery which wins with the same probability is performed regardless of the gaming state, as in the CZ (chance zone). In order to make it easy to shift to the ART gaming state, it is necessary to devise a device. Subsequently, an example of a method of realizing CZ will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 125 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the ART lottery method in CZ. For example, the probability of being determined as an internal winning combination during CZ is notified of the pressing order of the correct answer of the pressing order without a setting difference, and the transition lottery to the ART gaming state is performed at the pressing order winning without a setting difference. It will be performed based on the combination of the displayed symbols. Specifically, as in the transition lottery table shown in FIG. 125 (A), when combinations of symbols of bells are displayed at the time of stopping all reels, transition lottery to ART gaming state is performed, and a bell spilled eye or 1 is displayed. When the combination of the symbols on the pieces is displayed, the transition to the ART gaming state is not performed.

  If you compare the normal section and the CZ, although the winning probability of the regular part is the same, since the pressing order of the correct answer is not notified in the normal section, it is difficult to display the combination of symbols for which the transition lottery is performed, On the other hand, since the pressing order of the correct answer is notified during CZ, a combination of symbols for which transition lottery is to be performed is easily displayed. As a result, during CZ, the frequency at which the transition lottery is performed is higher than that in the normal section, and even in the case where the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability, the CZ (chance easily shifts to ART gaming state) Zone) can be realized.

  FIG. 125 (B) is a diagram showing another example of the ART lottery method in CZ. In the pachislot machine 1, by shifting the RT gaming state, it is possible to change the winning probability of the role related to replay (replay). Therefore, by making the winning probability of a part of the roles having no setting difference among the roles involved in replaying different in the RT gaming state, the ART gaming in one RT gaming state and another RT gaming state Transition to the state The frequency at which the lottery occurs may be different.

  Specifically, in the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 125 (B), the combination “F_Cilirip” is a setting unquestioned party without a setting difference, and as in the transition lottery table shown in FIG. 125 (B), this combination When "F_Chilli Lip" is determined to be an internal winning combination, a transition lottery to the ART gaming state is performed. Here, referring to the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 125 (B), although the combination “F_Cilirip” has no setting difference, the winning probability differs according to the RT gaming state, and the RT2 gaming state is different than the RT1 gaming state. It is determined with high probability as an internal winning combination.

  Therefore, in the RT2 gaming state, the frequency at which the transition lottery is performed is higher than that in the RT1 gaming state, and even in the case where the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability, the CZ easily shifts to the ART gaming state. (Chance zone) can be realized. More specifically, the RT2 gaming state can be used as CZ.

(Another example of the method of realizing CZ in the case of carrying out migration lottery with an unambiguously defined probability)
Subsequently, FIG. 125 (C) shows another example of the method of realizing CZ. In the method shown in FIG. 125 (C), CZ is realized using MB (character continuous actuation device related to the second kind special character). The pachislot machine 1 according to this method has a single bonus (hereinafter referred to as "SB") and a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as "RB") as prizes which are also extracted in the MB. A medal exceeding the specified number is paid out, (B) SB is established in MB (decided as internal winning combination or winning), (C) RB is established in MB (decided as internal winning combination, Or any of the three conditions of winning) must be satisfied. Then, the pachi-slot machine 1 shifts to the ART gaming state after the end of the MB according to the satisfied end condition. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 125 (C), when MB ends by establishment of RB, it shifts to ART gaming state after MB ends, and when MB ends under other conditions, it becomes ART gaming state after MB ends. Will not migrate.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 125 (C), if RB is established before MB termination (so-called punk) due to SB establishment or receipt of the prescribed number of medals is received, transition to ART gaming state is made. It will function as a chance zone (CZ) for winning.
In addition, since it is possible to give priority to and stop the combination of symbols having payouts of medals even in the game where RB is determined as an internal winning combination as reel stop control in MB, payout of medals exceeding the prescribed number is There are cases where the same game is the same as the game in which the RB was determined as the internal winning combination. In such a case, it is preferable to shift to the ART gaming state as the end condition (C) is satisfied.

  In the example shown in FIG. 125 (C), (1) when the MB is won in the normal section, the gaming state shifts to the MB which is CZ. (2) When medals exceeding the prescribed number are paid out during MB, or when SB is established, MB which is CZ ends, and the gaming state shifts to the normal section. On the other hand, (3) When RB is determined as an internal winning combination during MB, MB which is CZ ends and the gaming state shifts between RB flags. Then, (4) when the RB wins between the RB flags, the gaming state shifts to the RB, and when (5) the RB ends thereafter, the ART gaming state is started at a high RT that occurs triggered by the RB end. . When RB is won in a game in which RB in MB is determined as an internal winning combination, RB is started from the next game after MB is finished without passing between RB flags.

In such a pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of MB (functioning as CZ) in a normal section, and the winning probability of RB (triggering transition to ART gaming state) in MB are common to all setting values. In the MB, the winning probability of the SB (which triggers the termination of the CZ) may be a common probability in all setting values, or may be a different probability depending on the setting values. For example, when making the winning probability of SB in MB different according to the setting value, the higher the setting, the lower the winning probability of SB, and the longer the MB continues, the ART gaming state in CZ (MB) It is possible to increase the degree of expectation of transition to the market, and make it possible to enrich the variation of the ball specifications.
In addition, although the winning probability of RB which becomes a transition opportunity to ART gaming state can be set arbitrarily according to the relationship with other ending conditions, it is better the game balance is better if it is the probability that the winning can be expected in reality For this reason, it is preferable to set RB as the internal winning combination with relatively high probability in MB by reducing the prescribed number to 10 to 30 or the like.

(Another configuration example of the main control board)
Here, internal lottery using the internal lottery table and transition lottery using the transition lottery table are executed in the main control board 71. In the main control board 71, since the capacity of the storage means (main ROM) is limited, when the transition lottery is performed in addition to the internal lottery, the variation of the lottery becomes monotonous. Then, the improvement method of the main control board 71 is shown below.

  FIG. 117 (B) is a diagram showing another configuration example of the main control board. In FIG. 117 (B), the main control circuit is provided with a first main control board 71a and a second main control board 71b. The first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are connected so as to enable two-way communication by serial communication or the like. The configurations of the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are the same as those shown in FIG. 117, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  Thus, a plurality of first main control boards 71a and second main control boards 71b are provided as the main control boards, and for example, internal lottery using the internal lottery table is performed in the first main control boards 71a, and the second main control is performed. By performing migration lottery using the migration lottery table on the substrate 71b, the capacity of the storage means used for each lottery can be sufficiently secured, and it is possible to perform lottery with a large variety.

  In FIG. 117 (B), although the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are configured to be capable of bi-directional communication, the present invention is not limited to this. The first main control board 71a is not limited to this. The upstream and second main control boards 71b may be configured to be able to communicate in only one direction (from the first main control boards 71a to the second main control boards 71b) with the second main control boards 71b being downstream. Communication in only one direction can reduce the communication load as compared to bidirectional communication.

  When the internal lottery and the transfer lottery are performed on different substrates (the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b), the order of performing the internal lottery and the transfer lottery is arbitrary. For example, the transfer lottery may be performed first on one substrate and then the internal lottery may be performed on another substrate. Conversely, after the first internal lottery is performed on one substrate, the transfer lottery may be performed on the other substrate You may do it. In this case, in the case of performing the migration lottery first, since the result of the internal lottery (internal winning combination) can not be grasped at the time of the migration lottery, the migration lottery is performed without being influenced by the result of the internal lottery. For example, regardless of the internal winning combination, in the case of a specification that performs transition lottery with a predetermined probability for each unit game, such a configuration may be used. As a result, even if the fraudulent act of illegally entering winning combination information different from the actual internal winning combination is made, there is no effect on the result of the transition lottery, and therefore the fraudulent action of generating a favorable transition lottery result Can be suppressed. Further, in the case of performing the transfer lottery first, since the internal winning combination is not relevant, the lottery based on the information having the same setting value can be performed only by performing the lottery having the same setting value.

  On the contrary, in the case of carrying out the internal lottery earlier, the transition lottery may be performed with reference to the internal winning combination determined as a result of the internal lottery, and the internal winning determined as a result of the internal lottery. It is also possible to perform the migration lottery without referring to the role. When performing transition lottery with reference to the internal winning combination, it is possible to perform lottery based on information having no difference in the setting value by performing transition lottery based on the setting non-question as described above. When the transition lottery is performed without referring to the winning combination, the lottery based on the information having no difference in the setting value can be performed by performing the lottery having no difference in the setting value.

  FIG. 117 (C) is a diagram showing still another configuration example of the main control board. Since the capacity of the storage means (main ROM) is insufficient in the main control board 71, in FIG. 117 (C), one main control board 71 is used like the first main ROM 32a and the second main ROM 32b. A plurality of main ROMs are provided on the top. In this case, for example, various tables used for internal lottery are stored in the first main ROM 32a, and various tables used for migration lottery are stored in the second main ROM 32b. A sufficient capacity can be secured, and a lot of variation can be performed.

(Transition from a specific section to a normal section)
Subsequently, returning to FIG. 122, the transition from the specific section to the normal section will be described. The transition from the specific section to the normal section is made when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. As the end condition of the specific section, any conditions such as the number of games in the specific section, the number of navigations performed during the specific section, the number of medals paid out during the specific section, the number of differences may be used. . In addition, the termination condition may be different depending on the type of the specific section, and for example, the termination condition may be different between CZ and ART gaming state.

  Thus, the specific section ends basically when the end condition is satisfied, but exceptionally, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the specific section continues for a long period, the end condition is not satisfied. Transition from a specific section to a normal section (limit processing), and even when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied, if navigation for the guaranteed number is not performed, then for the guaranteed number The navigation is continued without ending the specific section, and the specific section is shifted to the normal section in response to the navigation having the guaranteed number of times being performed (navigation processing).

(Limit processing)
Here, with reference to FIG. 126 and FIG. 127, the limit process in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 126 is a view showing a method of counting the number of limit games in a specific section, and FIG. 127 is a view showing a flow of limit processing in the specific section.
In a pachislot machine, if a specific section such as CZ or ART gaming state is continuously performed for a long period of time, the profit obtained by the player during the specific section increases and balances the entire profit. Therefore, it is necessary to reduce the profits obtained by the player during the normal section, which will increase the gambling of the game. Therefore, in recent years, it has been required to limit the duration of the advantageous state for the player to a certain period. The limit process is a process for suppressing the duration of a specific section that is advantageous for the player to a certain period (for example, 1500 games).

(How to count the number of limit games)
First, with reference to FIG. 126, a method of counting the number of limit games in a specific section when performing limit processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 126A, when the specific section continues, the main control board 71 counts the number of continued games (the number of limit games). For example, when the ART gaming state is continuing, the main control board 71 counts the number of limit games by adding the number of continuing games one by one. Also, for example, when transitioning to the ART gaming state after transitioning from the normal section to the CZ, at least the CZ and the ART gaming state are included in the specific section as described above, so the main control board 71 continues the CZ game Then, the sum of the number and the number of consecutive ART gaming states played continuously is counted as the number of limit games.

  By the way, depending on the pachislot machine, as shown in FIG. 126 (B), when transitioning to the ART gaming state or CZ (specific section), the standby section may be sandwiched without immediately shifting. For example, in a pachislot machine in which the RT gaming state is made different between the normal section and the specific section, since it is necessary to start the specific section after changing the RT gaming state, the standby section may be inserted once. As a specific case, there is a possibility that a stand-by section may be inserted at the time of transition from a normal section to a specific section when winning a transition lottery to a specific section, and a bonus (character) is given in the specific section. In the case of return to a specific section after the end of the bonus when activated, there is a possibility that the standby section is sandwiched.

  For such a standby section, the main control board 71 may count as the number of limit games, or may not count. That is, the main control board 71 may count the games for the number of times from “A1” to “An” in FIG. 126B as the number of limit games, or may not count as the number of limit games. Good.

  Further, the main control board 71 may change whether or not to count as the number of limit games according to the type of the standby section. For example, in the case of winning the transition lottery to a specific section, a specific section inserted in the transition from the normal section to the specific section is not counted as the number of limit games, and a bonus (character item) is activated during the specific section. In the case of returning to a specific section after the end of the bonus, the standby section may be counted as the number of limit games, assuming that the entire section is in a series of advantageous states.

  Further, the main control board 71 may change whether or not to count as the number of limit games according to the type of notification (navi) performed during the standby section. When providing a standby section for transitioning the RT gaming state, it is necessary to at least give notification for transitioning the RT gaming state during the standby section, but the notification about the pushing order for the increase or decrease of the medal is not necessarily required. There is no need to do it. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, it is necessary to notify the pushing order "pushing order bell" related to the increase or decrease of the medals because the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes will cause the RT gaming state to transition. In the case where the combination of the bell spilled symbol is controlled so as not to transition the RT gaming state, the pushing order "pushing order bell" related to increase and decrease of the medals may not necessarily be notified during the standby section.

  Therefore, the main control board 71 counts the number of limit games as being in an advantageous state for the player in a standby section for informing the player about the pressing order pertaining to the increase or decrease of the medals, and the push on the increase or decrease of the medals. The number of limit games may not be counted for a standby section in which notification of the order is not made.

  Also, depending on the pachislot machine, as shown in FIG. 126 (C), if the combination relating to the bonus is determined as an internal winning combination during the ART gaming state or CZ (specific section), the flag of the bonus during the specific section There may be gaps and bonus states. The main control board 71 may count the games between these flags or in the bonus state as the number of limit games, or may not count them. That is, the main control board 71 counts the games for the number of times of “C1” to “Cn” in FIG. 126C and the games for the number of times of “D1” to “Dn” as counting the limit game number. It is also possible not to count as the number of limit games.

  In this case, while the main control board 71 counts the game during the flag as the number of limit games, the game in the bonus state may not count as the number of the limit games, and conversely, between the flags The game in the middle may not be counted as the number of limit games, while the game in the bonus state may be counted as the number of limit games. In addition, both the game during the flag and the game during the bonus state may be counted as the number of limit games, or conversely, both may not be counted as the number of limit games.

  Further, the main control board 71 may change whether or not to count as the number of limit games depending on the type of notification (navigation) performed between the flags. Specifically, the main control board 71 counts the number of limit games as the number of limit games, as it is in an advantageous state for the player, in the middle of the flags for giving notification about the pressing order according to increase or decrease of medals. The number of limit games may not be counted in the middle of the flag where notification of the pressing order according to increase or decrease is not performed.

  Further, the main control board 71 may change whether or not to count as the number of limit games according to the type of notification (navi) performed in the bonus state. Depending on the pachislot machine, it may be possible to win a pushing order (that is, a combination in which the number of medals paid out according to the pushing order is different) even in the bonus state. In such a pachislot machine, the player can gain more profit by informing the pushing order in the bonus state. Therefore, the main control board 71 counts the number of games in the bonus state as the number of limit games when notifying a mode of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player in the bonus state, and is advantageous for the player in the bonus state. When the mode of the stop operation is not notified, the game in the bonus state may not be counted as the number of limit games.

(Flow of limit processing)
Subsequently, the flow of the limit process will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 127 (A), when the number of limit games counted according to the above-described counting method reaches a fixed number of games (for example, 1500 games), the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section Let That is, when the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, the main control board 71 ends the specific section even when the number of games, the number of times of navigation, and the like still remain (when the end condition is not satisfied). .

  Then, with the end of the specific section, the main control board 71 performs initialization processing to initialize the value of the variable related to the occurrence of notification (navigation). In this initialization process, the RT gaming state may be maintained as it is or may be initialized to RT0 which is a low RT state. For example, in the RT gaming state for the ART gaming state, the RT gaming state in which the transition to the RT gaming state is not performed by the combination of symbols such as bell spill eyes and falling falls, and the game ends in the game of defined number of games or bonus win. In this case, even if the navigation is not generated due to the limit processing, a state advantageous to the high RT player continues, so it is desirable to set the gaming state to a low replay probability as the latter specification. In particular, in the case of an RT gaming state in which the defined game number is a large value such as 6000 games and continues to the next bonus substantially, it is possible to appropriately suppress euphoricity by causing the RT gaming state to fall by limit processing. it can.

  When performing limit processing in this way, the main control board 71 keeps the status indicator 147b lit until the limit game number reaches the fixed game number, the limit game number reaches the fixed game number, and the specific section is ended. Then, the status indicator 147b is turned off. Further, when the specific section is ended by the limit processing, the main control board 71 turns on the limit lamp 148 for a predetermined period thereafter. In addition, as a predetermined period, when performing a limit process at the time of completion | finish of the game in which the number of limit games reached the fixed number of games, it may be in the next game of the game in which the limit process was performed, for example. Further, as described above, the main control board 71 may blink the limit lamp 148 when the limit process is about to be activated, thereby informing the player that the limit process is about to be activated.

  Here, for example, when the games in the bonus state are also counted as the number of limit games, the number of limit games may reach a certain number of games in the bonus state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 127 (B), the main control board 71 may perform limit processing even in the bonus state to shift the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (C), the main control board 71 may perform the limit process at the timing when the bonus ends without performing the limit process in the bonus state. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 127 (B), the gaming state shifts from the specific section to the normal section at the timing when the number of limit games reaches the fixed number, and in the example shown in FIG. 127 (C) The game state is shifted from the specific section to the normal section at the timing when the number of games has reached the predetermined number of games and not at the timing when the bonus state has ended.

  Of course, when counting as the number of limit games during the game, the limit game number reaches a certain number during the standby section or during the flag, even during the standby section of the specific section or during the bonus flags. Then, the limit processing may be performed even during the standby section or during the flags, or the timing at which the standby section transitions to the specific section after the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, or the number of limit games is The limit processing may be performed at a timing when the game has reached a certain number of games, the bonus state is passed from between the flags, and a transition is made to a specific section.

(Signal output to external device during limit processing)
Further, when the specific section is ended by the limit processing, the main control board 71 outputs a predetermined signal indicating that to the external device (data counter or hall computer). By receiving the output of this signal, the hall side can grasp that the limit process has been performed in the pachislot machine, and can grasp new information which could not be grasped conventionally.
If the number of limit games has reached a certain number of games during the bonus state, the main control board 71 is set to the external device at the timing when the number of limit games has reached a certain number of games (that is, in the bonus state). The main control board 71 outputs a predetermined signal to the external device at the timing when the bonus state ends (that is, the main control board 71 outputs the bonus state during the specific section). When the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, a predetermined signal may be output to the external device at the end of the bonus state.

  Further, the main control board 71 is limited not only to a signal (limit signal) indicating that the limit processing has been performed when the limit processing has been performed the number of times exceeding the normally expected number of times in one pachislot machine 1 A signal (error signal) indicating that the limit process has been performed more than the expected number of times may be output to the external device. Specifically, when the number of times the limit game number reaches a certain number in the specific period (that is, the number of times the limit process is performed) reaches a predetermined number, the main control board 71 makes the external control specific. Output a signal. As an example, when limit processing is performed the number of times exceeding the assumption during the time from the power-on of pachislot machine 1 to the power-off, main control board 71 also sends an error signal to the external device together with the limit signal. Output. Thereby, for example, when the limit processing is performed an unusual number of times such as 10 times during one day, the hole side can grasp that.

(Navi guarantee processing)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 128, the navigation guarantee process in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a flow of navigation guarantee processing at the end of a specific section.
In the case of a pachislot machine that manages the termination condition of a specific section by the number of games, if the number of times a combination (for example, push order bell etc.) to be notified during the specific section is determined as an internal winning combination is small, There are few medals to be paid out, and the player may feel a sense of loss. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when moving to a specific section, the minimum number of times of navigation is guaranteed, and the navigation is continued without ending the specific section until the navigation for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

  Here, in FIG. 128, the ending condition of the specific section is managed by the number of games, and in FIGS. 128 (A) to (C), the ending condition of the specific section is satisfied at the end of 50 games. It is assumed that In the example shown in FIG. 128 (A), at the time when the specified section continues for 50 games (that is, the end condition is satisfied), notification (navigation) for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed yet. In such a case, the main control board 71 continues the specific section even if the end condition is satisfied. In the example shown in FIG. 128 (A), after that, the combination of the notification target (for example, pushing order bell) is determined as the internal winning combination in the 54th game, and notification is given to the combination of the notification target. The main control board 71 ends the specific section when the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed in accordance with the notification. On the other hand, the main control board 71 continues without ending the specific section even when the notification for the number of times of guarantee has not been performed even by the notification after the end condition of the specific section is satisfied.

  By the way, in the pachislot machine, there are provided a plurality of types of push orderers with different numbers of medals paid out at the time of correct order as the push order role, and the main control board 71 May report the order of pressing the correct answer. For example, medals do not increase even if the correct order is given (ie, the number of payouts is equal to or less than the number of inserted coins), or the number of medals increases extremely (for example, payout at 3 bets). There may be considered a pressing order in which the number is 4), and a medal is increased (for example, the number of payouts in 3 bets is 9) when correct in the pressing order. Note that in any pressing order, in the case of incorrect answers in the pressing order, it is common that the number of medals paid out is smaller than that in the case of the correct pressing order, or the number of medals paid out is zero.

  From the player's point of view, even if a notification is given to a pressing order that the number of medals does not increase or the increase is very small when the pressing order is correct, the total number of medals acquired during a specific section does not increase. There is no need to guarantee the number of navigations in a particular section. On the other hand, with regard to a press orderer in which medals increase at the time of press order correctness, the number of times of navigation is guaranteed during a specific section, from the player's point of view, since it affects the total number of medals acquired during the specific section. Is preferred.

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, among a plurality of types of push punters with different numbers of medals paid out in the correct order of push, only with regard to the push punctual that the number of paid out in the correct order of push is greater than the number of inserted coins. The number of navigation times may be guaranteed, and the number of navigation times may not be guaranteed for a pressing order whose payout number is less than or equal to the number of inserted sheets when the pressing order is correct. In addition, among a plurality of types of push orderers with different number of medals paid out at the time of correct order, the number of navigations is guaranteed only for the push order with the highest number of payouts at the correct order, other push order roles In the case of, the number of navigation may not be guaranteed.

  Specifically, the main control board 71 checks the number of times of navigation when the ending condition of the specific section is satisfied in a situation where the notification to the pressing order that guarantees the number of times of navigation is performed more than the number of times of guarantee during the specific section. The specific section is ended on condition that the end condition of the specific section is satisfied regardless of the number of times of notification to the pressing order member who does not guarantee. On the other hand, the main control board 71 is in a situation where the notification to the pushing order to guarantee the number of navigations is not performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the specific segment, and the specific segment end condition is satisfied. Continue the process without ending the, and then, end the specific section at the timing when the notification to the pushing order combination to guarantee the number of times of navigation has been performed for the number of times of assurance.

  By doing this, the number of times of informing (navigation) about the pressing order affecting the total number of medals acquired during the specific section is guaranteed, so that the loss felt by the player can be reduced. .

  Subsequently, a case will be described where the end condition of the specific section is satisfied without notification of the guaranteed number of times while the bonus state is held. In FIGS. 128 (B) and 128 (C), when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied (at the end of 50 games), the warning is not issued for the guaranteed number of times, but the specific section before the end condition is satisfied. It shows an example in which the bonus state has been shifted once.

  Since the bonus state is basically a gaming state advantageous to the player, it can be considered that the player is given a certain benefit when the specific section is viewed as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 128 (B), when the termination condition of the specific section is satisfied, the main control board 71 can execute the warning during the specific section even if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed yet. When transitioning to the bonus state even once, the specific section may be ended upon satisfying the ending condition of the specific section.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 128 (C), when the main control board 71 satisfies the termination condition of the specific section, if notification for the number of times of guarantee has not been performed yet, the main control board 71 may Regardless of whether or not the bonus state has been entered, the specific section is continued until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed, and then the specific section is ended at the timing when the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed. Good.

  Subsequently, a case where the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games without notification of the guaranteed number of times will be described. If the specific section continues until the limit game number reaches the fixed game number, it can be considered that the player is given a fixed profit, so the main control board 71 is shown in FIG. 128 (D). As shown, when the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games, the specific section may be ended even if notification for the guaranteed number has not been performed yet. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), even when the limit game number in the specific section reaches the fixed game number, the main control board 71 has not notified the guaranteed number of times as yet. The specific section may be continued until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed, and thereafter, the specific section may be ended at the timing when the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

  In addition, when continuing a specific area until alerting | reporting of the frequency | count of guarantee is performed by the navigation guarantee process, it is arbitrary whether what is called an additional lottery is performed in the specific area after satisfy | filling completion | finish conditions. That is, while the main control board 71 performs the additional lottery until the end condition is satisfied in the specific section, the main control substrate 71 may not perform the additional lottery even in the specific section after the end condition is satisfied. On the other hand, the main control board 71 may perform the additional lottery for a period until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed even after the termination condition is satisfied.

  When a specific section is continued until notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed by the navigation guarantee process, on the liquid crystal display device such as the display unit 100, the normal screen is returned at the timing satisfying the end condition of the specific section. When a push order to be notified is determined as an internal winning combination, a push order notification (navigation) may be performed on the normal screen. That is, when the termination condition of the specific section is satisfied without notification for the guaranteed number of times, the main control board 71 continues lighting the status indicator 147b, but the sub control board 72 displays the display screen in the specific section. Switch the display screen to the display screen in the normal section. After that, when a push order to be notified is determined as an internal winning combination, the main control board 71 notifies the pushing order via the notification lamp 147a of the instruction monitor 147, and the sub control board 72 , Inform the pressing order on the normal screen. Then, when notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed, the main control board 71 may turn off the status indicator 147b.

<Overview of each game state>
In the above, the outline | summary of the game flow of the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment was demonstrated. Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 123, an outline of each gaming state of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when roughly classified, has a normal section, a standby section, and a specific section. The normal section is a state in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and the specific section is a state in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. Moreover, a waiting | standby area is a state until it transfers to a specific area from a normal area after winning the transition lottery to a specific area.

  In the normal section, the standby section and the specific section, the part associated with the bonus is not determined as the internal combination according to the presence or absence of the winning of the part associated with the bonus or the presence or absence of the bonus activated, and the bonus is activated. Set to the probability that the "bonus not activated (between non flags)" and the role related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination and the "boning between flags" when the bonus is not activated and the internal winning combination is determined "Bonus state (no setting difference)" in which the bonus corresponding to the bonus combination with no difference is activated, and the bonus according to the bonus combination in which there is a setting difference between the probability determined as the internal winning combination and " The bonus game state (with setting difference) is included.

  As shown in FIG. 123, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flag)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the normal section, the main control board 71 When the status indicator 147 b is turned off and the combination relating to the notification is determined as the internal winning combination, these combinations are grouped and transmitted to the sub control board 72. Specifically, when any one of the roles “F_3 selection bell_1st”, “F_3 selection bell_2nd”, and “F_3 selection bell_3rd” is determined as an internal winning combination, the main control board 71 grouped these roles. Information is transmitted to the sub control board 72 on the assumption that the combination "push order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination.

  In addition, in the “bonus non-operation (between non-flag)” and “bonus state (no setting difference)” in the normal section, the main control board 71 performs the transfer lottery to the specific section based on the information having no difference in the setting value. On the other hand, in the “between flags” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the normal section, the main control board 71 does not perform transition lottery to the specific section. Further, the main control board 71 continues the specific section in the “bonus non-operation (between non-flag)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the normal section. We do not give notice of extra lottery of period, winning of the winning combination.

  In addition, in the "bonus not activated (between non flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 displays the state indicator 147b. Lights up. The main control board 71 may light the status indicator 147b differently in the standby section and in the specific section.

  In addition, in the "bonus inoperative (between non flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (there is a setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 is pressed for winning. Notification of the pressing order of the correct time may be performed, or may not be performed. When the notification of the pressing order of the correct answer is performed, the main control substrate 71 transmits the combination associated with the notification to the sub control substrate 72 without grouping the combinations. Specifically, when any one of the roles “F_3 selection bell_1st”, “F_3 selection bell_2nd”, and “F_3 selection bell_3rd” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 is actually an internal winning combination. The information which can specify the kind of role determined as is transmitted to the sub control board 72. On the other hand, when not notifying the pressing order of the correct answer, the main control substrate 71 groups the roles involved in the notification and transmits the grouping to the sub control substrate 72.

  Also, the main control board 71 wins in the "bonus not in operation (between flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section. Transition to a specific section Not performing lottery (however, it is possible to carry out transition lottery on a specific section different from the winning specific section). In addition, the main control board 71 does not perform the additional lottery for the duration of the specific section in the "bonus inoperative (between non-flag)", "between flags" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section. In the "bonus state (with setting difference)" of the standby section, the main control board 71 may carry out the additional lottery of the duration of the specific section based on the information having no difference in the setting value. It is good not to be.

  In addition, the main control board 71 displays the status indicator 147 b in the “bonus not activated (between non flags)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in a specific section. Is displayed, and notification of the pressing order of the correct answer at the time of winning the winning order is given. Therefore, the main control board 71 is a part related to notification in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flag)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the specific section. Are sent to the sub control board 72 without grouping.

  In addition, the main control board 71 wins in the "bonus non-operation (between flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in a specific section. Transition to a specific section Not performing lottery (however, it is possible to carry out transition lottery on a specific section different from the winning specific section). Further, the main control board 71 adds the continuation period of the specific section based on the information having no difference in the setting value in the “bonus non-operation (non-flag)” and the “bonus state (no setting difference)” of the specific section. While the lottery is performed, the additional lottery of the continuation period of the specific section is not performed in the “between flags” and the “bonus state (with setting difference)” of the specific section.

  The main control board 71 may perform transition lottery to a specific section only at the time of 3 bets or additional lottery of the continuation period of the specific section, and may not perform these lottery at the time of 1 bet or 2 bets.

<Output of migration lottery result to external device>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 129 to FIG. 131, the flow when outputting the result of the transition lottery to the specific section from the pachislot machine to an external device such as a data counter or a hall computer will be described.

In game arcades, external devices such as data counters and hall computers are installed in addition to pachislot machines etc. For example, when a bonus state starts in a pachislot machine, a signal is output from the pachislot machine to the data counter Count the number of bonus in the counter. In the conventional pachislot machine, since the transition lottery to the specific section is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side, the main control board 71 is an event (for example, RT state) that can be recognized on the main (main control board 71) side. The lottery result is inferred from a transition or a specific push order, and so on, and a signal is output to the external device based on the inference. However, in such a conventional method, the timing of outputting the winning of the transition lottery is several games delayed from the timing of actually winning, and the specific pushing order is repeated by chance by the player's stop operation. If it does, it will guess that it wins although the transition lottery is not won, and as a result, an incorrect signal may be outputted.
In addition, in the specification that outputs a signal based on the transition of the RT gaming state, the signal is also output when the bonus game is withdrawn during the ART after returning to RT gaming state for ART from the RT gaming state at the end of the bonus. May have been output. In such a case, the signal output is performed more than the correct ART winning number and the number of the set number, and it is difficult for the player to grasp accurate information when estimating the setting and selecting a game. Was occurring.

  In this respect, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the result of the transfer lottery to the specific section is output as it is to the external device as it is, not from the estimation result. It can be output.

  FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example pattern of signal output timing to an external device. In FIG. 129, timing T1 is the start time of a game won in a transition lottery to a specific section (for example, ART gaming state), period P1 is a period between one game of the game, and period P2 is It is a period between one game of the next game.

  In the example shown in FIG. 129, at timing T1 (that is, at the start of the game), the transition lottery to the specific section is won. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the shift lottery to the specific section is performed on the main (main control board 71) side, the main control board 71 can grasp that the shift lottery has been won from the timing T1. .

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the result of the shift lottery is output to the external device at an arbitrary timing during the game period P1 in which the shift lottery has been won. For example, in the output pattern example A, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery to the external device at the start of the game (that is, when the start lever 6 is operated) doing. Similarly, in the output pattern example B, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the shift lottery to the external device when the reel rotation of the game is started, and in the output pattern example C, the main control board 71 externally at the first stop operation of the game The result of the transfer lottery is output to the device, and in the output pattern example D, the result of the transfer lottery is output to the external device when all reels of the game are stopped.

  Further, as shown in the output pattern examples E and F, the main control board 71 can also output the result of the migration lottery to the external device in the game after the game winning the migration lottery. For example, in the output pattern example E, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the migration lottery to the external device at the time of medal insertion for the next game of the game won in the migration lottery. Further, in the output pattern example F, the main control board 71 is shifted to the external device during an arbitrary game (for example, at the start of the game when a specific section starts) in which a plurality of games have been performed thereafter. Output the result.

  The output pattern example shown in FIG. 129 is only an example, and in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the migration lottery for the external device at any timing after winning the migration lottery to the specific section It can be output.

  In addition, by combining the lighting pattern example of the status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 120 with the output pattern example of the signal to the external device shown in FIG. Specifically, a signal may be output to the external device prior to lighting of the status indicator 147b, indicating that the transition lottery has been won. Conversely, the external device may be turned on after the status indicator 147b is lit. Alternatively, a signal indicating that the transition lottery has been won may be output, or a signal indicating that the transition lottery has been encountered may be output to the external device simultaneously with the lighting of the status indicator 147b. Good.

  For example, by outputting a signal to an external device prior to the status indicator 147b, the counter is updated in the external device (data counter) prior to the lighting of the status indicator 147b. It is possible to detect the transition of a specific section from an external device other than 1. In addition, for example, in consideration of the processing time in the external device, the signal to the external device is output a little before the lighting of the status indicator 147b to light the status indicator 147b (notification in the pachislot machine 1) The timing can be matched with the timing of updating the external device (notification of the pachislot machine 1), which can reduce the player's discomfort.

  For example, when there are many types of bonus and the output pin from the external concentrated terminal board 73 is limited, as in the case where there is no free output pin in the 8-pin signal line that outputs a signal to the external device The main control board 71 may not output a signal to the external device even when the transfer lottery is won.

  In the above embodiment, the signal is output when the transition lottery is won, but the signal may be output when a specific section such as ART continues. For example, in the case of a game specification in which the ART game state is set to 30 games and the number of sets is managed, a signal is output when winning a transition lottery (a so-called first hit time) and 2 sets after 30 games of the first set are digested. An external signal can be output at the timing when the eye is started. By outputting signals in this manner, it becomes possible to grasp the correct number of sets. Further, the signal of the first hit and the signal at the time of continuation may be different signals, and the number of first hits and the number of continuation may be accurately grasped by the data counter, and in this case, the accuracy of grasping the gaming situation can be further enhanced. .

In such a gaming machine that manages the number of sets, if a bonus state starts in the middle of the ART gaming state, a pachislot machine or a pachislot machine that resumes the game from the number of remaining games from the bonus winning time in the set after the bonus ends. There is a pachislot machine that starts a new set from the beginning after the bonus ends.
In the former case, for example, when 25 games out of a set of 30 games in the ART gaming state have been won and the bonus state is started, the remaining five games after the end of the bonus (the remainder at the bonus win) Resume ART gaming state from the number of games). In such a case, it is desirable not to output a signal when ART restarts, since only one set is divided halfway. On the other hand, in the latter case, it is desirable to output a signal at the time of ART resumption because one set of ART is substantially added as a benefit of winning the bonus during the ART gaming state. The same signal output processing can be applied not only to the type of ART in which the predetermined number of games is one set, but also to the type in which the number of sets of ART is managed by the number of differences and the number of navigations.

  A pachislot machine having both a pattern for resuming a game from the number of remaining games from the bonus winning in the set after the end of the bonus and a pattern for starting a new set from the beginning after the end of the bonus may be considered. For example, if the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state is less than a predetermined value, one set is added as a remedial measure when winning a bonus, and if the number of remaining games is more than a predetermined value, a bonus is retained. There is a spec that resumes the game from the number of games.

In such a pachislot machine, the main control board 71 controls the signal output in accordance with the presence or absence of ART addition at the time of winning a bonus. That is, when the addition of ART occurs at the time of winning a bonus, the main control board 71 outputs a signal when restarting the ART gaming state after the end of the bonus, and when the addition of ART does not occur at the time of winning a bonus. The main control board 71 does not output a signal when restarting the ART gaming state after the end of the bonus. More specifically, if the main control board 71 wins a bonus when the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state is less than a predetermined value, the main control board 71 outputs a signal at the time of ART resumption after the end of the bonus, assuming that ART overlay has occurred. If the bonus game is won when the number of remaining games is equal to or more than a predetermined value, no signal output is performed when the ART is resumed after the end of the bonus, since it is determined that no ART addition has occurred.
In other words, when the main control board 71 wins the bonus when the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state is less than the predetermined value, the ART gaming state of the set other than the set executed at the bonus winning after the bonus ends. Restart the signal output to the outside. On the other hand, when the main control board 71 wins a bonus when the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state is a predetermined value or more, the main control board 71 resumes the same ART playing state as the set executed at the bonus winning after the bonus ends. At the same time, no signal is output to the outside.

  Further, the presence or absence of signal output may be determined according to the presence or absence of ART addition from the bonus winning to the start of the ART as well as the presence or absence of ART addition upon winning a bonus.

The above-mentioned signal output is a signal that causes the value of the data counter to increase by 1 per one output, but when the ART gaming state with a large value is started, the data counter according to the value of the value It may be a signal in which the value of is increased by more than one value. For example, when a long ART consisting of one set of 90 games is started with a premium etc. while normally being an ART of one set of 30 games, the signal may be output so that the value of the data counter increases by 3. .
In addition, when starting ART that continues until the next bonus, which is ART of one set of 30 games, the signal is output so that the value of the data counter increases according to the average number of games until the bonus win. It is also good. For example, when the winning probability of a bonus is 1/150, the average number of continuing games is 150 games, which corresponds to 5 sets, so that a signal in which the value of the data counter increases by 5 is output. In this case, if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the bonus, the average number of continued games determined from the bonus probability of a specific setting value (for example, setting 6) regardless of the setting so that the setting is not specified. Output a signal according to By doing so, even if the pachislot machine has a plurality of ART gaming states having different values at the start, it becomes easy to determine what degree of profit is obtained from the data counter etc. after the fact. A signal that raises the value by 1 may be sent multiple times at intervals so that the external device can identify it, and a signal dedicated to increase the value by more than one value. May be transmitted in one shot.

(Example of production linked with external device)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 130 and FIG. 131, an example of effect performed in cooperation with an external device when winning a transition lottery to a specific section will be described. FIG. 130 shows an example of the effect in the case of outputting a signal to an external device during the game winning a transition lottery to a specific section, and FIG. 131 shows the external in the game after winning a transition lottery to a specific section The example of presentation in the case of outputting a signal with respect to an apparatus is shown.

(Effect example 1)
In the effect example 1 shown in FIG. 130, in the game winning the transition lottery, the main control board 71 reversely rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R prior to the start of reel rotation, and then rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R forwardly. The game is progressing by letting In this effect example 1, timing T1 is timing to start reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and timing T2 is timing to start forward rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (that is, at the time of reel rotation start) And timing T3 is when all reels of the game are stopped. In addition, the main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b at the timing of lighting pattern example 4 (when all reels are stopped), and that the transition lottery is won is output at the timing of output pattern example B (at the time of reel rotation start). It is outputting to the device.

  As shown at timing T1, in the game winning the transition lottery to the specific section, the main control board 71 starts rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the operation of the start lever 6. At this time, the main control board 71 first rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the reverse direction. The sub control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to display a notice to focus on the data counter installed at the upper part of the pachislot machine 1 and to display a countdown of 5 seconds. Here, the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R means that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate from the bottom to the top, so for the player, the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R With it, the gaze is guided from the bottom to the top. Further, in addition to the guidance of the line of sight by the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the display unit 100 also attracts attention to the data counter, so the player's interest is strongly attracted to the data counter.

  At timing T1 to timing T2, the secondary control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to advance the countdown. Thereafter, at timing T2, the main control board 71 rotates the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the forward direction, and outputs a signal indicating that the transition lottery has been made to the data counter. When this signal is received, the data counter updates the counter and displays "hit" or the like.

  As described above, in the first production example, the visual line is guided to the data counter using the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display by the display unit 100, and then the signal is output to the data counter. Informing the player of winning the shift lottery to the specific section on the data counter which collects the line of sight of the player. As a result, effects linked not only to the pachislot machine 1 but also to an external device (data counter) can be executed.

  Further, in the first effect example, at the timing T3, the main control board 71 causes the state indicator 147b to light. The sub control board 72 displays an image or the like indicating that the specific section has been won on the display unit 100 in accordance with the lighting timing of the state indicator 147b. As described above, in the first production example, various effects can be interlockedly performed by performing effects in accordance with the lighting timing of the status indicator 147b and the output timing of the signal to the external device, thereby enhancing the effects of the effects. Can.

(Example 2 of production)
Subsequently, the effect example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. In pachislot machines that have a specific section such as ART gaming state, a specific section does not start immediately after winning a transition lottery to a specific section, and starts a specific section after a predetermined number of games have elapsed after winning a transition lottery. In some cases, so-called prognostic effects may be performed during the predetermined number of games. By the way, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery performed by itself to the external device as it is, as shown by output pattern examples A to D shown in FIG. Even in the game winning the transition lottery, the result of the transition lottery can be output to the external device. Here, when the result of the transition lottery is output to the external device in the game winning the transition lottery, the counter is updated on the data counter (external device), so the data is being produced while the precursor effect is being performed The result of the presentation (ie, the success or failure of the transition lottery) is known from the value of the counter, and the interest is cut.

  Therefore, in the effect example 2 shown in FIG. 131, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the shift lottery to the external device at any timing during the game after 32 games from the game won by the shift lottery in the specific section. Do. Then, as shown in the effect example A, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 perform an indication effect during the 32 games. As a result, the value of the data counter is not updated during the 32 games in which the indication effect is performed, and the player can be interested in the indication effect.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the game when winning the transition lottery of the specific section, but the result of the transition lottery from the status indicator 147b during the prognostic effect is It is preferable to make it difficult to understand the result of the transition lottery from the status display 147b, because if it can be grasped, interest will be cut. The method of making it difficult to understand the result of the transition lottery from the status indicator 147b is as described above.

  In addition, when the registration operation is received from the player, the period for performing the indication effect may be customizable. In the example shown in FIG. 131, although the demonstration effect A is performed over 32 games in the demonstration example A, the demonstration effect is performed over 16 games in the demonstration example B, and thereafter, winning of a specific section is determined It is supposed to perform the waiting effect later. The standby effect may be, for example, an introduction of a character appearing on the pachislot machine 1, an introduction of a story, or the like, or an effect that suggests a set value. Further, even when the period of the precursor effect is made customizable in this way, the main control board 71 outputs a signal to the external device at the same timing regardless of the presence or absence of the customization. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 131, both in the case of performing the effect example A and in the case of performing the effect example B, after 32 games from the game in which the main control board 71 wins the transition lottery in the specific section. During the game, the result of the shift lottery is output to the external device.

<How to secure navigation during specific sections>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 132, a navigation securing method for securing the number of times of notification of the mode of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player during the specific section will be described. In a pachislot machine having a specific section such as an ART gaming state, if navigation is not performed during the specific section, the game during the specific section becomes monotonous, which may cut off the player's interest. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by creating a state in which navigation is easy to be performed in the specific section, it is possible to prevent the game in the specific section from becoming monotonous.

  Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, the timing to start the specific section is set as the start time of the bonus state, and during the bonus state, the pushing order combination (the notification target role) has a higher probability than in the bonus non-operation. As an internal winning combination. Then, if the specific section is also started at the start of the bonus state, the pressing order of the correct answer is notified to the pushing player who won the bonus state, and the specific section is not started at the start of the bonus state. Does not report push order during bonus state. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which navigation is not performed during a specific section, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of gaming during the specific section.

  In particular, since the timing to start the specific section is the start time of the bonus state, the situation where the bonus state is never once in the specific section, that is, the situation where the navigation is easily performed in the specific section (bonus state) As a result, the player can receive a certain number of navigations during a specific section.

(Example of specific section start method at the start of bonus)
Here, the method of setting the timing to start the specific section as the start time of the bonus state is arbitrary. For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (A-1), the main control board 71 responds to the fact that the part associated with the bonus, which is a setting unquestioned part, is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal section (that is, the bonus is won). And carry out a migration lottery. Then, when a combination of symbols according to the combination relating to the bonus is displayed in a state where the main control board 71 wins the transition lottery, the main control board 71 starts a specific section together with the bonus state, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pressing order of the correct answer to the pressing order determined as the internal winning combination with high probability during the bonus state. On the other hand, the main control board 71 starts the bonus state without starting the specific section when the combination of the symbols according to the combination relating to the bonus is displayed without winning the transition lottery. The control board 71 and the sub control board 72 do not notify the correct pressing order even if the pressing order is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 132 (A-2), the main control board 71 is not that the part associated with the bonus has been determined as the internal winning combination, but the part associated with the bonus which is the setting unquestioned part during the normal section. Transition lottery may be performed in response to the display of the combination of the corresponding symbols (ie, the bonus winning).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 132 (A-3), the main control board 71 may perform the shift lottery in the normal section regardless of the role associated with the bonus. Specifically, the main control board 71 carries out the transfer lottery to the specific section based on the information having no difference in the setting value during the normal section, and when the transfer lottery is won, the right to shift to the specific section Grant Then, when a combination of symbols according to the combination relating to the bonus is subsequently displayed, the main control board 71 starts a specific section together with the bonus state when the transition right is granted, and the main control The board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pushing order of the correct answer to the pushing order determined as the internal winning combination with high probability during the bonus state. On the other hand, when the transition right is not granted, the main control board 71 starts the bonus state without starting the specific section, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are pushed in the bonus state. Even if is decided as an internal winning combination, it does not notify the pressing order of the correct answer.

(Example of data)
FIG. 132 (B) shows an example of data configuration for realizing the navigation securing method in the specific section. As shown in FIG. 132 (B), in the bonus state, the pushing order ("F_3 selection _1st", "F_3 selection _2nd", "F_3 selection _3rd") has a high probability compared to the state other than the bonus state. ) Is decided as an internal winning combination. In this push order, for example, a combination of symbols on which nine medals are paid out is displayed when correct in order of push, and a combination of symbols on which five medals are paid out is incorrect in the case of incorrect order. It is displayed. In addition, the bonus state ends, for example, when 10 or more medals are paid out.

  According to such an example of data, in the case of notifying the pressing order of the correct answer to the pressing during the bonus state, the player has 18 (= 9 sheets × 2 times) medals in the bonus state. If the player is not notified of the pressing order of the correct answer to the pressing member during the bonus state while the player can receive the payout of the player, the player is allowed to receive 10 pieces (= 5 sheets × 2 times) of the bonus state. Sometimes you can not pay out or receive medals.

<The precursor realization method using a specific section>
Then, with reference to Drawing 133 and Drawing 134, the realization method of the prognostic rendition in pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment is explained. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when winning the transition lottery to a specific section, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the game, and the effect to be performed over multiple games to notify that the transition lottery has been won It is not suitable for reporting the result of migration lottery using. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the precursor effect is produced in the first specific section using a specific section (first specific section) different from the specific section (second specific section) to be notified of the propriety. To do.

(Precursor method 1 for specific section transition)
First, with reference to FIG. 133, one technique of a precursor realization method regarding transition to the second specific section will be described. In this method, a plurality of specific sections having different durations such as a short ART (first specific section) and a long ART (second specific section) are provided, and the game during the short ART is treated as a precursor game regarding the transition to the long ART .

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 133 (A), in the pachislot machine 1, a short ART continuing for a first period (for example, between three games) and a second period (for example, for A long ART continuing for 53 games (3 + 50) is provided, and a shift lottery to a short ART or a long ART is performed during a normal section. FIG. 133 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a migration lottery table used for migration lottery. The main control board 71 performs transition lottery to the short ART or the long ART with a probability of not fluctuating with the setting value based on the information (internal winning combination) having no difference in the setting value.

  In this transition lottery, when either a short ART or a long ART is won, the pachislot machine 1 performs a prognostic effect to notify whether or not the long ART has been won during a period in which the short ART continues. More specifically, in the case of winning the short ART, the pachislot machine 1 performs a prognostic effect notifying that the long ART is not won during the first period which is the continuation period of the short ART. On the other hand, in the Pachislot machine 1, when winning the long ART, the long ART is won during the long ART from the start to the first period which is the duration of the short ART. In addition to performing a prognostic effect to notify that, and performing a characteristic unique to the long ART after this prognostic effect.

  Note that when performing a precursor effect using the short ART, since both the short ART and the long ART are a specific section, the main control board 71 causes the status indicator 147b to light. That is, as shown in FIG. 133 (A), the main control board 71 causes the status indicator 147b to light up during the first period, which is the continuation period of the short ART, when the short ART is won in the transition lottery. Also, when the long ART is won in the transition lottery, the status indicator 147b is turned on for the second period which is the duration of the long ART. The main control board 71 may light the status indicator 147b in a different mode for the short ART and the long ART, or may light the same status in the same mode.

  Moreover, the method of outputting a signal to the external device in the case of performing the aura effect using the short ART is also arbitrary. For example, when the main control board 71 wins the short ART in the transition lottery, it does not output a signal to the external device, but only when it wins the long ART in the transition lottery, the signal to the external device May be output. Further, the main control board 71 may output a signal to the external device both when the short ART is won in the transition lottery and when the long ART is won.

  In addition, as the termination condition of the short ART and the long ART, an arbitrary condition such as the number of games in a specific section, the number of navigations performed in the specific section, the number of medals paid out in the specific section, and the number of differences. It can be used. In this case, the termination condition used for the short ART and the termination condition used for the long ART may be the same type or may be different types. Note that, for example, when using the number of games as the termination condition of the short ART, the same type is also using the number of games as the termination condition of the long ART, and for example, the type of different is the termination of the short ART When the number of games is used as the condition, a condition other than the number of games is used as the termination condition of the long ART.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 133 (C), an effect example in the case of playing a precursor game using the short ART will be described. When the short ART or the long ART is won, the secondary control board 72 produces, for example, “Explosion chance” in the display unit 100. This “bombing chance” effect is an effect of informing the winning of the long ART depending on whether or not the bomb can be exploded during the first period which is the duration of the short ART. In the example shown in FIG. 133, the duration of the short ART is between 3 games.

  If the secondary control board 72 wins the short ART in the transition lottery (that is, in the case of not winning the long ART), it terminates the “Bunching chance” production without being able to blow up the bomb, and wins the long ART in the transition lottery. If it has been, the effect to succeed in the bombing of the bomb is executed in the "Bunching chance" direction. In addition, the timing to succeed in the bombing of the bomb when winning the Long ART is arbitrary. For example, if the duration of the short ART is 3 games, bombs may be successfully blasted in the first game or the second game, bombs may be successfully blasted in the third game, and You may successfully bomb blast at the beginning of the fourth game.

  In addition, since the short ART and the long ART are specific sections, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 can notify the player of an aspect of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player during the aura. In the example shown in FIG. 133 (C), since the pressing part is won during the “Draping Opportunity” effect that is the precursor effect of the long ART, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 In response to the order of pressing the correct answer. As described above, the pachislot machine 1 can notify the player of an aspect of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player during the admonition effect, and thus gives the player a sense of loss during the admonition effect of the increase in the interest of the game. There is no need to worry.

(Precursor method 2 regarding transition to specific sections)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 134, another technique of the precursor realization method regarding transition to the second specific section will be described. In the above precursor method 1, since the result of the shift lottery has already been decided at the start of the “burst chance” effect, the result of the precursor effect has already been decided at the start of the precursor game. Another method to be described subsequently is a method of making it possible to determine the outcome of the prognostic effect during the prognostic game. In this method, a plurality of specific sections such as CZ (first specific section) and ART gaming state (second specific section) are provided, and the game in CZ is treated as a precursor game regarding transition to the ART gaming state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), the pachislot machine 1 performs transition lottery to CZ during the normal section, and performs transition lottery to ART during CZ. FIG. 134 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a transition lottery table used for transition lottery. The main control board 71 performs transition lottery to CZ based on an internal winning combination, and transition lottery to the ART gaming state is performed based on a combination of symbols. Specifically, the main control board 71 does not perform transition lottery to the ART gaming state when the combination of the bell spilled eyes or the first appearance symbol is displayed, and the combination of the bell symbols is displayed. , Shift to ART gaming state and perform lottery. Then, by notifying the pressing order of the correct answer to the pressing order bell during CZ, it is possible to make it easy to shift the CZ inside to the ART gaming state.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1, when CZ is won in the transition lottery performed in the normal section, the “blasting chance” effect shown in FIG. 134 (C) is performed. For example, this "bombing chance" effect continues for three games, and when the order bell is determined as the internal winning combination during these three games, the order of the correct order is informed, and as a result, transition to the ART gaming state Can receive a lottery. Then, when the CZ ends without winning the transition to ART gaming state and the secondary control board 72 finishes the "bombing chance" presentation without being able to blow up the bomb, transitioning to the ART gaming state before the end of the CZ In the case of winning the lottery, the "bombing chance" directing the execution of successful bomb blast execution.

  Although the main control board 71 lights the state indicator 147b in both the CZ and ART gaming states, the manner of lighting the state indicator 147b is arbitrary. That is, the main control board 71 may light the state indicator 147b in different modes in the CZ and ART gaming states, or may light in the same mode.

  In addition, a method of outputting a signal to an external device is also arbitrary. For example, when the main control board 71 wins the CZ in the transition lottery, it does not output a signal to the external device, but signals the external device only when the ART gaming state is won in the transition lottery. May be output. Further, the main control board 71 may output a signal to the external device both when winning CZ in the transition lottery and in winning ART gaming state.

  Further, the termination conditions of the CZ and ART gaming states are arbitrary, and termination conditions of different types may be used, or termination conditions of the same type may be used.

In addition, as a variation of the above-described example, a specification in which a short ART or a long ART is started at the start of a so-called gap MB can be considered.
Here, the gap MB is, for example, the payout of medals whose end condition of the MB exceeds 14 and a combination of symbols in which 14 medals are paid out in MB or a combination of symbols in which 15 medals are paid out In the state where the notification is performed in the MB where the is displayed, in the first game in the MB, the combination of the symbols for which 14 medals are paid out is notified to notify the pushing order, and in the next game By notifying the pressing order that the combination of the symbols that the 15 medals are paid out will be displayed, the payout of 29 medals can be obtained, but in the state where the notification is not performed, the 15 medals are A combination of symbols to be paid out is often displayed, and it refers to an MB that ends with the payout of 15 medals.

  In the above-mentioned example, although it is necessary to wait until the pushing bonus is decided as the internal winning combination, if the short ART is started at the start of such a gap MB, the short ART is started and the next game is pushed. Since the order navigation occurs, it is not necessary to wait until the pressing bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, and the game will not be postponed, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. In addition, even if it ends in the short ART, the game does not extend due to the gap MB, so more medals can be obtained than digesting the number of bell navigation times in a normal game, and it is possible to experience navigation consumption with a sense of merit. It is possible to reduce the disapproval due to not being connected, and to control the decline in the player's willingness to play.

<How to save navigation times>
In a pachislot machine with so-called navi frequency management, which uses the navi frequency performed during the particular interval as the ending condition of the duration of the particular interval, if the role to be naviated (the alerting object role) is concentrated and won, Navigation is intensively performed, and as a result, a specific section ends immediately. If the specific section ends immediately, this may cause the player to feel dissatisfied, so in the following, a method of saving the number of times of navigation will be described with reference to FIG.

  When using the navigation count as the termination condition of the duration of the specific section, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A necessary bonus (MB1) and a bonus (MB2) in which it is not necessary to notify the player of an aspect of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player during the bonus state are provided. Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 starts the MB1 gaming state when the combination of symbols according to the MB1 is displayed, and the MB2 gaming state in which the combination of symbols according to the MB2 is displayed Start.

  As shown in FIG. 135 (B), during the MB1 gaming state, the main control board 71 displays a combination of symbols different in the number of payouts according to the pressing order. "F_ maintain lip _1st + all small win" "F_ maintain While determining the internal winning combination of rip _2nd + all small winning combination "F _ maintenance lip _3 rd + all small winning combination", while in MB2 gaming state, only the combination where the combination of the same number of payouts is displayed regardless of the pressing order Determined to be the winning combination. Then, during the MB1 gaming state, since the number of payouts may differ depending on the pressing order, when the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order of the correct answer Informs (the pressing order in which the nine-piece winning combination is displayed).

  By doing this, when the MB1 gaming state has started during the specific section, the game is played while consuming the navigation count, but the MB2 gaming state can be started during the specific section. Can play a game without consuming the number of times of navigation, and can reduce the consumption speed of the number of times of navigation.

  During the MB1 gaming state, the combination in which the combination of symbols with different payout numbers is displayed is determined as the internal winning combination according to the pushing order, while during the MB2 gaming state, the payout numbers are the same regardless of the pushing order. It is optional to realize that only the combination in which the combination is displayed is determined as the internal combination. As an example, the MB1 gaming state is a gaming state dedicated to 3 bets, and during the MB1 gaming state, lottery is performed individually only for the role related to replay, and when determining all small winning combinations as internal winning combinations individually. Stop control is made different depending on the type of replay made. Thereby, during the MB1 gaming state, it is possible to determine a combination in which combinations of symbols different in the number of payouts are displayed according to the pushing order as the internal winning combination. On the other hand, the MB2 gaming state is set to a gaming state dedicated to 2 bets, and at the time of 2 bets, the small number of medals is the same in the number of medals paid out. Thereby, during the MB2 gaming state, it is possible to determine only the combination in which the combination of symbols having the same number of payouts is displayed regardless of the pushing order as the internal winning combination.

<Individual Management of Rip Navi and Bernavi>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141, a method of individually managing the ripped navigation and the bell navigation during the specific section will be described. In a conventional pachislot machine, it is common to carry out both a notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in a high-rip state and a notification for increasing a medal during a specific section, but these notifications By individually managing, it is possible to realize new and unprecedented gameplay.

(Game example 1)
First, with reference to FIG. 136 to FIG. 138, a gaming example 1 in the case of individually managing the lip navigation and the bell navigation will be described. The game example 1 has a plurality of types of specific sections, i.e., Lipnabi AT and Bernavi navi AT, as specific sections. The RIP NAVI AT performs notification to maintain the RT gaming state in the high-rip state, but does not notify to increase the medal. In addition, in the Bell navigation AT, at least a notification for increasing the number of medals is provided, and a notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high-rip state is performed as necessary.

  FIG. 136 (A) shows a game flow in the first game example. As shown in FIG. 136 (A), the pachislot machine 1 provides, as an RT gaming state, three types of states, an RT0 gaming state to an RT3 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations pertaining to replay and their winning probability differ from each other. . The RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that a combination relating to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is a low probability, and is a gaming state that stays after initialization processing, after setting change, etc. after the end of the bonus. Further, the RT1 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the role associated with replay is determined as an internal winning combination is a low probability, and is a gaming state mainly used in a normal game. Further, the RT2 gaming state is a gaming state where the probability that the role associated with the replay is determined as an internal winning combination is high probability, and when transitioning according to the notification is treated as a lip navi AT, and transitioning regardless of the notification Is a gaming state that is usually treated as a game. Further, the RT3 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that a combination related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is a high probability, and is a gaming state mainly used in the bell navigation AT.

  From the RT0 gaming state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, in the RT0 gaming state, when the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled symbols is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Here, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136 (B), the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes is the combination of the winning combination “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” In the game in which “is determined as the internal winning combination, it is displayed when the answer is incorrect. In addition, in the game in which the combination “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” is determined as the internal winning combination, when the correct order is the pressing order, a combination of bell symbols is displayed, and nine medals are paid out.

  In addition, from the RT1 gaming state, there is a possibility of transitioning to the RT2 gaming state. Specifically, in the RT1 gaming state, when the symbol combination of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 136 (B), in the RT1 gaming state, the combination “F_RT2 transition lip _123” to “F_RT2 transition lip _321”, which are the pushing order members, is designated as the internal winning combination with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136 (B), in the game in which the combinations “F_RT2 transition ripple _123” to “F_RT2 transition ripple _321” are determined as the internal winning combination, the correct order is correct. In the case of, the combination of symbols of the RT2 transition ripple is displayed, and in the case of incorrect answer, the combination of symbols of replay is displayed.

  In addition, from the RT2 gaming state, there is a possibility of transitioning to the RT1 gaming state or the RT3 gaming state. Specifically, in the RT2 gaming state, when the combination of the bell spilled eyes or the symbol of the RT1 transitioning lip is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 136 (B), in the RT2 gaming state, the roles “F_Maintenance Lip_123” to “F_Maintenance Lip_321”, which are the pushing order members, are used as internal winning combinations with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136 (B), in the game in which the combinations “F_Maintenance Lip _123” to “F_Maintenance Lip _321” are determined as internal winning combinations, the correct order of pressing In the case of, the combination of symbols of replay is displayed, and in the case of incorrect answer, the combination of symbols of RT1 transition lip is displayed. When the combination of symbols of replay is displayed by the correct order of pressing, the main control board 71 maintains the gaming state as it is in the state of playing RT2 gaming, and the combination of symbols of RT1 transition lip is displayed by the incorrect order of pressing. In the case, the gaming state is shifted from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

  Further, in the RT2 gaming state, when the combination of symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 136 (B), in the RT2 gaming state, the combination “F_RT3 transition lip _123” to “F_RT3 transition lip _321”, which are the pushing order members, is designated as the internal winning combination with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136 (B), in the game in which the combinations “F_RT3 transition lip _123” to “F_RT3 transition lip _321” are determined as the internal winning combination, the correct order is correct. In the case of, the symbol combination of the RT3 transition ripple is displayed, and in the case of incorrect answer, the symbol combination of the replay is displayed. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state when the combination of symbols of the RT3 transition ripple is displayed by the pressing order correctness, and the combination of the symbols of replay is due to the pressing order incorrectness. When it is displayed, the gaming state is maintained at the RT2 gaming state.

  In addition, from the RT3 gaming state, there is a possibility that it shifts to the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, in the RT3 gaming state, when the combination of the bell spilled eyes or the symbol of the RT1 transitioning lip is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. That is, in the game in which the main control board 71 determines the combination “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” as the internal winning combination, when the combination of the bell symbols is displayed by the pressing order, If you keep the gaming state as RT3 gaming state while paying out nine medals, and the combination of the bell spill symbol is displayed due to pressing order incorrectness, the number is less than nine (or zero) The gaming state is shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state while paying out the medals of.

  Also, as shown in the transition lottery table of FIG. 137 (C), in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 performs transition lottery to the Lipnabi AT based on the internal winning combination. Note that this transition lottery table indicates that transition lottery to the Lipnabi AT is performed based on the internal winning combination, and the type of role to be subjected to the transition lottery is merely an example.

  Further, as shown in the transition lottery table of FIG. 137 (C), in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 performs transition lottery to the Bernabi AT based on the combination of the displayed symbols. In this game example 1, the main control board 71 carries out the transition lottery to the Bell navigation AT only when the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition ripple is displayed, and the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition ripple is displayed. In all cases, it is decided to win the Bernabi AT.

  In the illustrated example, a combination of symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed, that is, the combination “F_RT3 transition lip _123” to “F_RT3 transition lip _321” is determined as the internal winning combination. In the played game, it is supposed to be performed on the condition that it is correct in push order, but it is not limited to this, the main control board 71 simply has the combination “F_RT3 transition ripple _123” to “F_RT3 transition lip _321” inside. If determined to be the winning combination, it may be possible to carry out a transition lottery to the Bernavi AT.

  Here, in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 determines the combination “F_RT3 transition lip _123” to “F_RT3 transition lip _321” as an internal winning combination during the RT2 gaming state, and plays the role during the other RT gaming states. Do not decide F_RT3 transition Lip _ 123 "~" F_RT3 transition Lip _ 321 "as an internal winning combination, or at a lower probability during the other RT gaming state than during the RT2 gaming state" F _ RT3 transition Lip _ 123 "~" F _ RT3 transition Lip _ 321 Will be decided as the internal winning combination. Therefore, the RT2 gaming state is more frequently transitioned to the bell navigator AT than during the other RT gaming states, and the main control board 71 is in the other RT gaming states (in particular, the RT1 gaming state) during the RT2 gaming state. Make a transition lottery to Bernabi AT more frequently than).

  In the pachislot machine 1 (the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72), when neither Ripunabi AT nor Bernavi AT is won, a notification (a correct pressing order) of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is notified. do not do. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1, when winning in the Lipnabi AT, notification with the Lipnabi AT is performed, and when winning in the Bellnavi AT, notification with the Bellnavi AT is performed.

  Specifically, when winning the Lipnabi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 play the roles of “F_RT2 transition lip _123” to “F_RT2 transition lip _321” and the combination “F_RT3 transition lip _123” to When one of "F_RT3 transition lip _ 321" and a combination "F_ maintenance lip _ 123" is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order of the correct answer is notified. On the other hand, even when winning the Lipnabi AT, any of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 is determined as the internal winning combination of any of the combinations "F_3 selection bell _1st" to "F_3 selection bell _3rd". Even if it does, it does not inform the pressing order of the correct answer.

  Also, in the case of winning the bell navigation AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are determined to have any one of the roles "F3 selection bell _ 1st" to "F 3 selection bell _3 rd" as the internal winning combination. , To inform the pressing order of the correct answer. In addition, when winning the bell navigation AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the roles “F_RT2 transition lip _123” to “F_RT2 transition lip _321” and the roles “F_RT3 transition lip _123” to “F_RT3 When one of the lip _ 321 ′ ′ and the combination “F_Maintenance rip _ 123” is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order of the correct answer may be notified or may not be notified.

  By doing in this way, it is possible to treat the Rip nabi AT as a specific section for giving a notification to maintain the RT2 gaming state where the frequency of the shift lottery to the Bell navi AT is high, and also in the Bell navi AT It can be treated as a specific section for performing notification to increase it. As described above, in the first game example, since there is a specific section in which the roles of the Lipnabi AT and the Bell navi AT are different from each other, the meaning of the notification varies depending on the type of the specific section. It is possible to prevent a drop in interest without making the notification monotonous.

  In addition, since the notification for increasing the medals is not performed during the replay navigation AT, the increase of the medals is suppressed. In pachislot machines, it is necessary to balance the profits between the player and the game arcade, but if the period for which the medals increase is long, the profits obtained by the player will be excessive, so it will be difficult to shift to a specific section etc. It is necessary to balance the profit in other parts. In this respect, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 1, since it has the specific section of the Lipnabi AT that does not notify of increasing the medal separately from the Bell navi AT notifying of increasing the medal, the specific section It is possible to achieve a balance between the profits of the player and the game arcade while realizing the game characteristics that are easy to shift to

  In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the specific section is made equal to each set value by performing the shift lottery performed based on the information having no difference in the set value. . In this respect, the migration lottery itself may be performed based on the information having no difference in the setting value, but may be different in the expectation for the transition to the specific section for each setting value. The specific method is shown below.

  In the game example 1 described above, the combination “F_RT3 transition lip _123” to “F_RT3 transition lip _321” is determined as the internal winning combination (more specifically, the correct answer when the combination is determined as the internal combination) In accordance with the stopping operation in the pushing order), it is decided to carry out the transition lottery to the Bernavi AT. Since the shift lottery is performed based on the information having no difference in the set value, the combination “F_RT3 transition lip _123” to “F_RT3 transition lip _321” has an internal winning combination with a probability according to the current gaming state regardless of the set value. Need to be determined. Specifically, the main control board 71 determines the combinations “F_RT3 transition ripple _123” to “F_RT3 transition rip _321” as the internal winning combination with a predetermined probability regardless of the set value during the RT2 gaming state. In addition, as described above, in the RT gaming state other than the RT2 gaming state, the roles “F_RT3 transition lip _123” to “F_RT3 transition lip _321” may be determined as internal winning combinations, and in this case, the main control During the RT gaming state other than the RT2 gaming state (for example, the RT1 gaming state), the substrate 71 plays the role "F_RT3 transition lip _123" to "F_RT3 transition lip _321" with a probability lower than the predetermined probability regardless of the set value. As an internal winning combination.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the combinations “F_RT3 transition ripple _123” to “F_RT3 transition ripple _321” are internally provided because the probability of winning the transition lottery to a specific section is the same regardless of the setting value. In accordance with the winning combination being decided (more specifically, in response to the stop operation being performed in the pressing order of the correct answer when determined as the internal winning combination), winning with the same probability regardless of the set value It is necessary to carry out a migration lottery. Therefore, when performing the transfer lottery to the bell navigation AT, the main control board 71 performs the lottery so as to win at the same probability regardless of the setting value.

  By doing this, the combination “F_RT3 transition lip _123” to “F_RT3 transition lip _321”, which is a trigger to carry out the transition lottery to the Bernavi AT, is determined as the internal winning combination with the same probability regardless of the setting value. Also, the transition lottery to the Bernabi AT will be won with the same probability regardless of the set value. Therefore, at first glance, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT will be the same for each setting value, but in the method, the setting difference regarding the transition of the RT gaming state relates to the transition to the Bernavi AT Make the degree of expectation different for each set value.

  Specifically, the main control board 71 causes the gaming state to shift from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state at a probability according to the set value set. As described above, during the RT2 gaming state, since the transition lottery to the Bernavi AT is performed at a higher frequency than the other RT gaming states, this RT2 game is performed without providing a setting difference in the transition lottery timing and the winning probability. By providing the setting difference regarding the transition to the state, as a result, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT can be made different for each setting value. More specifically, in the internal lottery table for RT1 shown in FIG. 136 (B), the probability (information on the lottery value) of determining the combination “F_RT2 transition ripple _123” to “F_RT2 transition ripple _321” as the internal winning combination By making the setting value different, it is possible to provide a setting difference regarding the transition to the RT2 gaming state. As a result, the setting value having a high probability of determining the combination “F_RT2 transition ripple _123” to “F_RT2 transition ripple _321” as the internal winning combination becomes easier to shift to the RT2 gaming state, and as a result, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the bell navigator AT Is high, so that it is possible to bring out features for each setting value regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT.

(Example of effects in Game example 1)
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, an example of effects in the pachislot machine 1 of the gaming example 1 will be described. FIG. 138 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the game when the effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (A), the first game is the RT1 gaming state, and is a game in which neither the Lipnabi AT nor the Bellnavi AT is won. In the first game, neither the Lipnavi AT nor the Bernavi AT is won, so the status indicator 147b is off, and both the number of times of the Lipnavi and the number of the Bell Navi remain zero. In addition, with the number of rep navi, any of the roles "F_RT2 transition lip _123" to "F_RT2 transition lip _321", the roles "F_RT3 transition lip _123" to "F_RT3 transition lip _321", and the role "F_maintenance lip _123" are internal. It is the number of times to inform the pressing order of the correct answer when it is decided as the winning combination, and the number of bell navigation is any one of the combinations “F_3 choice bell _1st” to “F_3 choice_3rd” is decided as the internal winning combination In this case, it is the number of times to notify the pressing order of the correct answer.

  Subsequently, in the second game, it has won a transition lottery to Lipnabi AT. Therefore, the status indicator 147b lights up in the lighting pattern 1, and 5 times is given as the number of times of the navigation. At this time, the sub control board 72 performs the effects illustrated in (a) of FIG. 138 (B) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays that the number of times of the replay navigation has been given to the display unit 100, and displays that the "search challenge" effect starts. Note that the “search challenge” effect is an effect of searching for a treasure to be performed during the Lipnabi AT, and if the treasure can be found while the number of times of the Lipnavi is remaining, an effect that becomes a success (Bernavi AT) It is.

  Subsequently, in the third game, any one of the roles “F_RT2 transition lip _123” to “F_RT2 transition lip _321” is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the replay navigation AT is being performed, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pressing order of the correct answer, and urge to shift to the RT2 gaming state. Along with this notification, in the third game, the number of Lip navigation is reduced from 5 times to 4 times. At this time, the sub control board 72 performs the effects illustrated in (b) of FIG. 138 (B) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub control board 72 displays the pressing order for shifting to the interval between treasures (RT2 gaming state) from the standby state (RT1 gaming state) on the display unit 100. The combination of symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed by the player performing the stop operation according to the notification, and thereafter, as shown in (b) of FIG. 138 (B), the sub control board 72 displays Display an indication that it has arrived between treasures while waiting.

  Subsequently, in the fourth game, since the transition to the RT2 gaming state is performed in the third game, the state display 147 b is lit in the lighting pattern 2. Further, in the fourth game, any one of the roles “F_Maintenance Lip_123” to “F_Maintenance Lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the fourth game is in the replay navigation AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pressing order of the correct answer and urge to maintain the RT2 gaming state. Along with this notification, in the fourth game, the number of lip navigations is reduced from four to three. At this time, the sub control board 72 performs the effects illustrated in (c) of FIG. 138 (B) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub control board 72 displays the pressing order for maintaining the RT2 gaming state on the display unit 100. By the player performing the stop operation in accordance with the notification, the RT2 gaming state is maintained, and the search among the treasures is continued.

  Subsequently, in the fifth game, any one of the roles “F_3 alternative bell_1st” to “F_3 alternative bell_3rd” is determined as the internal winning combination, but since the main navigation board AT is underway, the main control board 71 and the auxiliary The control board 72 does not notify the pressing order of the correct answer. Therefore, as shown in (d) of FIG. 138 (B), the sub control board 72 performs a display indicating that the pressing order is unknown in the display unit 100. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 138, since it is assumed that the answers were incorrect in the pressing order, a combination of bell spilled symbols is displayed. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state in accordance with the display of the combination of the bell spilled symbols. In addition, the secondary control board 72 causes the display unit 100 to display a message indicating that it has fallen from a time between treasure (RT2 gaming state) to a standby state (RT1 gaming state).

  Subsequently, in the sixth game, since the transition to the RT1 gaming state is performed in the fifth game, the state display 147 b is lit in the lighting pattern 1. Further, in the sixth game, any one of the roles “F_RT2 transition lip _123” to “F_RT2 transition lip _321” is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the replay navigation AT is being performed, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pressing order of the correct answer, and urge to shift to the RT2 gaming state. Along with this notification, in the sixth game, the number of Lip navigation has been reduced from three to two. Further, as shown in (e) of FIG. 138, the sub control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 the pressing order for transitioning to the interval between the treasure (RT1 gaming state) and the treasure (RT2 gaming state). Then, when the symbol combination of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, the display unit 100 displays a display indicating that it has arrived from the waiting time to the treasure time.

  Subsequently, in the seventh game, since the transition to the RT2 gaming state is performed in the sixth game, the state indicator 147 b is lit in the lighting pattern 2. Further, in the seventh game, any one of the roles “F_RT3 transition lip _ 123” to “F_RT 3 transition lip _ 321” is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the seventh game is in the replay navigation AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pressing order of the correct answer. Along with this notification, in the seventh game, the number of lip navigations is reduced from two to one. At this time, the sub control board 72 performs the effects illustrated in (f) of FIG. 138 (B) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub control board 72 displays the pressing order of the correct answer on the display unit 100.

  Here, when one of the roles “F_RT3 transition lip _123” to “F_RT3 transition lip _321” is determined as an internal winning combination, if the correct answer is in order, transition lottery to the bell navigation AT is performed and the bell navigation AT is won. Then, the sub control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 a message indicating that the bell navigation AT has been won. Further, in accordance with the winning of the bell navigation AT, the initial value (10) is added to the number of times of the red navigation and the number of bell navigation. In addition, since one is left as the number of trip navigations when winning in the bell navigation AT, the number of trip navigations at the time of winning the navigation navigation is 11 times.

  After that, the game state is changed from the eighth game to the bell navigation AT, and the main control board 71 lights the state indicator 147 b with the lighting pattern 3. In this bell navigation AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the roles “F_RT2 transition lip _123” to “F_RT2 transition lip _321”, and the combination “F_RT3 transition lip _123” to “F_RT3 as long as the number of times of the replay navigation remains. Report the pressing order of the correct answer to "rip _ 321" and the combination "F _ maintenance lip _ 123", and press the correct answer to combination "F_3 alternative bell _1 st" to "F_3 alternative _3 rd" as long as the number of bell navigation remains. Report the order.

(Game example 2)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 139 to FIG. 141, game example 2 in the case of individually managing the lip navigation and the bell navigation will be described. In this game example 2, during the specific section, both the replay navigation and the bell navigation are performed, but the number of notification times of both is individually managed. That is, in this game example 2, the number of times of both the lip navigation and the bell navigation is used as the ending condition of the specific section. It should be noted that "rip-navi" means a notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in a high-rip state, and "bell-navi" means a notification for increasing a medal.

  FIG. 139 (A) shows a game flow in the game example 2. As shown in FIG. 139 (A), the game example 2 has a normal section and a specific section, and also has a high probability that the probability that a role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is high during a specific section. (For example, RT2 gaming state or RT3 gaming state in the gaming example 1), and a low lip probability (for example, RT1 gaming state in the gaming example 1) having a low probability that the role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination.

  In Game Example 2, the main control board 71 performs transition lottery to a specific section during the normal section, and when winning this transition lottery, the main control board 71 causes the gaming state to transition from the normal section to the specific section. . In addition, in the game example 2, the transition lottery to the specific section may be performed by any method.

  In addition, when both of the number of times of the replay navigation and the number of the bell navigation become 0 during the specific section, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. That is, in the game example 2, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 perform notification to maintain the RT gaming state in the high-rip state by the number of times indicated by the number of times of the dip navigation, and the medals by the number of times indicated by the number of times of bell navigation Make a notification to increase it. Then, the main control board 71 ends the specific section and shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section when both of the number of times of the replay navigation and the number of the bell navigation become zero.

  In addition, when the combination of symbols of fall fall replay is displayed during a specific section, the main control board 71 causes the RT gaming state to shift from the high ripple state to the low ripple state, and the combination of promotion replay symbols is displayed. The main control board 71 shifts the RT gaming state from the low ripple state to the high ripple state. In addition, combination of symbols of fall fall replay and promotion replay is optional, but if it matches the expression of the game example 1, for example, combination of symbols of RT1 transition lip corresponds to combination of symbols of fall fall replay, and it also shifts to RT2 The combination of the symbols of Lip and RT3 transition ripple corresponds to the combination of symbols of promotion Replay.

  In addition, the combination of the symbols of RT1 transition lip is displayed at the time of pressing order incorrect answer when the combination “F_Maintenance Lip_123” to “F_Maintenance Lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination, and RT2 transition lip or RT3. The combination of the symbols of the transition lip is the correct pressing order when the combination “F_RT2 transition ripple _123” to “F_RT2 transition ripple _321” and the combination “F_RT3 transition ripple _123” to “F_RT3 transition lip _321” are determined as the internal winning combination It is displayed at the time. Therefore, in the case of the game example 2, with the combination “F_Maintenance_rip_123” to “F_Maintenance_rip_321” being determined as the internal winning combination, the pushing order of the correct answer is informed, and the combination of the fall fall replay symbols is To avoid being displayed, and when the roles “F_RT2 transition lip _123” to “F_RT2 transition lip _321” and the roles “F_RT3 transition lip _123” to “F_RT3 transition lip _321” are determined as internal winning combinations Informing the pressing order of the correct answer, and promoting the display of the combination of symbols of promotion replay.

  In addition, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of the correct answer when the roles “F_Maintenance_rip_123” to “F_Maintenance_rip_321” are determined as the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols of replay is displayed, and the RT gaming state Is kept in the current RT gaming state. That is, when the combination of symbols of replay is displayed when the combination “F_Maintenance_rip_123” to “F_Maintenance_rip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination during the high rep condition, the main control board 71 displays Correct the order), while keeping the RT gaming state in the high-rip state, when the combination of the fall fall replay symbols is displayed (push order incorrect answer), the RT gaming state is shifted from the high-rip state to the low-rip state .

  Subsequently, FIG. 139 (B) is a view showing the feature of the specific section of the gaming example 2. As shown in FIG. 139 (B), the gaming example 2 has a plurality of states of a normal ART and a special state in a specific section. In comparison between the normal ART and the special state, the ART is usually in a state where the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations is faster than that in the special state. In addition, in the game example 2, while adding the number of rip navi and the number of bell navi during the specific section, comparing the normal ART and the special state, during the special state, the additional amount of the number of bell navi is reduced compared to the normal ART. On the other hand, increase the number of additions to the number of Rip navi. That is, during the special state where the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations can be suppressed, the number of times of rep navigation is prioritized and added over the number of bell navigations.

(How to realize special state)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 140, a method of realizing a special state capable of suppressing the consumption speed of the number of times of bell navigation will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the combination "F_3 selection bell A_1st", "F_3 selection bell A_2nd", "F_3 selection bell A_3rd", and the combination "F3 selection bell B_12t", "F3 selection bell B_2nd", "F3 selection" And “bell B_3rd”. In the following, the combinations “F_3 selection bell A_1st” to “F_3 selection bell A_3rd” are simply referred to as combination “F_3 selection bell A”, and the combinations “F_3 selection bell B_1st” to “F_3 selection bell B_3rd” are simply combination “F_3 It may be called "Select bell B".

  As shown in FIG. 140 (A), when the bonus is not won, that is, in a state where the part relating to the bonus is not carried over as the internal winning part, either of the part “F_3 selection bell A” and the part “F_3 selection bell B” The combination of the symbols displayed according to the pressing order is a different role. Specifically, in both of the part "F_3 selection bell A" and the part "F_3 selection bell B", the combination of the symbols of the bell is displayed and 9 medals are paid out at the time of pressing correct, and the pushing order is not correct. At the time of correct answer, the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes is displayed, and the number of medals less than nine (or zero) is paid out.

  Therefore, main control board 71 and sub control board 72, when either of combination “F 3 choice bell A” and combination “F 3 choice bell B” is decided as internal winning combination during the specified section when bonus is not won, The bell navigation (informing the pressing order of the correct answer) is performed as many times as the bell navigation. In other words, during a specific section when the bonus is not won, the number of bell navigations is reduced even if either of the combination “F_3 choice bell A” or the combination “F_3 choice bell B” is determined as the internal winning combination. Become.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), the combination “F_3 selection bell B” is displayed according to the pressing order, during the flag, that is, in the state where the combination related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination. Although the combination of the symbols is a different combination, the combination of the symbols displayed regardless of the pressing order of the combination "F_3 selection bell A" is the same combination. Specifically, the combination of symbols of the bell is displayed, and nine medals are paid out in the correct order of pressing, and the combination of symbols of bell spilled eyes is dispelled when the pressing order is incorrect. Is displayed, and less than nine (or zero) medals are paid out. On the other hand, in the combination “F_3 selection bell A”, a combination of bell symbols is displayed regardless of the pushing order, and nine medals are paid out.

  Therefore, when the combination "F_3 alternative bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section between the flags, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 do not perform notification of the pressing order, but between the flags. When the combination “F_3 selection bell B” is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section of, the bell navigation (notification of the pressing order of the correct answer) is performed for the number of times of the bell navigation. In other words, in the specific section between the flags, even if the combination "F_3 selection bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number of bell navigations is not reduced, and the combination "F_3 selection bell B" is determined as the internal combination winning combination The number of bell navigation will be reduced.

  As described above, the special state realization capable of suppressing the consumption speed of the number of times of the bell navigation by differentiating between the normal ART and the special state depending on whether or not the role related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination or not can do. That is, in the case of the above-described example, a special state capable of suppressing the consumption speed of the number of times of bell navigation is realized by setting a specific section when bonus is not won as normal ART and setting a specific section between flags as a special state. can do.

(Example of addition)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 141, the method of adding the number of times of the red navigation and the number of times of the bell navigation will be described. FIG. 141 (A) defines the lottery value information for the number of times of bell navigation and the number of repetitions of lip navigation for each internal winning combination and game state. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 refers to the addition lottery table shown in FIG. FIG. 141 (B) is a diagram showing an outline of the degree of expectation of addition according to the addition lottery table of FIG. 141 (A).

Referring to FIGS. 141 (A) and (B), it can be seen that the expectation for adding the number of bell navigations and the expectation for adding the number of lip navigations differ between the normal ART and the special state. Specifically, in the addition based on cactus and weak cherries, while the number of bell navigations is more likely to be added during ART, the number of lip navigations is more likely to be added during the special state. More specifically, during the special state, the additional amount of the number of bell navigations is reduced and the additional amount of the number of navigations over the reverse navigation is increased, as compared to that in the normal ART.
In the example shown in FIG. 141, the expectation based on the strong cherry is the same in the normal ART and in the special state.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 of such a game example 2, the lip navigation and the bell navigation are individually managed during the specific section, the lip navigation is performed by the number of times of the navigation, and the bell navigation is performed by the number of the bell navigation. Thereby, even if it is a case where one of the role to be the target of the replay navigation or the role to become the target of the navigation in the specific section is determined as the internal winning combination, only one of the navigation frequency is consumed Since the other navigation count is not consumed, the consumption speed of the navigation count can be relaxed.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 2, a normal ART and a special state are provided as the specific section, and the degree of expectation of the addition is made different according to the current state. Specifically, during normal ART, where the consumption speed of the bell navigation number is high, the bell navigation number is easily added during the ART, and conversely, during a special state where the consumption speed of the bell navigation number is suppressed, the bell navigation number addition amount is reduced. , Increase the amount of Ripunabi times. As a result, it is possible to ease the consumption speed of the navigation times, and as a result, the interest in the specific section is not impaired.

<Method of selecting CZ with different end period>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 142, a method of selecting CZ with different end periods will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the specific section continues for a long period, the specific section is shifted to the normal section without satisfying the termination condition (limit process). Further, since CZ is included in the specific section in addition to the ART gaming state, when limit processing is performed, the ART gaming state performed continuously from CZ has a game period equal to the number of times CZ continues the number of games It will be shorter. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the player can select CZ to be executed from CZs having different end periods, and it is easy to select a CZ considered to be preferable for the player at the time of selection. There is.

  As shown in FIG. 142, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of CZs having different end periods. Specifically, the CZ “short-term battle” shown in FIG. 142 (A) is a CZ whose end period is 0 game, and the CZ “game” shown in FIG. 142 (B) is a CZ whose end period is 1 game CZ The CZ “stable” shown in FIG. 142 (C) is a CZ with an end period of 10 games, and the CZ “disturbance” shown in FIG. 142 (D) is a CZ with an end period of 10 games, FIG. The CZ "long-term battle" shown in (E) is a CZ having a termination period of 30 games. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the duration of the CZ exceeds the termination period of the type of CZ to be executed, the main control board 71 terminates the CZ and shifts the gaming state to the normal section. On the other hand, when the main control board 71 wins the transition lottery to the ART gaming state before the continuation period of the CZ exceeds the ending period of the type of CZ to be executed, the CZ is ended and the gaming state is changed to the ART gaming state Transition.

  Here, a method of selecting CZ will be described. FIGS. 142 (A) to 142 (E) are selection screens for selecting CZ. The selection screen is provided with a selection cursor for selecting CZ. In FIG. 142, the selection cursor indicates CZ “short-term battle” in FIG. 142 (A), CZ “match” in FIG. 142 (B), and CZ “stable” in FIG. 142 (C) FIG. 142 (D) indicates CZ “disturbance” and FIG. 142 (E) indicates CZ “long-term war”. The selection cursor switches, for example, the CZ to be selected as time passes.

  In the selection screen, the player's operation to the chance button (not shown) is accepted, and the main control board 71 is executed as selecting the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor at the timing when the chance button is operated. Accept the selection of CZ and then start the selected CZ. That is, when the chance button is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (A), the main control board 71 accepts the selection from the player as the CZ “short-term battle”, and then the CZ “short-term game”. Start the war. Although the method of specifying the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor by the main control board 71 is arbitrary, for example, the main control board 71 counts the intervals at which the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor is switched. The CZ pointed to by the selection cursor on the substrate 71 can be identified.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the selection cursor points to the CZ "short-term battle" with the shortest end period in the initial state, and thereafter points to other CZs in the order of shorter end periods with the passage of time. . For example, as time passes, the selection cursor points to CZ in the order of CZ "short-term battle", CZ "match", CZ "stable", CZ "disruption", and CZ "long-term war".

  Here, when the limit process is performed as described above, the CZ "short-term battle" with the shortest end period is a game since the gaming period of the ART gaming state is shortened by the number of times the CZ continues to play. It is considered preferable for the disabled. In the pachislot machine 1, the CZ is selected based on the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor, but by pointing the CZ "short-term battle" as the initial state of the selection cursor, the CZ kind to the player A selection method can be realized.

  Also, depending on the player, the game may proceed without making any selection on the selection screen. For example, when the start lever 6 is operated and the game is started without accepting the operation for the chance button on the selection screen (that is, when the predetermined operation is performed), the selection by the player is not performed. become. As described above, when the game is started without accepting the selection of CZ, the main control board 71 starts the CZ having the shortest end period among the plurality of CZs having different end periods. That is, when the player starts the game without selecting a CZ, the main control board 71 takes a CZ "short-term battle" with the shortest end period regardless of the position of the selection cursor at the timing when the game is started. Automatically select, then start the CZ "short-term war". Thus, it is possible to realize a method of selecting a CZ that is kind to the player.

  Note that such a selection screen is displayed, for example, at the start of CZ, in a state in which the right to shift to CZ is granted. That is, the main control board 71 grants the right to shift to CZ to perform shift lottery whether or not to shift to the ART gaming state, and in the state where the right to shift to this CZ is granted, a plurality of types of CZ Accept a selection of one CZ from among

<Reel control at the start of a specific section>
Subsequently, reel control at the start of the specific section will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when starting a specific section, the reel stop control can display a combination of specific symbols such as "7-7-7" (hereinafter referred to as "AT start output"). I do. Specifically, the main control board 71 grants the right to shift to the specific section when winning the shift lottery to the specific section. The right to shift to this specific section is carried over until the gaming state shifts to the specific section, and is cleared (deprived) when the gaming state shifts to the specific section. That is, the main control board 71 causes the gaming state to shift to the specific section when the transition condition to the specific section (for example, the AT start outcome is displayed) in the state where the shift right is granted, and the transfer right clear. Then, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in different modes in the case where the transition right is granted and the case where the transition right is not granted (that is, stop control of the reels). Make a difference).

  FIGS. 143 and 144 are diagrams showing an example of a rotation stop initial setting table used for stop control of the reels, and are used in step S9 and step S12 of FIG. 75 described above. The rotation stop initial setting table is referred to when reel stop control information for stopping the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is determined. The spinning stop initial setting table is used when the role is determined as an internal winning combination in association with the role determined as the internal winning combination, the current gaming state, and the presence or absence of the right to shift to a specific section Define reel stop control information. The main control board 71 refers to the spinning stop initial setting table, acquires reel stop control information corresponding to the internal winning combination, the gaming state, and the presence or absence of the transition right, and uses the reel stop control information to execute the reel 3L, Stop 3C and 3R.

  The reel stop control information associated with the winning combination, the gaming state, and the presence or absence of the transition right is a rotation stop number, determination data by pressing order (draw-in priority table number, draw-in priority selection table number), table number selection Values (change status, stop table data), first change cylinder first stop table change data, first change cylinder stop data table selection data (left first stop stop table), first change cylinder first stop It is information including a table change initial data selection value (change status, table number), and a search order data table number.

  “Pressing order-based determination data” includes a drawing priority order table number and a drawing priority order selection table number. The “drop-in priority order table number” is a number for selecting a pull-up priority order table (not shown). Also, “draw-in priority selection table number” is a number for selecting a pull-in priority selection table (not shown).

  "Table number selection data" is a value to be referred to when stopping all reels when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L, and includes a change status and stop table data.

  The "stop table number" is a number for selecting a stop table to be referred to when stopping all reels when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L. The “change status” is data for changing the line status of each game representing a line referred to in the stop table selected based on the stop table data, and is an initial line status in this embodiment. The state is the A line. Here, when the change status is “0”, the line status is not changed, and when “2”, the line status is changed to the B line if the line status is the A line.

  First change cylinder first stop table change data, first change cylinder stop data table selection data, and first change cylinder first stop table change initial data selection value That is, the data is referred to in the case of the left reel 3L.

  If the first stop reel is the left reel 3L, the "first cylinder first stop table change data" may use or change the same left first stop and stop table after the second stop Is data indicative of If there is a value (a value other than 0) in the first cylinder first stop table change data, the change data search table is selected based on the planned stop position, the data is searched, and the second and subsequent stops are performed. Select a stop table for

  The “first cylinder stop data table selection data” is a number for selecting a first cylinder stop data table (not shown) to be referred to when stopping the first cylinder.

  The “first cylinder first stop table change initial data selection value” is data referred to when stopping the second and third cylinders, and includes a table number and a line status. The "table number" is a number for selecting a first stop and first stop data table which is referred to when stopping the second and third stop reels. The “change status” is data for changing the line status of each game representing a line referred to in the first after-the-first-stop data table selected based on the table number. If the change status is "0", the line status is not changed, and if "2", the line status is changed to B if the line status is A, and if "3", If the line status is A line or B line, it is changed to C line.

  The “search order table number” is a number for selecting a search order table (not shown) for determining the number of sliding symbols.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 (A) and 143 (B), in the pachi-slot machine 1, different reel stop control information is used depending on whether or not the combination relating to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the rotating drum stop initial setting table of FIG. 143 (A) which is referred to when the role related to the bonus is not won, the number for rotating drum stop "17" for the role "F_3 alternative bell _1 st" In the reel stop initial setting table of FIG. 143 (B), which is referred to when the reel stop control information of the reel is specified and the combination relating to the bonus is won, the same combination “F_3 alternative bell _1st” is referred to. Reel stop control information of the number “31” of the spinning stop is defined. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, by changing the reel stop control information according to the presence or absence of the winning combination for the bonus, if the reel stop control is different when the winning combination for the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. You can

  Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 143 (A) and 144 (C), in the pachi-slot machine 1, different reel stop control information is used depending on whether or not the shift right is granted. Specifically, in the case of the rotation stop initial setting table of FIG. 143 (A) which is referred to when the transition right is not granted, the number “17” of the rotation stop number with respect to the combination “F_3 selection bell_1st” In the reel stop initial setting table of FIG. 144 (C) which is referred to in the case where reel stop control information is defined and the transfer right is given, the reel is rotated for the same part “F_3 alternative bell _1st”. Reel stop control information of the stop number "41" is defined. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, by making the reel stop control information different according to the presence or absence of the transfer right, it is possible to make the stop control of the reel different when winning in the transition lottery to the specific section.

  Subsequently, FIG. 145 shows the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol in the case of performing stop control of the reels using the rotation stop initial setting table shown in FIG. 143 and FIG. As shown in FIG. 145, in the normal section where the right to shift to the specific section is not given, when the internal winning combination is “off”, a combination of “off” symbols is displayed, and the internal winning combination is also displayed. Is the combination "F_3 alternative bell_1st" to "F_3 alternative bell_3rd", the combination of the symbols of the bell is displayed if the correct order is pressed, and if the order is incorrect the symbol of the bell spill or the first piece is displayed The combination is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the standby section of the specific section to which the right to transition to the specific section is granted, when the internal winning combination is "off", the combination of symbols of the AT start appearance when the eye pressing operation is accurate Is displayed, and a combination of “off” symbols is displayed if the eye pressing operation is incorrect. Also, when the internal winning combination is the combination "F_3 selection bell _ 1st" ~ "F 3 selection bell _3 rd", when the eye pressing operation is correct, the combination of symbols of the AT start appearance is displayed, and the eye pressing operation is not If it is correct, a combination of bell, bell spill or first shot symbol is displayed.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, since the stop control of the reel is made different in accordance with the presence or absence of the transition right to the specific section, the combination of the symbols of the AT start appearance is made according to the stop operation of the player at the start of the specific section. The rotation of the reel can be stopped as indicated.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the stop control of the reels may be made different depending on the type of the specific section to which the transition is made. That is, the pachislot machine 1 has a plurality of specific sections different in degree of advantage for the player, and the main control board 71 has the right to shift to one specific section, and the one specific section. The stop control of the reel may be made different depending on the case where the right to shift to another specific section different from the above is given. Specifically, when the same combination is determined as the internal winning combination, in the case where the right to shift to one particular section is granted and in the case where the right to shift to another particular section is granted. A spinning stop initial setting table may be provided so that the reel stop control information to be used is different.

As a result, the stop control of the reel can be made different depending on the type of the specific section to which the transition is made, so, for example, the case of moving to a specific area more advantageous to the player and the case of moving to other specific areas Thus, combinations of symbols displayed at the start of a specific section can be made different. From the player's point of view, the degree of advantage of the subsequent game is different depending on the combination of the symbols displayed at the start of the specific section, and therefore there is a strong interest in the stop operation at the start of the specific section. The interest of the game is improved.
In the pachislot machine 1, although the winning probability of the internal winning combination differs depending on the bonus state or the RT gaming state, the winning probability of the internal winning combination does not differ according to the type of the specific section.

  Here, in recent years, there is also known a pachislot machine in which another reel (hereinafter, "second main reel") is provided in addition to the reel (hereinafter, "first main reel") controlled according to the result of internal lottery. ing. For example, a pachislot machine having three reels of the above-mentioned reels 3L, 3C, 3R as the first main reel, and a reel provided only in one line to the right of the reel 3R as the second main reel is known. . The reels that make the stop control different according to the result of the transition lottery may be the first main reel or may be the second main reel.

  When the stop control of the second main reel is made different according to the result of the transition lottery, in the game in which the main control board 71 performs the transition lottery to the specific section, the first main reel in response to the operation of the start lever 6 Start the rotation of the second main reel before starting the rotation of. Then, when the stop button 7R is operated, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the second main reel according to the result of the transfer lottery to the specific section. Specifically, when the transition lottery to the specific section is won, the rotation of the second main reel is stopped so as to be able to display a symbol which is not displayed when the win is not won. Thus, when the rotation of the second main reel is stopped according to the result of the transition lottery to the specific section, the main control board 71 thereafter starts the rotation of the first main reel.

In the above example, the second main reel is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 7R, but it is also possible to provide a stop button dedicated to the second main reel in addition to the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R. Good. Also, a plurality of second main reels may be provided instead of one.
As described above, by separating the stop operation for the transition lottery result of the specific section and the stop operation for the result of the internal lottery, it is possible to enjoy the sights of both players, and it becomes easy for the player to grasp the game characteristics.

<Control when changing settings>
Subsequently, control at the time of setting change will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a correspondence between control contents at the time of setting change and at the time of clearing of the main RAM 33. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control board 71 plays a role related to a bonus carried over as an internal winning combination even during the flag when a new set value is set (at the time of setting change) Is maintained, and the specific section is maintained even during the specific section, and the result of the transfer lottery is maintained even during the waiting section winning the transfer lottery of the specific section. That is, in the pachislot machine 1, even when a new set value is set during a flag, during a specific section, or during a standby section, the gaming state before the new set value is set is maintained as it is. .
In addition, when a new setting value is set (at the time of setting change), it is not limited only to changing to a different setting value such as setting 1 to setting 6 and the same setting such as setting 1 to setting 1 This includes the case of resetting the value (a so-called reversion to the same setting).

  On the other hand, when the main RAM 33 is cleared (at the time of RAM clearing), the main control board 71 clears all the gaming states. That is, the main control board 71 clears the part associated with the bonus carried over when the RAM is cleared during the flag, and ends the specific period when the RAM is cleared during the specific period. When the gaming state is shifted to the normal section, and the RAM is cleared during the standby section, the result of the transition lottery is cleared.

  As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 clears the specific section when the RAM clear is performed during the specific section, but maintains the specific section as it is when the setting change is performed during the specific section. From the gaming shop side, since it is possible to select whether to maintain / clear a specific section while changing the set value, it is possible to give the gaming shop side various options regarding the operation of the pachislot machine.

  The setting change operation can be performed, for example, via the setting key type switch 430 (see FIG. 116), and the RAM clear operation is performed, for example, via the reset switch 442 (see FIG. 116). It can be carried out.

Fourth Embodiment
Subsequently, a pachi-slot machine 1 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 164. In addition, about the same structure as the pachislot machine 1 of 3rd Embodiment, and control about the pachislot machine 1 of 4th Embodiment, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. The "specific section" described in the third embodiment is referred to as an "advantage section" in the fourth embodiment, and a gaming state in which a so-called navigation or presentation mode is added is referred to as a "disbursed state". In addition, when using a different term by the element the same as or similar to what was explained in the 1st-3rd embodiment, the term used by the 1st-3rd embodiment is attached to the end of the term in parentheses. The features of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment described below can be similarly applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments.

[Game flow of the pachislot machine of the fourth embodiment]
First, the gaming flow of the pachislot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 147 is a transition flow of the ball out state of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing the process during the MB operation in the ball out state. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an overview of the ball out state and the game state in a list.

  As shown in FIG. 147, the ball-out state is roughly divided into a normal section and an advantageous section. In the normal section, the advantageous section lamp (the status indicator 147b) is turned off by the control of the main control board 71, and in the advantageous section, the advantageous section lamp (the status indicator 147b) is turned on. The advantage zone lamp notifies the player that the user is not staying in the advantage zone due to the light off state, while notifying the player that the user is not staying in the advantage zone according to the lighting state. However, in the present embodiment, even when staying in the advantageous section and in the state where the advantageous section lamp is on, it is suppressed that the information on the necessary stop operation is notified to the player by the lighting mode of the notification lamp 147a. There are (disallowed) states and acceptable states. As shown in FIG. 148, the MB operates in accordance with the winning of the MB regardless of whether it is in the normal section or the advantageous section. In the present embodiment, basically, a short MB (abbreviated as "SMB"), which ends in 1 G with a medal having a payout of more than one card as a termination condition, is basically won. Thus, there is a long MB (abbreviated as "LMB") which is won by passing through the state between flags and ending by digesting a plurality of games with medal payouts exceeding 81 as an end condition. The LMB has no setting difference with respect to the winning probability, and the SMB has a setting difference with respect to the winning probability. In the following description, SMB and LMB are collectively referred to as MB.

  In the normal section, “normal” is executed as a ball out state. As shown in FIG. 147 and FIG. 149, “normal” is an initial state after power on or after setting change, and all variables are cleared after the end of the advantageous section to be described later, and transition to this “normal” state is made. Do. In the “normal”, navigation is not performed, and an advantageous section transition lottery is performed for each unit game (one game). If winning by advantageous section transition lottery, it will be advantageous section winning. In the advantageous section winning, there are "normal winning" and "GG winning". In the case of "normal win", the game is shifted to "normal advantage" described later as the ball withdrawal state from the next game. On the other hand, in the case of "GG win", it shifts to "GG precursor" which will be described later as a ball withdrawal state. The advantageous section transition lottery will be described later.

  In the advantageous section, “normally advantageous”, “JOT”, “GG precursor”, “MB_HZ”, “JM”, and “GG” can be implemented as the main withdrawal state. The advantageous section is a state where it is possible to generate a navigation (Bell navi) that can win the winning order small part of the maximum payout number (in the present embodiment, "pushing order bell" or "dating order bell"). It is a state where it can not be made to end until at least one of the end conditions is satisfied among the end conditions such as the operation of the win of the forward bell or the operation of the bonus (MB). When the above-mentioned end condition is satisfied, an advantageous section end lottery described later is executed, and the process shifts to “normal” according to the lottery result. Depending on the lottery result of the end of the advantageous section lottery, the advantageous section may be continued. However, in the present embodiment, except when the MB is activated, the bell navigation non-generation state (notice suppression state, in which the bell navigation can not be generated even if the pushing order bell is hit until 100 G after the advantageous section is started). Also called "standby section". That is, in this embodiment, in principle, the first bell navigation can be generated according to the winning order of the pushing order bell on condition that the predetermined game number (100 G) has elapsed without the MB operating from the start of the advantageous section It will be in the state where the bell navigation can be generated, the notification permission state). In addition, as an exception, even when the predetermined game number (100 G) has elapsed from the start of the advantageous section, if the player wins the MB, the bell navigation generation possible state (notifiable state) is established. It should be noted that regardless of the number of games, the winning order of the bell may be managed with a flag, and the bell navigation non-generation state and the bell navigation generation possible state may be controlled according to the presence or the number of flags. Further, in the present embodiment, when the advantageous section is started and reaches, for example, 1500 G, the advantageous section can be obtained even before the termination condition of the advantageous section (push order bell win, bonus (MB) operation) is satisfied. A limit process is performed such as forced termination and transition to a normal section (“normal” state). For example, in the state of ART "GG" described later and reaching 1500 G from the start of the advantageous section, limit processing is executed even if the number of remaining games of ART remains. Thereby, the advantageous section is ended together with the ART, and the transition to the normal section is made.

  As shown in FIGS. 147 and 149, “normally advantageous” is shifted by “normally winning” by advantageous section lottery in “normal”. "Normally advantageous" is the case where the result of lottery continues which is the end of the advantageous section at the end of ART (GG), which will be described later. Also migrate. In "normally advantageous", JOT lottery and GG lottery described later are performed. When the JOT lottery is won, it shifts from "normal advantage" to the state of "JOT" described later, and when it wins the GG lottery, it shifts from "normal advantage" to the state of "GG precursor" described later.

  The "normal advantage" includes a normal mode in which the "GG" winning probability of the GG lottery is different, such as "low probability", "heaven preparation", "heaven", "super heaven", "special", and "precursor next time". The type of the normal mode is initially determined by the advantageous section initial normal mode lottery, which will be described later, in the case where the "normal" becomes "normal winning" by the advantageous section lottery. In the normal mode in the "normally advantageous" mode, the normal mode transition lottery is performed according to the winning combination, and the mode is basically promoted to the mode in which the winning probability of the GG lottery is high or the mode is maintained according to the lottery result. Further, the “normally advantageous” includes a JOT lottery mode in which the winning probability of “JOT” is different, such as “low probability”, “high probability A”, “high probability B”, and “high probability C”. The JOT lottery mode type is initially "low certainty", and the "normally advantageous" JOT lottery mode is either a JOT lottery mode transition lottery or a JOT lottery mode transition lottery exclusively for reaching the specified number of games depending on the winning combination. Promoted, fallen or maintained. Basically, in the JOT lottery mode transition lottery, the mode is dropped or maintained to a mode in which the winning probability of “JOT” is low. In the special JOT lottery mode transition lottery at the time of reaching the defined game number, for example, it is executed when 20G, 40G, 80G are reached, and the mode is promoted to a mode in which the winning probability of JOT lottery is high or the mode is maintained. After 120 G, it becomes a dedicated lottery mode, and the winning probability increases from the beginning in JOT lottery and GG lottery. It should be noted that after the "hamari ceiling" becomes a dedicated lottery mode, it will not be performed lottery of the end of the advantageous section (see FIG. 155) which will be a trigger for transition from "normal advantage" to "normal", substantially It is desirable to confirm the "GG" win. By performing such remedial measures, it is possible to give a benefit to the player who has reduced the medals by advancing the game by about 120 games without substantially winning the push order bell or MB, Even if it is impossible to pull the bell or win the MB in a state of "normal advantage", it is possible to advance the game with a sense of expectation for reaching the "hamari ceiling" even if it is not possible to pull the bell or MB (to win). It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of Also, in the "hammer ceiling" mode, only "GG" may be extracted or only "JOT" may be extracted. In addition, a situation in which it is difficult to win "GG" or "JOT" by reaching the "Hamari ceiling" by making the lottery probability of "GG" or "JOT" higher than each normal mode and JOT lottery mode. It is desirable to increase the interest of the game by preventing the occurrence of Also, even if you win "JOT" and fail to "JOT", it is desirable to return to the "hamari ceiling" mode and guarantee the benefits above the medal increase section "GG" win . In addition, when winning "JOT" in the "hameri ceiling" mode where benefits of "GG" or more are decided, the number of games until "GG", which is the medal increase section, starts to increase as a result However, when winning "GG" via "JOT", the ART is started from "JM" (superimposed special zone) described later, so the medals consumed during "JOT" of about 5 games Even if you take into consideration, the expected value of medals that can be acquired is higher than when you win "GG" directly, so it is said that medals will be reduced by extra chance game even though "GG" is fixed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Furthermore, in the “normal advantage”, the probability of winning the MB described later is about 1/17, and the possibility of winning an MB is high by the time it reaches 100 G. Then, when the MB wins, the bell navigation can be generated, and after the MB operation ends, an advantageous section end lottery described later is executed, and the transition to “normal” is performed according to the lottery result. In short, if it moves to "normal advantage" and exceeds the predetermined number of games (100G), it will be in the state where bell navigation can be generated, but there is a possibility of winning in the game in which MB is established before reaching 100G or through the inter-flag state. As it becomes higher, the average stay number of “normally advantageous” is approximately 25 G. Although the details will be described later, the symbol combination of MB is drawn in 1 (all push order, so that the game is not made to increase the payout rate by intentionally delaying the winning of MB. It is desirable to configure the symbol arrangement and the reel stop control so that winning is possible even if the stop button 7L, 7C, 7R is operated to stop at the timing.

  As shown in FIG. 147 and FIG. 149, "JOT" is shifted by JOT lottery by winning JOT in "normal advantage". "JOT" is a chance gaming state in which it is relatively easy to win "GG" described later. "JOT" has a type in which the winning probability of the GG lottery is different according to the JOT lottery mode such as "normal" or "legend". For example, when the JOT lottery mode is "high probability A" and the type is "legend", the GG winning probability is higher than the case where the JOT lottery mode is "high probability A" and the type is "normal". Basically, the GG winning probability is higher in the case of the type “legend” than in the case of the “normal”. The type of JOT is determined by a random combination of no part. When GG lottery is won, it shifts from "JOT" to the state of "JM" described later. If the prescribed game number (5G) of "JOT" is finished without winning with GG lottery, the game shifts to "normal advantage". In addition, in "JOT", the navigation of the winning order bell is not basically performed. Further, the type of "JOT" may be determined with reference to the internal winning combination of a unit game (game) which has won the JOT lottery. For example, when “JOT” is won with the winning of “strong bell”, “legend” may be more easily selected than when winning with another role. In addition, the type of "JOT" may refer to the JOT lottery mode at the time of winning "JOT", and the JOT lottery such as "low probability", "high probability A", "high probability B", "high probability C" The selectivity of "legend" may be different for each mode or part thereof. In addition, in the above-mentioned "hameri ceiling" mode, a bonus such as "determination of legend" is provided, and a remedy is provided for the player who has reduced the medal, thereby suppressing the decline in the player's willingness to play the game. It may be During “JOT”, the GG lottery is performed with reference to the internal winning combination during 5 games, but at the time of losing, since the internal winning combination is considered to be a non-winning condition, the GG lottery is not performed. It may be Alternatively, the GG lottery may be performed with reference to at least one of the internal winning combination and the stopped game. In the case of performing GG lottery based on the stopped appearance, the player can enjoy the appearance on the reel, and when performing GG lottery based on the internal winning combination, the control load on the main control board 71 is reduced. can do.

  “As shown in FIG. 147 and FIG. 149,“ GG precursor ”is transitioned by becoming a GG winning by“ GG ”in“ normal ”or“ normally advantageous ”. The "GG precursor" transitions to the "GG" after the GG preparation state after the defined game number has been consumed. However, when the normal mode stays in "special" and shifts to "GG precursor" due to the winning of GG, it shifts to "GG" through "JM" described later. In "GG precursor", the rank up lottery of GG initial mode lottery is executed from the start time. Basically, the higher the rank of the GG initial mode lottery, the more advantageous the player is.

  As shown in FIGS. 147 and 149, “MB_HZ” is shifted by winning LMB regardless of the normal section or the advantageous section. In "MB_HZ", HZ mode promotion lottery and non-questionable GG lottery are executed. In the HZ mode, the higher the rank, the more advantageous the player is. When the operation of the LMB is completed by winning the GG lottery, the state shifts from "MB_HZ" to "GG" through the state of "JM" described later. When the operation of the LMB is completed without winning the GG lottery, the state shifts from “MB_HZ” to the original ball-out state (eg, “normal”, “normally advantageous”, etc.).

  As shown in FIGS. 147 and 149, “JM” is a so-called ART overlay specialization zone, and transitions after the defined game number of “GOT” or “GG precursor” in “JOT” or “MB_HZ”. . In "JM", additional lottery of the number of GG games is executed according to the type of JM. After the defined number of games of "JM" is consumed, if the final lottery is won, if there is JM stock, it becomes "JM" as it is, and if it is not JM stock, it shifts to "GG".

  As shown in FIGS. 147 and 149, “GG” is a so-called state of ART, and transitions from “JM” or “GG precursor”. In "GG", there are modes with different degrees of advantage such as "GG", "Chance A", "Chance B" and "Chance C", and additional lottery and various mode transition lottery are executed. For example, “GG” is given an initial game number of 100 G, for example, and the number of games is added according to the result of the additional lottery. At the end of the game number of "GG", an advantageous section lottery with no winning combination is executed, and if the lottery result is "continue", it shifts to "normal advantage", while if it is "end", it shifts to "normal" Do.

  As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, “MB” is a so-called bonus state, and may occur in response to winning in any of the normal section and the advantageous section except during LMB operation. In the "MB", the transition to the normal mode, the transition to the JOT mode, the transition to the GG mode, the number-of-games lottery, etc. are executed.

[Playing state by control of main control board]
Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the gaming state under the control of the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a transition flow of the gaming state of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 150, the gaming states include RT0 and RT1 having relatively low replay winning probability, and RT2 and RT3 having relatively high replay winning probability. RT0 is the initial state after the setting change or the gaming state after the end of the MB, and is a state to stay when the ball out state is “normal”, and when a bell spill or RT1 transition lip is displayed, RT1 Migrate to RT1 is a state to stay mainly when the ball status is "normal", and shifts to RT2 when the RT2 transition message is displayed. RT2 is an intermediate state at the time of RT3 transition, and moves to RT3 when an RT3 transition message is displayed. RT3 is a so-called ART state in which the ball state corresponds to "GG" or "JM" or the like, and transitions to RT1 through display of a bell spill or RT1 transition lip.

  In addition, while the initial state after the setting change is always “normal” at RT0, in the initial state after power on without setting change, the gaming state before turning off the power (generally RT1) It will be in the "normal" state. In the initial state after the setting change, winning the advantageous section in the “normal” state of RT0 becomes a relatively advantageous advantageous section compared to winning the advantageous section in the initial state after power on without setting change . This will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Internal lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and defines lottery value information corresponding to each combination. FIG. 151 shows internal lottery tables to be referred to in RT0 to RT3 and in MB and in MB (operation), respectively.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction becomes negative by sequentially subtracting the random value for lottery, which is extracted from the predetermined numerical value range “0 to 65535”, by the lottery value corresponding to each combination ( An internal lottery is performed by making a determination of what is called "whether a digit" has occurred.

  Therefore, the higher the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the role to which this is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be represented by “lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”.

  In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of winning combination and the winning probability are related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination according to the type of the RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables of RT0 to RT3 shown in FIG. 151, it can be seen that the types of winning combinations and winning probabilities relating to replays determined as internal winning combinations are different in each gaming state. As the most characteristic point, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, “SMB (No. 48)” to “LMB + F_XD lip (No. 50)” have a probability of about 1/17 as an internal winning combination in RT0 to RT3. It is decided as an internal winning combination. By the way, in RT0 to RT3 or inside MB, push order bell ("F_4 choice bell 1A (No. 34)" to "F_4 choice bell 4B (No. 41)") wins the internal winning with about 1/4 probability. It is decided as a role. In addition, SMB is a bonus combination having a setting difference and can be determined as a single winning combination of "SMB (No. 48)", whereas LMB is a bonus combination having no setting difference, "LMB + F_Flip Lip" It can be determined as a winning combination of B (No. 49) or “LMB + F_XD Lip (No. 50)”. In addition, as for "SMB," symbol combination corresponding to "SMB" is only pull-in 1 and only one wins (in all push order, even if stop button 7L, 7C, 7R is operated to stop at any timing) The symbol array and the reel stop control are designed to be able to win as long as they are not hampered, and they must be carried over in order to win in the established game (a game won for the first time, not for carrying over from a bonus non-winning condition). Absent. Since "LMB" is won internally with a replay game combination (replay) in the establishment game, the replay game combination wins priority over "LMB", so when "LMB" is established, it is always between flags Move into the state of MB inside. And since the symbol combination corresponding to "LMB" is also pull-in 1, it always wins unless a small winning combination or a re-playing combination winning at a priority over a bonus is established simultaneously in the inter-flag state. With such a role configuration, the player intentionally avoids winning of the MB by aiming to delay the fulfillment of the ending condition of the advantageous section, thereby increasing the reach rate to the “hameri ceiling”. It is possible to prevent the capture method and to suppress unexpected damage on the hall side.

<Normal_advantage zone transition lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the normal / favorable section transition lottery table will be described. The normal / favorable section transition lottery table is a table to be referred to when performing the advantageous section transition lottery based on the internal winning combination for each game (unit game) in the “normal” state. As shown in the figure, in the normal _ advantageous section transition lottery table, as a reference item, "matching bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, chance lip, weak chance", "middle chance, beat “Rip”, “strong bell”, “decision role”, “LMB” are defined, and “Not winning”, “normal advantage”, “special role”, “LMB” lottery value indicating the lottery result for each reference item It is prescribed. As an internal winning combination shown in FIG. 151, “Bell-order Bell” corresponds to “F_4 selection bell 1A (No. 34)” to “F_4 selection bell 4B (No. 41)”, and “Common bell, 1 sheet” is , “F_common bell A (No. 45) to F_common bell B (No. 46)”, “F_1 sheet combination (No. 47)”, “common lip, chance lip, weak chance” Equivalent to F_ Common Lip (No. 25), “F_ Chance Lip (No. 26)” and “F_ Weak Chance (No. 44)”, “Medium Chance, Bribe Lip” is “F_ Chance Role” (No. 43), “F _ リ Lip A (No. 31)” to “F _ _ Lip B (No. 32)”, “strong bell” is “F _ strong bell (No. 42)” “Definite role” corresponds to “F_Black BAR Lip (No. 37)”, “F_Red BAR Lip No. 28) ”,“ F_purple 7 lip A (No. 29) ”to“ F_ purple 7 lip B (No. 30) ”,“ LMB ”is“ LMB + F_Flip lip B (No. 49) It corresponds to "LMB + F_XD lip (No. 50)". The "specific combination" as the lottery result is a trigger for specific processing as a "fixed combination".

  According to the advantageous section transition lottery using such a normal / favorable section transition lottery table, for example, in the “normal” state, when winning a “following bell”, the “normally advantageous” lottery result is obtained with a probability of 1/256. It will be obtained and it will be in the state of "normal advantage" from the next game based on the lottery result. In addition, for example, winning a "medium chance" or a "rolling lip" gives a lottery result of "normal advantage" with a probability of 248/256, and based on the result of the lottery, "generally advantageous" from the next game. In addition, there is a case that the lottery result of "GG" can be obtained with a probability of 8/256, and in this case, the state of "GG precursor" will be started from the next game based on the lottery result. The winning probability of such "GG" is about 3.2% at the winning of "Medium chance, rip lip", it is about 12.5% at the winning of "strong bell", and it is on the "favorable section". Is lower than the probability of

<Normal_ advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the normal / favorable zone initial normal mode lottery table will be described. Normal-advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table, in the first game (unit game) immediately after transitioning to "advantageous section" by winning the transition to "advantageous section" from the "normal" to the advantageous section transition, the normal mode of the first game It is a table to be referred to when determining by the initial normal mode lottery. As shown in the figure, in the normal _ advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table, as a reference item, "matching bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, chance rep, weak chance", "middle chance" , "River Lip", "Strong Bell", "Defining Role", "LMB" are defined, and "low probability", "Heart preparation", "Heaven", as a kind of normal mode showing the lottery result for each reference item. The “super heaven”, “special”, and “next precursor” lottery values are defined.

  According to the advantageous section initial normal mode lottery using such a normal_ advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table, for example, in the first game “normal advantage”, when “successful bell” is won, “low” with a probability of 248/256 A lottery result of “certain” is obtained, and in the first game, a “low certainty” normal mode is set based on the lottery result. On the other hand, for example, in the case of winning the “bating bell”, the lottery result of “heaven preparation” is obtained with a probability of 6/256, and in this case, in the “normal advantage” first game, based on the lottery result. It becomes the normal mode of heaven preparation. After the first game of "normal advantage", the normal mode may be promoted in accordance with the lottery result of the normal mode transition lottery. Normal mode is promoted in the following order: "low probability", "heaven preparation", "heaven", "super heaven", "special", "next precursor" (including promotion of two or more stages), basically The winning probability of “GG” (see Fig. 154) is so high, but in the case of “special” that can also be the normal mode in the first game, the winning probability of “GG” is “super heaven” It is not necessarily higher than the case (see FIG. 154). Also, the winning probability of "GG" when the normal mode is "low certainty" or "heaven preparation" in the "normally advantageous" state is lower than the winning probability of "GG" in the "normal" state. (See FIGS. 152 and 154). As a result, immediately after the transition from “normal” to “normally advantageous”, it is likely to be more difficult to win “GG” than in the “normal” state. This will be described in more detail with reference to the Normal Advantage_GG lottery table described later.

<Normal advantage _ GG lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the normal advantage GG lottery table will be described. Normal advantage _ GG lottery table is provided for each type of normal mode (“low definite”, “heaven preparation”, “heaven”, “super heaven”, “special”, “next precursor”), “generally advantageous” It is a table referred to when determining transition to "GG"("GGwinning") based on the internal winning combination for each of the normal modes. As shown in the same figure, the normal advantage _ GG lottery table corresponding to each normal mode includes, as reference items, “border order bell”, “common bell, 1 sheet”, “common lip, false lip”, “weak chance”, "Chance Lip", "Medium Chance" and "Strong Bell" are defined, and a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (not winning, winning) is defined for each reference item.

  According to the GG lottery using such a normal advantage _G lottery table, for example, in the case of the “low probability” normal mode in the “normally advantageous” state, when the “weak chance” is satisfied, 1/256 of The lottery result of winning "GG" is obtained with probability, and then it shifts to the state of "GG" through "GG precursor".

  Here, when the normal mode is "low probability" or "heaven preparation", the probability of winning "GG" also takes into consideration the probability of winning an internal winning combination, the probability of winning "GG" ("low probability" or "heaven Preparation ") = about 0.4% × 0.8 + 0.8% × 0.3 + 12.5% × 0.1 = 1.81%. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 152, in the “normal” time, the probability of winning “GG” by advantageous section transition lottery similarly similarly considering the winning probability of internal winning combination, “GG” winning probability (normal time) = 2. It will be around 5%. That is, in this embodiment, the initial normal mode (mainly "low probability" or "heaven preparation") that has shifted to "normally advantageous" has a lower probability of winning "GG" than in the "normal" state. It is suppressed, and it is more difficult to shift to "GG" immediately after shifting to "normal advantage" than "normal" state. As a result, even in the “normal” state, the expectation that it may shift to “GG” without going through “normal advantage” can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Also, even when the advantageous section ends and the advantageous section lamp <status indicator 147b) turns off, it can not necessarily be said that it is the most disadvantageous situation, so let's stop the game when the lamp turns off Can be motivated to continue the game. In addition, in the game arcades other than immediately after the opening of the store, a vacant platform will be selected from the situation where the predecessor has been left with the game stopped. Even if the above-mentioned device is applied, the number of stands left in the situation where the advantageous section lamp is turned off tends to be more, temporarily the situation of the advantageous section lamp is relatively the most disadvantageous in the model If that is decided, the player may hesitate to start the game, as it is probably not necessary to start the game from the most disadvantageous situation. It can be said that it is a player who is very motivated to play at the time of visiting the game hall and watching the model, but such a player's motivation leads to a decrease in the operating rate. As mentioned above, by making the situation of the advantageous section lamp lights out not necessarily the most disadvantageous among the gaming states of the model, it can not be said that it is the most disadvantageous situation for the time being. It is also possible to expect the player to have a feeling of "let's go" and suppress the decrease in the operation rate.

<Normal advantage-advantageous section end lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 155, a description will be given of the normal advantageous / favorable section end lottery table. The normal advantage _ advantageous section end lottery table is provided for each type of normal mode (“low definite”, “heaven preparation”, “heaven”, “super heaven”, “special”), and “normally advantageous” It is a table referred to when determining the end of the advantageous section based on the internal winning combination for each normal mode. When the normal mode is "precursor next time", in order not to end the advantageous section, there is no provision of the end of the advantageous section end lottery table corresponding to the "next premonition". As shown in the figure, in the normal advantage-advantageous section end lottery table corresponding to each normal mode, as a reference item, "run order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, fail rip", "weak""Chance","ChanceLip","MediumChance" and "Strong Bell" are defined, and a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (continuation, end) is defined for each reference item.

  According to such an end-of-advantage-end section lottery table, according to the end-of-advantage section lottery, after reaching, for example, 100 G from the start of the advantageous section, in the “normally advantageous” state, for example, the “low certainty” normal mode In this case, winning the "bating bell" will result in the lottery result of the end of the advantageous section with a high probability of 252/256, and from the next game the "normal advantageous" state of the advantageous section to the "normal" of the normal section. Transition to the state of On the other hand, for example, even if the player wins the batting order bell in the low probability normal mode, the lottery result of the advantageous section continuation may be obtained with a low probability of 4/256. In this case, the advantageous section is continued without being ended. Alternatively, after a predetermined number of games have passed after the lottery result of the end of the advantageous section is obtained, the state may be shifted to the “normal” state of the normal section. Further, after the lottery result of the end of the advantageous section is obtained, by providing a transition wait state of a predetermined number of games before shifting to the “normal” state of the normal section, the advantageous section continues or the victory in the predetermined number of games It may be possible to perform continuous rendition across multiple games, such as winning the game and / or winning GG, and ending the advantageous section in defeat, which can enhance the interest of the game. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the interest section lamp is turned off in the middle of the continuous effect, and a state of interest such as a defeat being determined in the middle of the continuous effect is lowered. In addition, as a continuous effect, the basic resolution is reached with a game number one game or more shorter than the predetermined game number waiting for transition, and the pattern to revive in the next game in which the defeat effect as a basic resolution is generated You may If the advantageous zone lamp is turned off at the third stop, for example, of the game in which the defeat determination effect is generated, the possibility of continuing the advantageous section or winning of the GG in the revival effect disappears, so the motivation to continue the game of the next game is reduced. Because it is a consideration to avoid such a situation. A specific example is a case where the predetermined game number is five games, the contents up to the finalization excluding one game for the resurrection production in continuous production are constituted by four games at the maximum, and the resurrection production is performed in one game. By turning off the advantageous section lamp after the player confirms that the resurrection effect is not generated, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the interest of the continuous effect is lowered halfway. When the limiter (limit process) is activated, it is not possible to provide a transition waiting state before transitioning from “normally advantageous” to “normal” in the normal section. It is better to suppress the occurrence of continuous effects related to continuation, and to prevent the situation where the continuous effects are cut off by the limiter.

<Common_end advantageous section end lottery table>
Next, the common_end advantageous section end lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The common_end advantageous section end lottery table is, for example, a table referred to when determining the end of the advantageous section regardless of the internal winning combination at the end of “GG” (ART). As shown in the figure, in the common_end advantageous section end lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (continuation, termination) is defined.

  According to the end time advantage section end lottery using such a common_end time advantage section end lottery table, for example, at the end time when the number of games of “GG” is digested, 243/256 regardless of the internal winning combination The odds result in the lottery result at the end of the advantageous section, and the next game is shifted to the "normal" state of the normal section. On the other hand, for example, when the game number “GG” is finished, the lottery result of the advantageous section continuation may be obtained with a probability of 13/256 regardless of the internal winning combination. In this case, the advantageous section is continued by transitioning from the "GG" to the "normally advantageous" state without the advantageous section being ended. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 152 to 156, in the processing related to AT, a common table is adopted in all the settings 1 to 6. As a result, the setting difference of the AT becomes extremely high, so that it is possible to suppress the prosperity from being too high, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity necessary for the AT lottery in the main control board 71.

[About the flow of the advantageous section]
Next, the flow of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 157 to 159 illustrate the specification example 1 for generating the bell navigation from the beginning of the advantageous section, and in the specification example 1, the flow of the advantageous section is described for three patterns in which the batting bell combination and the winning order of MBs are different. FIG. FIG. 160 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the advantageous section according to Example 1 of the fourth embodiment. As a difference from the specification example 1, in the embodiment 1, the bell navigation suppressed state (the bell navigation non-generation state) is immediately after the start of the advantageous section. FIG. 161 is a view for comparing the amount of payout in the advantageous section of the specification example 1 and the example 1, and shows the effect of the example 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 162 is a view for explaining the flow at the end of the advantageous section according to the specification example 2, and FIG. 163 is a view for explaining the flow at the end of the advantageous section according to the second example of the fourth embodiment. It is. FIG. 164 is a diagram for describing after power-on when there is no setting change and after power-on when the setting change is performed as Example 3 of the fourth embodiment. The specification example is a specification exemplified to explain the effects of each embodiment, but each specification example is not a well-known technology, and when adopted, it exhibits an effect according to each specification. Depending on the playability intended by the planner, it is a specification that can be suitably adopted as a means for solving the problem. Since “MB” shown in FIGS. 158 to 160 corresponds to “SMB” and “LMB” shown in FIG. 151, these are collectively referred to as “MB”, but “SMB with high winning probability is mainly In the case of the state between flags, illustration is omitted.

<End condition of advantageous section>
The termination conditions of the advantageous section in the specification example 1 shown in FIGS. 157 to 159 and the embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 160 are as follows.
Condition 1: At least one or more occurrences of push order notification due to winning of the batting bell Condition 2: At least one or more winning or actuation of MB (Because it is activated by winning, it may be determined based on whichever)
Condition 3: A predetermined end condition is satisfied on the premise that at least one of the condition 1 and the condition 2 is satisfied. The advantageous section is ended when a predetermined end condition in the condition 3 is satisfied. There is no difference between 1 and Example 1.
In addition, a predetermined period has elapsed (20 games or more has passed) from the start of the advantageous section, or the end lottery of each game advantageous section is started from the start of the advantageous section, and the termination is performed before the satisfaction of the condition 1 or 2 described above. If you have won in, set the end flag, even if it is considered that the condition 3 is satisfied in the game that satisfies the condition 1 by the occurrence of the bell navigation or the game that satisfies the condition 2 by the MB operation, the advantageous section is ended. Good. In addition, a transition wait state of at least one game or more may be provided between the satisfaction of condition 3 and the termination of the advantageous section. In addition, although it describes with MB for convenience of explanation, it is good also considering operation | movement of predetermined | prescribed bonus other than MB as completion | finish conditions. In addition, as a modification, in a model without bonus, or a model having only a single bonus (SB) or a CT bonus (CB) for only one game as a bonus, navigation is not generated by setting the condition 2 and navigation occurs It is safe to set only as a precondition for ending the advantageous section.

<Specification example 1>
Specification Example 1 is characterized in that a bell navigation state is established from the start of the advantageous section until the batting bell is won first. In this specification, after winning the batting bell in the advantageous section, the bell navigation (pushing order notification) is performed as soon as possible, and if the batting bell is won immediately after the start of the advantageous section, the first bell navigation is made accordingly. Is generated, and thereafter the advantageous section is ended according to the result of the end lottery of the advantageous section. This specification is intended to shift the advantageous section to the endable state as soon as possible when not winning the "GG" which is an ART state in which the medals actually increase uniformly. For example, when winning the "normally advantageous" advantageous section, although the game is not won as a result, an excessively long game number is notified as an advantageous section, and the player can not play the game in a situation where it is difficult to stop the game. In the case where the player is forced to continue, a player who feels that it may have been shown to be extremely long if he or she eventually fails to hit may significantly reduce his interest in the gaming machine, and such case may be appropriately suppressed. It is a specification that can be done.
As the flow until the end of the advantageous section, the three patterns in FIGS.
First, FIG. 157 shows the case where the batting bell is won before the MB after the start of the advantageous section, and the advantageous section ends without winning the MB. In this case, since the player gets the batting order bell by the navigation, “payment by the bell navigation of the advantageous section (CZ / high probability)” shown in FIG. 161 occurs. Since the winning probability of the batting bell is about 1/4 and the winning probability of the MB is different from the setting of 1/15 to 1/17, this pattern that the batting bell wins before the MB is The frequency of occurrence is high. In addition, although it may occur when winning a MB before the end of the advantageous section after the hitting bell has been hit and one or more pushing order navigations have been generated, the winnings of MBs and the number of winnings during MB operation are It is not influenced by the occurrence of the forward navigation, and does not affect the "payment by the bell navigation of the advantageous section (CZ / high probability)" shown in FIG. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. Although it combines and demonstrates, MB of this example of a specification and an example is the same specification, and it is the specification in which payment of nine sheets is obtained by correct pressing position, and payment of eight sheets is obtained by incorrect pressing position solution. In order to secure the minimum level of skill intervention, we have provided a case in which eight wins, but if you stop the red BAR symbol on at least one of the reels, for example, you can win nine It is a specification that even beginners can play with peace of mind as being able to win easily.

  Next, FIG. 158 shows a pattern in the case where the MB is won before the batting bell in the specification example 1 and thereafter the advantageous section ends without hitting the batting bell. As described above, this pattern does not generate “disbursement by the bell navigation of the advantageous section (CZ / high probability)” shown in FIG. 161, but since the MB has a lower winning probability than the batting bell, as shown in FIG. The frequency of occurrence is lower than the pattern shown in 157. It should be noted that if only the winning probability is considered, if the MB winning probability is higher than the batting bell, it may be considered that the occurrence frequency of the bell navigation can be suppressed, but even if the number of payouts by the MB is small, We adopt the solution that there is a possibility that it will be non-conforming in the item of the feature ratio in the ball test (nonconforming event based on the ratio of bonus payout to the total payout being too high), and the MB winning probability is higher than the batting bell. In this case, the degree of freedom in ball design is extremely low.

  Next, FIG. 159 shows a pattern in which, although the batting bell is won before MB in the specification example 1, the bell navigation is generated, the MB is won before the end of the subsequent advantageous section. In this case, since the end condition of the advantageous section can be satisfied by satisfying the above condition 2 by the win and operation of the MB as a result, it is possible to suppress the balls by the navigation in the "normally advantageous" state of the advantageous section. To increase the interest of the game by making it possible to gain enough popping balls with "GG," which is the "hit" that the player waits for, by increasing the winning of popping balls in that part GG (which may be referred to as this AT). In terms of the design concept of the ball, it can be said that the specification that allows the generation of the batting order bell navigation immediately after entering the advantageous section has acted in an undesirable direction. In addition, although this event can be suppressed by the method of ending the advantageous section immediately at the time of the first bell navigation occurrence, since the batting order bell is established with a high probability of about 1/4, immediately after the advantageous section lamp is lit If the bell navigator is generated once and the advantageous section ends on average about 4 games, a state of “normally advantageous” is provided to produce whether or not to win the GG for an appropriate number of games. Because it is difficult to be entertained, it is possible to greatly reduce the degree of freedom in ball design and stage design if this method is adopted.

Example 1
Next, the flow of the advantageous section according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, in the first embodiment, the following conditions are applied to the advantageous section.
First condition: Even if a player wins a batting bell, it will be in the non-generation state of bell navigation and 100 will not generate bell navigation until 100 G has passed since the start of the advantageous section.
Second condition: The winning probability of MB is relatively high at about 1/17 (see FIG. 151).
Third condition: After the MB operation ends, the advantageous section is ended in accordance with the lottery result of the advantageous section end lottery.
As a result, even though the advantageous section is started and reaches 100 G, the advantageous section is incapable of ending even if it hits the batting bell (non-navabi generated state), while the probability of winning the MB is relatively high. The MB is easy to win by then, and the end lottery of the advantageous section is performed for each game (unit game) as the possible end of the advantageous section (the state where the bell navigation can be generated), and the MB is activated by winning the end of the advantageous section. After the end, the advantageous section ends. According to the first embodiment, the player can suppress the withdrawal by the navigation in the "normally advantageous" state of the advantageous section and increase the acquisition of the withdrawal by the part GG (this may be described as the AT). In terms of the ball design concept of wanting to increase the interest of the game by acquiring enough balls with "GG", which is a "wait" to be desired, as shown in Figs. 157 and 159, "normally advantageous" with batting order It is possible to suppress an undesirable event in which a bell is won for winning and a ball is obtained. In addition, since the medal acquisition by MB operation is not affected by the navigation, by suppressing the navigation occurrence rate in the “normal advantage”, the base value of “normal” and “normal advantage” of the normal section (input The ratio of the number of paid-out sheets to the number of sheets can be suppressed to a value close to almost, and the balls for that amount can be distributed to "GG".

  In the flow of the advantageous section according to the first embodiment, the occurrence of pushing order navigation in the advantageous section can be appropriately suppressed, and the degree of freedom in ball design can be enhanced. Specifically, without increasing the number of balls in the “normally favorable” state of the advantageous section, as shown in FIG. Can increase the degree of freedom in the design of the ball.

  In the explanation so far, MB has been illustrated and described as "SMB" which always wins in the established game. On the other hand, in "LMB", the winning is inhibited by the replay in the established game, and a state between bonus flags (during carrying over) occurs. Here, in the state between the flags of the bonus, a specification may be made to generate push order navigation, or a specification not to be generated. From the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of the bell navigation in the above-mentioned "normally advantageous" state, it is effective to set the specification not to generate the push order navigation. In addition, based on the fact that LMB is won with a winning probability of about 1/448 (see winning numbers No. 49 and No. 50 in FIG. 151, winning probability is 146/65536 in the advantageous section), "GG" is won. In order to advance the game in the flow of "GG" during flag status, LMB winning, LMB in operation, etc., the flag status is also a game status where the player can be regarded as a GG win status. It is desirable to have a specification that generates In addition, in the case of the first embodiment, there is one type of bonus that can be carried over, but in the case of a model equipped with a plurality of types of carryable bonuses such as LMB1 and LMB2, for example, push order navigation is performed according to the bonus type during carry over. May be generated or not generated, and the type of bonus may be inferred to the player depending on the presence or absence of the navigation, or in the batting bell winning game during carry over, the navigation is always generated. Alternatively, the game may be uniformly processed as a specification that is not generated at all, and it may be difficult to narrow down the bonus types from the presence or absence of navigation, as the game type in which the bonus types are narrowed down with the stopped reels (the so-called reach eyes) of the main reel.

<Specification example 2>
Next, the flow at the end of the advantageous section according to Typical Example 4 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, in the typical example 4, when the ART ("GG") finishes digesting the predetermined number of games (for example, 100 G), the advantageous section also ends accordingly, and the initialization process is performed. As a result, after ART is finished, the next game is shifted to the normal section (non-favorable section). According to such a flow at the end of the advantageous section, although it is possible to play a game while expecting to obtain a certain amount of balls during the ART, in exchange for that, it shifts to the normal section after the ART is completed. Since it has been decided that the player has made a decision, the player will tend to end the game at the end of the ART. That is, not only the interest of the game can not be enhanced but also the operating rate of the gaming machine tends to decrease if the advantageous section is also terminated with the termination of the ART.

Example 2
Next, the flow of the advantageous section according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, in the second embodiment, when the ART (“GG”) finishes the predetermined game number (for example, 100 G) and ends, the end time advantageous section end lottery described above is performed. When the final advantageous section end "lottery" results in "end", as in the typical example 4, after the ART end, the next game is shifted to the normal section (non- advantageous section).

  On the other hand, when winning "continuation" as a result of the end advantageous section end lottery at the end of ART, the normal section is determined by the advantageous section initial normal mode lottery without shifting to the "normal" section of the normal section. Transition to 'normal advantage'. At this time, in the “normally advantageous” state, basically, since the predetermined number of games (100 G) has been exceeded since the start of the advantageous section, the advantageous section end lottery is performed for each game, and thus the advantageous section end lottery After the initialization process of the advantageous section, it shifts to the "normal" state of the normal section.

  Also, in the "normally advantageous" state, when the rank of the normal mode is promoted and becomes higher (for example, in the case of "super heaven" or "next precursor"), it becomes easier to win the GG lottery, and thus when you win the GG , "GG precursor" etc. will be transferred to ART ("GG") again.

  According to such a flow at the end of the advantageous section in the second embodiment, since the expectation that the advantageous section may continue to be transferred to the ART again even after the ART end is enhanced, the interest of the game is enhanced. It can also contribute to the increase in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Example 3
Next, the flow of the advantageous section according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, in the third embodiment, for example, the aspect displayed on the display unit 100 at the time of opening may be different.

  For example, in the initial state after the power is turned off after closing the store and the power is turned on before the store is opened without changing the setting, a general display according to the “normal” state as shown in FIG. The mode is displayed on the display unit 100. At this time, generally, the gaming state is RT1.

  On the other hand, in the initial state after setting change (for example, re-setting to the same setting such as determining setting 1 again from setting 1 after setting change work is performed) is performed as shown in FIG. In order to indicate that it is in RT0 different from RT1 which will generally stay in the gaming state at the time of opening, as shown in), a display mode such as "Transcript stage of three sentences to get up early" is displayed unit 100 Is displayed on. That is, in the initial state at the time of opening the store after the setting change, the gaming state is RT0, and it is suggested in the display unit 100 that the RT0 is the “normal” state.

In the case of winning the advantageous section in the “normal” state between RT0 and another RT (for example, RT1), the advantage is provided in any of the first to third patterns as shown below .
(First pattern)
In the case of winning the advantageous section at RT0: Pushing order navigation becomes two or more times, and it is easy to win ART ("GG") with a ball.
In the case of winning the advantageous section at another RT: It is easy to win CZ ("JOT") with no pushout by pushing order navigation once.
(Second pattern)
In the case of winning the advantageous section at RT0: The winning of ART ("GG") is determined.
In the case of winning the advantageous section at other RTs: Either ART ("GG") or CZ ("JOT") can be won.
(Third pattern)
In the case of winning an advantageous section at RT0: Of ART ("GG") and CZ ("JOT"), the ratio of winning ART is relatively high. Note that “relatively high” may include a case where the ratio of winning ART is 100% and the ratio of winning CZ is 0%.
In the case of winning an advantageous section at another RT: Of ART ("GG") and CZ ("JOT"), the ratio of winning ART is relatively low. Note that “relatively low” may include a case in which the ratio of winning ART is 0% and the ratio of winning CZ is 100%.

  According to such an initial state of the third embodiment, a state in which the advantage can be expected even in the “normal” state can be determined by the display mode at the time of opening, and when the player selects the game machine in the morning It can be used effectively as a measure of

  It should be noted that with the above-mentioned specifications, there is a disadvantage that the setting change is easy for the game arcade side. If it is possible to make it difficult for the player to guess whether or not the set value has changed to the previous day if the same setting is reworked, if there are a large number of installed units, etc. It takes effort. Therefore, when power is turned on, the same screen as shown in FIG. 164 (a) may be displayed after power on as in the case of setting change, on condition that a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous power interruption. The predetermined time in this case is, for example, a temporary power interruption during operation so that the suggestion screen as shown in FIG. 164 (a) is not displayed. It is desirable to set the length of time that will elapse.

  Then, the player turns the portable terminal interlocking function on so that the user can actively use the service provided by the maker such as the portable terminal interlocking function (Unimemo (registered trademark)). It is good also as a specification which displays an advantageous screen at the time of opening as shown in Drawing 164 (a), only when it carries out. In addition, on the customer waiting screen in which the player has not inserted any medals, a common customer waiting screen (demo screen) may be displayed so that it can not be determined whether or not the setting is changed. . By doing this, it is possible to determine the state for the first time by borrowing the medal and actually inserting the medal, so from the moment of motivation and opening of the store, the player should first sit in the seat and borrow the medal. Can motivate customers to come to the store. However, in a store where the number of game players at the time of opening is extremely small, there may be cases where a player who walks a plurality of platforms with a borrowed token and tries to monopolize the advantageous RT0 may appear. As a countermeasure for such a player, it is possible that the staff of the game arcade can arbitrarily set by the hall menu whether or not the setting change suggestion screen as shown in FIG. Stores that do not want to be discriminated may be provided with a function that enables the setting in which the normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 164 (b) even when the setting is changed.

[Various functions of main control board and sub control board]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. Subsequently, various functions of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 of the pachislot machine 1 will be described.

  The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1; therefore, variation control means, internal winning combination determination means, stop control means, state control means, advantageous state notification It functions as means, mode control means, and RT control means. The stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R function as stop operation means. The reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display window 4 function as variable display means. The sub control board 72 and the notification lamp 147a function as operation mode notification means. The status indicator 147b functions as an advantageous status notification means. These functions will be described in the following appendices, and the corresponding ones in the embodiment are attached to the end in parentheses.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may have, for example, the functions described below.

  For example, in the case of winning (continuation) at the end advantageous period end lottery at the end of “GG” (ART) end, a state of a guarantee period is provided in which stay in the “normal advantageous” advantageous period is guaranteed over a predetermined number of games. You may do so. In the case where a guarantee section is provided, it is possible to avoid a situation where one game or two games end, for example, even though the game is completed even though the advantageous section is continued, despite winning the final advantageous section end lottery. It can control that people feel stressed.

  For example, a fixed period such as 20 games may be provided as the guarantee section. In the case of a fixed period, the load due to the processing of the ball lottery by the main control board 71 can be reduced, and the game property becomes clear. On the other hand, the number of games and the like given as the guarantee section may be determined by lottery based on the conditions regarding continuation and end of the guarantee section. It may be decided also about grant of guarantee section itself. Furthermore, the number of games in the guarantee section and the like may be determined together with the continuation of winning by the end advantageous section end lottery. In such a case, data necessary for the lottery process can be reduced. In the case where the number of games and the like of the guarantee section is determined by lottery separately from the final advantageous section end lottery, various game characteristics can be realized.

  In addition, the above-mentioned guarantee section may be continued until a predetermined combination (for example, bell, replay, MB, etc.) wins or wins a predetermined number of times without managing the number of games.

  The end of the advantageous section lottery in “normally advantageous” may not be performed until the end of the guarantee section, or may be performed during the guarantee section. In the case of winning (terminating) the advantageous section end lottery in the guarantee section, the winning result is stored as a flag, for example, and the normal game ("normal") is performed in the next game at the end of the guarantee section or at the end. It may be made to shift.

  It may be suggested or informed that the guarantee section is in progress or that the end condition of the guarantee section is satisfied. In such a case, it is easy to recognize that it is a chance after the end of ART ("GG"), and it is possible for the player to suppress the decline in the willingness to play, and thus to increase the operating rate of the gaming machine. For example, a clear notification may be given by displaying "the chance state continuation determination remaining 20 games" or the like on the display unit 100, or a stage or the like that suggests that ART ("GG") is likely to win is displayed. You may make it perform. Further, the effect may be performed in the effect mode dedicated to the guarantee section by the effect executing means such as video, sound, and lamp.

  With regard to the availability of the guarantee section, a setting difference may be provided, and the degree of advantage for determination regarding the guarantee section may be made different based on the setting value. For example, when the number of games in the guarantee section is determined by lottery, the average is 20 games in case of setting 1, and the average is 50 games in case of setting 6, and the higher the setting, the ART ("GG") It may be a specification that is likely to cause a pullback (to win the ART again soon after the end of the ART). In such a case, the player can reliably detect the end of the advantageous section by confirming the turning off of the status indicator 147b, and can surely grasp the number of games in the advantageous section after the ART is ended. Furthermore, the player can estimate the set value according to the number of games in the advantageous section after the ART end which has been grasped, and even if the amount of balls after the ART end is reduced, the expectation of the set value estimation and pullback is felt By holding the game while playing, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  Also, as a modification of the fourth embodiment, for example, the flow of gaming state as shown in FIG. 165 may be used, and the state of playing balls as shown in FIG. 147 may be applied to such gaming state. .

  The fourth embodiment has been described on the assumption that the lighting / non-lighting state of the advantageous section lamp (the status indicator 147b) corresponds to the advantageous section and the non-preferred section (the normal section), for example, as shown in FIG. As described above, a standby section related to a bonus (BB with no setting difference or the like) may be set as a section on the way from the non-favorable section (normal section) to the advantageous section.

  The standby section means a section in which the advantageous section lamp (the status indicator 147b) is not lighted up to the winning of the bonus even if the advantageous section is won at the bonus winning with no setting difference. That is, from the winning of the bonus to the winning, the advantageous section lamp becomes a non-lighting standby state, and the advantageous section lamp turns on at the time of the bonus winning and the advantageous section advances.

  For such a standby section, for example, the standby section flag is set by winning of “BB1 + watermelon”, and while the standby section proceeds to the winning of BB1, the standby section flag is not set by winning of “BB1 + cherry”, and the winning The setting presence or absence of the standby section may be determined for each flag so that the advantageous section is started without passing through the standby section on condition of. However, it is desirable not to divide the setting of the standby section with the same flag. As described above, in the bonus corresponding to the setting of the standby section, the advantageous section lamp can be turned off as the standby section during bonus carryover even if the bonus section is won simultaneously with the winning of the bonus.

<Modification>
In the embodiments and specification examples so far, the advantageous section is based on the concept of only one advantageous section, and by devising a state in which the batting officer's instruction (navi) is likely to occur, a state in which it is unlikely to occur, etc. The invention has been described to enhance the interest of gaming while enhancing the whiteness of the game design. From here, the game character is organized by further dividing the concept of the advantageous section,
It is also conceivable to improve the efficiency of development. Hereinafter, as an example, among the advantageous sections, a section will be described in which a section in which the payout is difficult to increase is defined as a “rendering section” and a section in which the payout is generally easy to increase is an “increment section”.

First, each section is defined as follows as a premise.
Normal section: A section in which the payout rate does not exceed 1 (the occurrence of an instruction is arbitrary), and a section in which the transition ratio to the effect section or the increase section is defined as one.
Production section: A section where the payout rate does not exceed 1 (the occurrence of an instruction is optional), and the transition ratio to other presentation sections or increase sections is the same as that of the normal section, but the transition destination (processing related to the instruction function Sections with different contents). Included in the advantageous section.
Incrementing zone: A zone in which all game medals increase by pushing (in which the payout rate does not always exceed 1), and different from the regular section and the rendering section, an instruction is given for each state of the increasing section which is predetermined in the increasing section. A section where processing related to functions can be freely performed. Included in the advantageous section.
On the premise of this definition, for the advantageous section lamp, it is preferable to win the effect section or the increase section, and to turn on when the ball out rate becomes more than 1 and to turn off when initializing. . By doing this, there is no situation where the medal does not increase even though the advantageous section lamp is lit, so that at least the medal increases to provide a gaming machine having a specification that is easy for the player to understand.
In addition, when ending the increase section, by initializing parameters relating to the performance related to the instruction function and shifting to the normal section, it is possible to secure fairness among the players. Then, as in the case of winning by the above-mentioned advantageous section continuation lottery at the end of the above-mentioned "GG", it shifts to the presentation section after the increase section, and in the gaming state in which the consecutive guest of "GG" is expected, Even in this case, the advantageous section lamp may be maintained in the lighted state, and the specification may be taken into consideration from the viewpoint of preventing the player from stopping the game in a state that "hits" may be continuous.

The same transition ratio (probability of winning) to the other effect sections or the increase section, and the difference in the transfer destination (the content of the process relating to the instruction function) indicate the following game specifications as an example.
1: Winning interval of advantageous section transition lottery in normal section Winning probability of advantageous section transition lottery: 1/100
Transition pre-assignment production section (CZ) 75% increase section (ART) 25%
Transition occurrence probability Effectsing interval (CZ) about 1/133 Increasing interval (ART) about 1/400
1: Transition to the advantageous section transition in the production section (CZ) winning probability of the transition to the advantageous section transition 1/100 This winning probability 1/100 is common and the transition ratio is the same.
Transition pre-assignment production section (upper CZ) 10% increase section (ART) 90%
Transition occurrence probability Production section (upper CZ) approximately 1/1000 Increase section (ART) approximately 1/11
As described above, by changing the distribution of the transition destination, the winning coefficient of the advantageous section lottery is referred to the same value, and among the advantageous sections, it is possible to shift to the increasing section where the medal increases like "GG", As in “normal advantage” and “JOT”, although it can not be expected to increase medals much, it is possible to have a range of distribution as to whether or not to make it a chance condition of winning GG, simplifying the overall processing flow. While, it is possible to create the transition variation of various game state.
If the effect section is too long, the player will be forced to play the game excessively while an increase in medals can not be expected, and the player may feel uncomfortable, for example, 16 games or less or 32 A certain number of games may be set as the upper limit such as a game. In addition, the number of games that function as an index that does not excessively restrain the player, for example, when the consumed medals reach a predetermined number (for example, 50) or when the number of times the batting bell is established reaches a predetermined number (for example, eight) Other parameters may be referred to as an end condition of the effect section.

  In the above-described embodiment, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination without setting difference, but in this modification, the advantageous segment transition lottery is performed based on the determination of the internal winning combination with the setting difference. Is supposed to do. Even in this case, the difference in the payout rate and the ART occurrence rate based on the difference in the winning probability of the internal winning combination as referring to the lottery table common to all settings common to the advantageous section-related lottery table itself. To create a difference. As a result, it is possible to create a difference in the payout rate and the ART generation rate without increasing the volume of the advantageous section-related lottery table itself.

When a "production zone" is won during the bonus operation, it is desirable to turn on the advantageous zone lamp because it is possible to expect an increase in gaming medals due to the advantageous section and the presentation section and the bonus operation. It is possible to enjoy the game while paying attention to the advantageous section lamp while the bonus operation is not completed. In this case, when transitioning to a rendering section (such as CZ) after the bonus, the advantageous section lamp is turned off at the end of the bonus. When transitioning to an increase section (such as ART) after a bonus, it is preferable to keep the advantageous section lamp on as it is.
During the so-called ART preparation to shift RT to high RT, it is definitely determined that the right to shift to ART, which is extremely advantageous for the player, has already been granted although the payout rate does not necessarily exceed 1 By notifying, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game is stopped while leaving the right of ART.

In addition to the internal winning combination, the lottery related to the advantageous section may be performed based on the displayed results (also referred to as a symbol combination, a winning result, and a result display) on the effective line of the main reel. For example, there is an internal winning combination A in which one of the three-piece winning combination and the one-piece winning combination can be won at the timing of the beating. In this case, when three winning combinations are won, advantageous section-related lottery is not performed, or performed under conditions that are more disadvantageous than when one winning combination is won, when single winning combination is won, advantageous section-related lottery It is recommended that the player use a batting method to avoid the winning of a 3-sheet winning combination intentionally with a look and feel, based on a normal time base, on the condition that it is performed under favorable conditions than when the 3-a-seat winning combination has won. The player who has selected the lower hitting style may have a specification that the ART is easy to win.
By adopting such a specification, instead of not reducing the number of medals by watching the three-piece game at a normal time, enjoy long-time gaming with a game feature that is difficult to win the ART, or watch one game at a normal time In this case, the player can enjoy the game with a short-time playability of being able to easily win the ART instead of having a high rate of reduction of medals, and the player can freely select it, and the range of the playability is expanded.
In addition, the above is only an example, and it is not limited to the condition that the winning of a small number of payouts such as a single sheet is not the condition, RT transition appearances to shift to RT with a low degree of advantage by eye pushing In the case where the small part is dropped or displayed, the advantageous section related lottery may be performed under better conditions than in the case where the advantageous display result is derived.
If this idea is organized, when a predetermined internal winning combination with a different display result is determined according to the stop operation mode, giving the game value (medal) or transition of RT or activation of a bonus etc. is the most advantageous with respect to the benefit by the winning determination. Perform a predetermined advantageous section-related lottery based on not having derived the display result, or a content that is more advantageous than the case where the content of the advantageous section-related lottery has the most advantageous display result for the benefit from the entrance decision Can be expressed as it will be done in

By making the internal winning combination overlap so that the number of medals is substantially reduced during a part of bonus operations, the number of bonus positions is decreased, and the number of increases per game in ART is increased to about three. Method or, only bonus net bonus is established during bonus operation and net bonus is increased by 0 sheets, and the bonus is used in the game machine type test to offset and match the speed of increase in ART. Specifications are also conceivable. In addition, as an advantage section related lottery within the bonus, the regular section, the rendering section, and the advantageous section also stay in the RT during the bonus internal, so as to confine the bonus that the bonus is extremely difficult to win by increasing the minor role probability. These specifications may be adopted in accordance with the modified example to provide a game machine with an appropriate payout speed which is highly desired by the player or the game arcade.
In addition, some players feel that high gambling is high when the ball speed is high, so the number of limiter games should be shortened from 1,500 to 1,200 games, etc. to appropriately suppress gaminess and prevent so-called enthusiasm. You may consider from a viewpoint.
In addition, the number of games serving as the trigger condition of the limiter may start counting from the start of the advantageous section including the effect section or may start counting from the start of the increasing section. In addition, in the game of one day, starting from the difference number of the point with the largest negative value as seen from the customer side, when the 3000 medals increase from there, the limiter is activated, etc. With reference to the situation such as the number of cards, the irritability may be suppressed by a limiter corresponding to an element other than the number of games.

[Supplementary Note 1]
The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 1 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In this type of gaming machine, as a device for facilitating so-called payout design, a gaming machine is known in which an internal winning combination is won so that the payout rate falls below 1 in some bonus states. (For example, refer to JP-A-2015-202331). In addition, as a prophetic effect of whether or not to win the AT (assist time) which is advantageous for the player, a gaming machine elaborated in a complicated rendition mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player It is known (for example, refer to JP, 2015-16085, A).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is premised that the player plays a game mainly in the bonus carryover state, and the enjoyment of winning the bonus balls and losing the balls is lost. Further, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 2, the rendering mode and specifications are complicated, and there is a problem that it is difficult for a non-expert to grasp what kind of state is advantageous.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and makes it easy for a player to grasp a state advantageous to the player, and a gaming machine capable of enhancing the freedom of ball design by a method different from the old one. Intended to be provided.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) which can be operated by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means;
Variation control means (for example, main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display means based on establishment of the start condition;
Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition;
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means Stop control means (for example, main control board 71);
Operation mode notification means (for example, the sub control board 72 and the notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying the user of the operation modes for the plurality of stop operation means advantageous for the player;
State control means (e.g., main control board 71) for controlling an advantageous state (e.g., advantageous section) in which notification by the operation mode notifying means can be performed;
An advantageous state notifying means (for example, a state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state;
A gaming machine (e.g., pachislot machine 1) equipped with
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a “normally advantageous” state) in which notification by the operation mode notifying means is possible when a predetermined condition is established (for example, upon winning of an advantageous section transition lottery); 1) at least having a second advantageous state (for example, the state of "GG" (ART)) in which the possibility of notification by the operation mode notifying means is higher than that of the advantageous state;
As the internal winning combination which can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous for the plurality of variable display means is derived when the stopping operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stopping operating means; A special part (for example, pushing order bell) that can result in a result display different from the advantageous result display on the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Have a predetermined bonus role (for example, MB),
The state control means may be notified by the operation mode notifying means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or a result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an end of advantageous section lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after at least one of the display being derived is satisfied,
In the first advantageous state, a notification suppression state (for example, a bell navigation non-generation state) in which notification by the operation mode notifying means is not performed in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination; A notification permission state (for example, a bell navigation generation possible state) in which notification by the operation mode notification means is permitted in the unit game determined as the internal winning combination,
From the start of the first advantageous state to the establishment of a specific condition (for example, a predetermined number of games (100 G)), the notification suppression state is established.

  According to such a configuration, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in which the possibility of notification is different are provided, and the first advantageous state is basically ended as the notification suppression state until the specific condition is satisfied. Since there is no such condition, the notification of the operation mode can be suppressed by appropriately setting such specific conditions to achieve an advantage balance between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, which is an advantage for the player. While making it easy to grasp, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in ball design.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The specific condition is that a predetermined number of unit games (for example, 100G) are executed, and the predetermined number is more than the average number of unit games taken until the predetermined bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is characterized by many things.

  According to such a gaming machine, there is a high possibility that a predetermined bonus combination is determined and a determination result for ending the advantageous state is obtained before the specific condition is established, so that the advantageous balance between the advantageous state and the bonus is obtained. Can be implemented properly.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of easily grasping an advantageous state for a player and capable of increasing the degree of freedom in ball design by a method different from the conventional one.

[Supplementary Note 2]
The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In this type of gaming machine, as a prelude effect of whether or not to win an AT (assist time) which is advantageous to the player, the complex presentation mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player is attractive A fancy game machine is known (see, for example, JP-A-2015-16085).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, the presentation mode and specifications are complicated, and there is a problem that it is difficult for a non-expert to grasp what kind of state is advantageous. In addition, since the omen effect ends without obtaining any benefit, there is a risk that the interest of the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of making it easy to grasp an advantageous state for a player and enhancing the interest of the game.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) which can be operated by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means;
Variation control means (for example, main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display means based on establishment of the start condition;
Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition;
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means Stop control means (for example, main control board 71);
Operation mode notification means (for example, the sub control board 72 and the notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying the user of the operation modes for the plurality of stop operation means advantageous for the player;
State control means (e.g., main control board 71) for controlling an advantageous state (e.g., advantageous section) in which notification by the operation mode notifying means can be performed;
An advantageous state notifying means (for example, a state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state;
A gaming machine (e.g., pachislot machine 1) equipped with
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a “normally advantageous” state) in which notification by the operation mode notifying means is possible when a predetermined condition is established (for example, upon winning of an advantageous section transition lottery); 1) At least a second advantageous state (for example, a state of “GG” (ART)) which can be shifted from the advantageous state and the possibility of notification by the operation mode notifying means is higher than that of the first advantageous state.
A mode control unit (eg, main control board 71) capable of controlling a mode (eg, normal mode) in the first advantageous state;
As the internal winning combination which can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous for the plurality of variable display means is derived when the stopping operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stopping operating means; A special part (for example, pushing order bell) that can result in a result display different from the advantageous result display on the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Have a predetermined bonus role (for example, MB),
The state control means may be notified by the operation mode notifying means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or a result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an end of advantageous section lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after at least one of the display being derived is satisfied,
As modes in the first advantageous state, a first mode (for example, "low probability" in normal mode, "heaven preparation") and a second mode (for example, "heaven" in normal mode, "super heaven", "special") , "Precursor next time") and
The first mode and the second mode are characterized in that the possibility of transition to the second advantageous state (for example, the winning probability of "GG") is different.

  According to such a configuration, the first and second advantageous states are provided with different notification possibilities, and in the first advantageous state, the first mode and the second mode are different in the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state. Since two modes are provided, the player can play while expecting to shift to the second advantageous state while staying in any mode, making it easy to grasp the advantageous state for the player, It can enhance the interest of the game.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of easily grasping an advantageous state for a player and enhancing the interest of the game.

[Supplementary Note 3]
The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In this type of gaming machine, as a prelude effect of whether or not to win an AT (assist time) which is advantageous to the player, the complex presentation mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player is attractive A fancy game machine is known (see, for example, JP-A-2015-16085).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, the presentation mode and specifications are complicated, and there is a problem that it is difficult for a non-expert to grasp what kind of state is advantageous. For example, if the game is ended without noticing it despite the fact that the winning of the AT has been internally determined, the player will not be able to enjoy the benefits that would normally be obtained.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and makes it easy for a player to grasp an advantageous state, and reduces the possibility of a player's miss, while making the gaming state regarding AT lottery colorful. It aims at providing a game machine that can be played.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) which can be operated by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means;
Variation control hand (for example, main control board 71) stage for fluctuating display of the plurality of variable display means based on establishment of start condition;
Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition;
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means Stop control means (for example, main control board 71);
Operation mode notification means (for example, the sub control board 72 and the notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying the user of the operation modes for the plurality of stop operation means advantageous for the player;
Condition control means (e.g., main control) for controlling an advantageous state (e.g., an advantageous section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means can be performed and a general state (e.g., a normal period) in which notification by the operation mode notification means can not be performed 71) and
An advantageous state notifying means (for example, a state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state;
A gaming machine (e.g., pachislot machine 1) equipped with
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a “normally advantageous” state) in which notification by the operation mode notifying means is possible when a predetermined condition is established (for example, upon winning of an advantageous section transition lottery); 1) At least a second advantageous state (for example, a state of “GG” (ART)) which can be shifted from the advantageous state and the possibility of notification by the operation mode notifying means is higher than that of the first advantageous state.
A mode control unit (eg, main control board 71) capable of controlling a mode (eg, normal mode) in the first advantageous state;
As the internal winning combination which can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous for the plurality of variable display means is derived when the stopping operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stopping operating means; A special part (for example, pushing order bell) that can result in a result display different from the advantageous result display on the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Have a predetermined bonus role (for example, MB),
The state control means may be notified by the operation mode notifying means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or a result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an end of advantageous section lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after at least one of the display being derived is satisfied,
As modes in the first advantageous state, a first mode (for example, "low probability" in normal mode, "heaven preparation") and a second mode (for example, "heaven" in normal mode, "super heaven", "special") , "Precursor next time") and
The second mode is more likely to shift to the second advantageous state than the first mode,
The general state is characterized in that the probability of transitioning to the second advantageous state (for example, the winning probability of “GG”) is higher than that of the first mode.

  According to such a configuration, the general state in which the notification is not performed and the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in which the possibility of the notification is different are provided, and in the first advantageous state, the transition to the second advantageous state is performed. The first mode and the second mode are provided with different possibilities. Since the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state in the general state is higher than the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state in the first mode of the first advantageous state, the player may be notified It is possible to play the game while expecting the transition to the second advantageous state even in a non-permanent state, making it easy for the player to grasp the advantageous state, and reducing the risk of the player losing, so-called AT It is possible to make the gaming state concerning the lottery colorful.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making it easy to grasp an advantageous state for a player, and reducing the possibility of a player's miss, while making the gaming state regarding AT lottery colorful. it can.

[Supplementary Note 4]
The gaming machine of appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In this type of gaming machine, as a prelude effect of whether or not to win an AT (assist time) which is advantageous to the player, the complex presentation mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player is attractive A fancy game machine is known (see, for example, JP-A-2015-16085).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, the presentation mode and specifications are complicated, and there is a problem that it is difficult for a non-expert to grasp what kind of state is advantageous. For example, if the game is ended without noticing it despite the fact that the winning of the AT has been internally determined, the player will not be able to enjoy the benefits that would normally be obtained.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and makes it easy for a player to grasp an advantageous state, and reduces the possibility of a player's miss, while making the gaming state regarding AT lottery colorful. It aims at providing a game machine that can be played.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) which can be operated by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means;
Variation control means (for example, main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display means based on establishment of the start condition;
Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition;
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means Stop control means (for example, main control board 71);
Operation mode notification means (for example, the sub control board 72 and the notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying the user of the operation modes for the plurality of stop operation means advantageous for the player;
Condition control means (e.g., main control) for controlling an advantageous state (e.g., an advantageous section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means can be performed and a general state (e.g., a normal period) in which notification by the operation mode notification means can not be performed 71) and
An advantageous state notifying means (for example, a state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state;
A gaming machine (e.g., pachislot machine 1) equipped with
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a “normally advantageous” state) in which notification by the operation mode notifying means is possible when a predetermined condition is established (for example, upon winning of an advantageous section transition lottery); 1) At least a second advantageous state (for example, a state of “GG” (ART)) which can be shifted from the advantageous state and the possibility of notification by the operation mode notifying means is higher than that of the first advantageous state.
As the internal winning combination which can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous for the plurality of variable display means is derived when the stopping operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stopping operating means; A special part (for example, pushing order bell) that can result in a result display different from the advantageous result display on the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Have a predetermined bonus role (for example, MB),
The state control means may be notified by the operation mode notifying means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or a result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an end of advantageous section lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after at least one of the display being derived is satisfied,
A determination as to whether to shift to the first advantage state or to shift to the general state (eg, if the end condition of the second advantageous state (eg, game number 0 of "GG" (ART) is satisfied) It is characterized in that it is possible to execute an end advantageous section end lottery).

  According to such a configuration, a general state in which the notification is not performed and a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the possibility of the notification is different are provided, and the advantageous state is determined as the internal winning combination. Notification may be made, or a result display corresponding to a predetermined bonus combination may be derived, or may be made to shift to the general state according to the result of the end determination after satisfying either one of the notification At the end of the second advantage state, which is more likely, it is possible to shift to the first advantage state without transitioning to the general state and the advantage state may continue, so that the player grasps the advantageous state It is possible to make the game state relating to the so-called AT lottery more colorful while making it easier for the player to miss the game.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making it easy to grasp an advantageous state for a player, and reducing the possibility of a player's miss, while making the gaming state regarding AT lottery colorful. it can.

[Supplementary Note 5]
The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 5 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination") and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In this type of gaming machine, as a prelude effect of whether or not to win an AT (assist time) which is advantageous to the player, the complex presentation mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player is attractive A fancy game machine is known (see, for example, JP-A-2015-16085).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, the presentation mode and specifications are complicated, and there is a problem that it is difficult for a non-expert to grasp what kind of state is advantageous. For example, if the game is ended without noticing it despite the fact that the winning of the AT has been internally determined, the player will not be able to enjoy the benefits that would normally be obtained.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and makes it easy for a player to grasp an advantageous state, and reduces the possibility of a player's miss, while making the gaming state regarding AT lottery colorful. It aims at providing a game machine that can be played.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) which can be operated by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means;
Variation control means (for example, main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display means based on establishment of the start condition;
Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition;
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means Stop control means (for example, main control board 71);
RT control means (for example, main control board 71) that can be controlled to any one of a plurality of RTs having different winning probability of at least one or more types of replay roles (for example, replay) as the internal winning combination;
Operation mode notification means (for example, the sub control board 72 and the notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying the user of the operation modes for the plurality of stop operation means advantageous for the player;
State control means (e.g., main control board 71) for controlling an advantageous state (e.g., advantageous section) in which notification by the operation mode notifying means can be performed;
An advantageous state notifying means (for example, a state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state;
A gaming machine (e.g., pachislot machine 1) equipped with
As the internal winning combination which can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous for the plurality of variable display means is derived when the stopping operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stopping operating means; A special part (for example, pushing order bell) that can result in a result display different from the advantageous result display on the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Have a predetermined bonus role (for example, MB),
The state control means may be notified by the operation mode notifying means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or a result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an end of advantageous section lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after at least one of the display being derived is satisfied,
The RT control means can control to a specific RT (for example, RT0) at the time of setting change,
The advantageous state determined to be controlled to the specific RT may be more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state determined to be controlled at an RT other than the specific RT. It is characterized by high price.

  According to such a configuration, an advantageous state in which notification can be performed is provided, and in the advantageous state, a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination and notification is performed, or a result display corresponding to a predetermined bonus combination is displayed. It may be derived or it may be ended by the result of the end judgment after satisfying either one, but when the setting change is made, the gaming state is controlled to a specific RT, which is an advantageous state Since there is a high possibility that the degree of advantage will be higher than that, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp the advantageous state, and to make the gaming state concerning so-called AT lottery colorful. it can.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making it easy to grasp an advantageous state for a player, and reducing the possibility of a player's miss, while making the gaming state regarding AT lottery colorful. it can.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachi-slot machine, 3L, 3C, 3R ... Reel, 4L, 4C, 4R ... Display window, 7L, 7C, 7R ... Stop button, 71 ... Main control board, 72 ... Sub control board, 100 ... Display unit, 147b ... Status indicator

Claims (2)

A plurality of variable display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
A plurality of stop operation means which can be operated by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means;
Fluctuation control means for variably displaying the plurality of variable display means based on establishment of the start condition;
An internal winning combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition;
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means Stop control means,
Operation mode notification means capable of notifying operation modes for the plurality of stop operation means advantageous to the player;
State control means for controlling an advantageous state capable of executing notification by the operation mode notification means;
An advantageous state notifying means for notifying the advantageous state;
A gaming machine equipped with
The first advantageous state in which notification by the operation mode notifying means is possible when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the second advantageous state in which the possibility of notification by the operation mode informing means is higher than that in the first advantageous state. , At least,
As the internal winning combination which can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous for the plurality of variable display means is derived when the stopping operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stopping operating means; When the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode, the plurality of variable display means have a specific combination which can derive a result display different from the advantageous result display, and a predetermined bonus combination. And
The state control means may be notified by the operation mode notifying means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or a result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means It is possible to execute an end determination for determining whether to end the advantageous state after at least one of the display being derived is satisfied,
In the first advantageous state, a notification suppressing state in which notification by the operation mode notifying means is not performed in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal combination, and the specific combination is determined as the internal combination. And a notification permission state in which notification by the operation mode notification means is permitted in a unit game.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification suppression state is established between the start of the first advantageous state and the establishment of a specific condition. The specific condition is that a predetermined number of unit games are executed, and the predetermined number is larger than the average number of unit games taken until the predetermined bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images